United States
          Environmental Protection
          Agency
          Technology Transfer
&EPA    Handbook
          Industrial Guide
          for Air Pollution
          Control

-------

-------
EPA-625/6-78-004
                        INDUSTRIAL GUIDE FOR
                       AIR POLLUTION CONTROL
               U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                          Technology Transfer
                              June 1978

-------
                               ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This handbook was prepared for the Environmental Research Information Center by PEDCo
Environmental, Inc., under EPA Contract No. 68-01^147. Alsid, Snowden and Associates
and York Research Corporation were technical reviewers of the handbook. EPA reviewers
were Robert Walsh of the Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, and Francis Biros,
Stationary Source Enforcement Division.
                                     NOTICE

The mention of trade names of commercial products in this publication is for illustration
purposes and does not constitute  endorsement or recommendation for use by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. This manual is presented as a helpful guide to the user
and should in no way be construed as a regulatory document. For legislative or enforcement
assistance, the user should contact air pollution personnel in either EPA regional offices
or the appropriate state agency.

-------
                                  CONTENTS

Chapter                                                                  Page

         ACKNOWLEDGMENTS                                              ii

         CONTENTS                                                        in

         LIST OF FIGURES                                                  v

         LIST OF TABLES                                                   viii

    1     INTRODUCTION                                                   1-1

    2     COMPLIANCE PROGRAM PLANNING

         2.1    Environmental Assessment and Planning                          2-1
         2.2    Implementing the Environmental Program                        2-10
         2.3    Related Responsibilities                                        2-14
         2.4    Examples of Corporate Environmental Programs                   2-15
         2.5    References                                                   2-19

    3     PLANT EMISSION SURVEY                                         3-1

         3.1    Introduction                                                 3-1
         3.2    Identifying and Cataloguing Emission Sources                     3-1
         3.3    Identifying and Quantifying Emissions                           3-14
         3.4    Preparing a Source Identification File                            3-21
         3.5    References                                                   3-21

    4     EMISSION REGULATIONS                                          4-1

         4.1    Legal Requirements Under the Clean Air Act Relative to Testing      4-1
         4.2    Inspection and Data Requirements Under the Clean Air Act          4-5
         4.3    Confidentiality of Data — The Freedom of Information Act          4-6
         4.4    State Implementation Plans                                     4-9
         4.5    References                                                   4-27

    5     STACK EMISSION MEASUREMENTS                                 5-1

         5.1    Introduction                                                 5-1
         5.2    Utilizing Consultants and Testing Service Organizations             5-3
                                      m

-------
                          CONTENTS - Continued

Chapter                                                           Page

       5-3    Planning and Conducting the Emission Test                    5-7
       5.4    Specified Methods for Measurement of Pollutants               5-23
       5.5    References                                            5-45

  6    AMBIENT AIR MONITORING/CONTINUOUS STACK MONITORING    6-1

       6.1    Introduction                                           6-1
       6.2    Selection of Sites for Ambient Air Monitoring                  6-3
       6.3    Equipment for Ambient Air Monitoring                      6-7
       6.4    Continuous Stack Monitoring                              6-15

  7    THE CONTINUING PROGRAM                                  7-1

       7.1    Introduction                                           7-1
       7.2    Control Equipment Maintenance                            7-7


Appendix                                                          Page

  A    SAMPLE SAROAD AND NEDS FORMS                            A-l

  B    SAMPLING AND FACILITY OPERATION CHECKLISTS              B-l

  C    DATA SHEETS (ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR, PARTICULATE
         SCRUBBER, FABRIC FILTER, AND CENTRIFUGAL PURIFIER)     C-l

  D    PROCEDURES FOR STARTUP AND SHUTDOWN OF ELECTRO-
         STATIC PRECIPITATORS                                    D-l

  E    PROCEDURES FOR TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTION OF
         BAGHOUSE MALFUNCTIONS                                E-l

  F    TYPICAL TROUBLESHOOTING CHART FOR AN ELECTRO-
         STATIC PRECIPITATOR (EXAMPLE ONLY)                      F-l
                                   IV

-------
                                 LIST OF FIGURES

Figure No.                                                                     page

    1-1     A Three-Phase Compliance Program                                    1-3

    2-1     Example Permit Application Form for Fuel Burning Equipment           2-4
    2-2     Example Portion of Application Form for a Spray Booth                 2-7
    2-3     Small Oil-Fired Boiler                                                2-8
    2-4     Spray Booth with Drier Duct in Background                            2-9
    2-5     Example Partial Organization Chart for Large Manufacturing Company    2-16
    2-6     Alternative Partial Organization                                       2-17
    2-7     Example Organization of a Large Utility                                2-18
    2-8     Example Partial Organization for a Small Company                      2-19

    3-1     Plant Personnel Verifying Emission Sources During Emission Survey       3-2
    3-2     Example Process Flow Diagram                                       3-3
    3-3     Roof of a Typical Chemical Plant With Numerous Emission Sources       3-4
    3-4     Example Presurvey Data Sheet  for Fossil-Fuel-Fired Steam Generators     3-5
    3-5     Example Precipitator Survey Data Sheet                                3-7
    3-6     Example Fabric Filter Survey Data Sheet                               3-8
    3-7     Example Scrubber or Cyclone Survey Data Sheet                        3-9
    3-8     Technical Identifying Process Stack                                    3-10
    3-9     Air Conditioning System and Duct to Root of Building                   3-12
    3-10    Obtaining Accurate  Stack Information During the Plant Tour             3-13
    3-11    Cyclone Outlet Requiring Modification by Most States Prior to
              Performing Emission Test                                          3-14
    3-12    Stack Data Requirements                                             3-15
    3-13    Compliance  Schedule Chart                                           3-17
    3-14    Source Identification Form                                            3-22
    3-15    Facility Cover Sheet                                                 3-23

   4-1     Pre-test Form Used by Ohio EPA                                      4-11
   4-2     Process Information Form Used by Ohio EPA                           4-13
   4-3     Typical Permit System Flow Diagram                                  4-15
   4-4     Typical Organization Chart for  a Local Governmental Organization        4-17
   4-5     Generalized Distribution of Functional Activities for Regulatory
              Agencies Anticipated for 1974                                      4-18
   4-6     Continuation of Permit  System                                         4-20
   4-7     Field Report Form,  Dust and Fumes, Los Angeles County Air
              Pollution Control District                                           4-21
   4-8     Agency Inspection Complaint Form                                    4-22
   4-9     Reporting of Violations                                               4-25

-------
                               FIGURES - Continued

Figure No.                                                                    PaSe

  4-10    Group Interactions for Violation Correction                            4-26
  4-11    Regulatory Agency Functions for Handling Violation                    4-27
  4-12    Typical Form for Compliance Schedule                                4-28
  5-1     Test Program Meeting Representatives                                 5-10
  5-2     Test Program Agreement on Continuing Compliance Conditions          5-11
  5-3     Test Program Agreement on Facility Operation                         5-12
  5-4     Minimum Number of Sample Points                                   5-15
  5-5     Typical Sampling Provision                                           5-18
  5-6     Monorail System                                                    5-19
  5-7     Stack Extension                                                    5-20
  5-8     Test Team  and Equipment                                           5-21
  5-9     Source Testing Report Format                                        5-24
  5-10    Velocity Measurement System                                        5-25
  5-11    Grab Sample Setup for Molecular Weight Determination                 5-27
  5-12    Integrated  Sample Setup for Molecular Weight Determination            5-27
  5-13    Moisture Sample Train                                              5-29
  5-14    Approximate Moisture Sample Train                                  5-29
  5-15    EPA Method 5 Particulate Sample Apparatus                           5-30
  5-16    EPA Method 6 Sulfur Dioxide Sample Train                           5-34
  5-17    EPA Method 7 Nitrogen Oxide Sample Train                           5-36
  5-18    Continuous Sample Train for CO                                     5-38
  5-19    Integrated  Sampling Train for CO                                     5-39
   5-20    Sampling Apparatus for CO                                          5-39
   5-21    Sampling Apparatus for Fluoride                                     5-42
   5-22    Distillation Apparatus                                               5-42

   6-1     Example of Annual Wind Rose                                       6-5
   6-2     Coordinate System Showing Plume Dispersion                         6-6
   6-3    High-Volume Air  Sampler                                            6-9
   6-4     Field Sheet for High-Volume Air Sampler                               6-10
   6-5     Sulfation Plate and Holder                                            6-11
   6-6     Dynamic Sampling Unit (Bubbler Train)                               6-13
   6-7     Systematic Approach to Continuous Stack Monitoring                   6-18
   6-8     Continuous Monitoring System                                       6-19
   6-9     Technique for Visible Emission Detection                              6-21
   6-10    Stratification of Particles in Ducts                                     6-24
   6-11    Schematic of Chemiluminescent Technique                             6-30
   6-12    Schematic for Nondispersive Infrared Detection                         6-30
   6-13    Schematic of Chromatograph                                         6-31
                                          VI

-------
                               FIGURES - Continued

"Figure No.                                                                     Page

   7-1      Types of Variation in Process Operation                                7-4
   7-2      Upset/Breakdown Report Form                                        7-8
   7-3      Required Startup Time to Achieve On-Line Load Demand for
             Fossil-Fuel-Fired Steam Generators                                  7-10
   7-4      Systematic Approach to Typical Air Pollution Control Equipment
             Operation and Maintenance                                         7-12
   7-5      Incinerator Used to Control Solvent Fumes                             7-15
   7-6      Baghouse Installation on an Asphalt Batch Plant                         7-15
   7-7      Wet Scrubber Installation on an Asphalt Batch Plant                     7-25
   7-8      Electrostatic Precipitator Installation on Power Boiler                    7-25
   7-9      ESP Maintenance Cycle                                               7-29
   7-10    Test Data Relating Optical Density to Outlet Grain Loading               7-34

   A-l      SAROAD Site Identification Form                                     A-l
   A-2      National Emissions Data System (NEDS) Form                          A-3
   A-3      SAROAD Hourly Data Form                                          A-4

   B-l      Test Program Meeting Representatives Form                            B-l
   B-2      Test Program Meeting Participants Form                                B-2
   B-3      Form for Test Program Plant Requirements and Testing Methodology      B-3
   B-4      Form for Test Program Agreement on Facility Operation                 B-4
   B-5      Form for Test Program Agreement on Continuing Compliance
             Conditions                                                        B-5
   B-6      Field Observation Checklist                                           B-6
   B-7      Sample Chain of Custody Form                                        B-12
   B-8      Sample Transport Particulate Checklist                                 B-l3
   B-9      Analytical Particulate Checklist                                        B-14
   B-10    Facility  Operating Parameters During Test Period for a Power Plant        B-18
   B-l 1    Form for Process Data During Test                                     B-22
   B-12    Form for Fuel Input Data During Test                                  B-23

   C-l      Data Sheet — Electrostatic Precipitator                                 C-l
   C-2      Data Sheet - Particulate Scrubber                                     C-2
   C-3      Data Sheet - Fabric Filter                                            C-3
   C-4      Data Sheet - Centrifugal Collector                                     C-4
                                        vn

-------
                                 LIST OF TABLES

Table No.                                                                     Page

   2-1      Sample Corporate Objectives, Program Elements, and Results            2-2

   4-1     Regulations Under The Clean Air Act                                  4-4

   5-1     Time Requirements for Compliance Test Execution                      5-8

   6-1     Allowable Deterioration in Classes I and II                              6-2
   6-2     Absorption Sampling Devices                                          6-14
   6-3     Recommended Sampling Methods                                     6-15
   6-4     Industry-Monitoring Requirement Matrix                               6-17
   6-5     Performance Specifications for Opacity Monitors                        6-22
   6-6     Criteria for Continuous Monitors for Gases                              6-25
   6-7     Instrument Specifications                                             6-27

   7-1     Effects on Emissions by Increasing Values of Selected Operating
              Variables (Fuel Oil Consumption)                                   7-3
   7-2     Incinerator Malfunctions That Affect Emission Rates                    7-5
   7-3     Effect of Shutdown Duration on Effluent S02 Concentrations
              During Startup                                                    7-6
   7-4     Checklist for Routine Inspection of Baghouse                           7-16
   7-5     Baghouse Collection Maintenance                                     7-17
   7-6      List of Replacement Parts for a Baghouse Filter                         7-18
   7-7     Cost of Base Replacement in Fabric Filters                             7-19
   7-8      Maintenance for Plugging and Scaling Venturi Scrubber                  7-20
   7-9      Scrubber Maintenance                                                7-21
   7-10    Spare Parts Inventory for Venturi Scrubber                             7-22
   7-11   Type of Maintenance Required - Venturi Scrubber Systems              7-23
   7-12    ESP Inspection Timetable                                            7-32
   7-13    Maintenance of Typical Industrial ESP                                 7-33

   B-l      Allowable Operating Parameters for a Power Plant                       B-15
                                        Vlll

-------
                                      CHAPTER 1

                                    INTRODUCTION
 The information presented in this manual is intended for plant managers, engineers, and
 other  industrial personnel responsible  for plant compliance  with air  pollution control
 regulations. It is intended as a set of guidelines and is oriented to companies that are not
 yet fully involved in a corporate program of environmental control. Some of the tasks
 involved in achieving and maintaining compliance with regulations require expertise that
 is  beyond  the usual range  of skills  and experience of industrial plant personnel; the
 manual therefore presents criteria for evaluation of outside firms or consultants who offer
 specialized environmental services.

 The question  may arise,  "Why should we as an industry read and  do what this guide
 describes?"  Certainly legislation   and  enforcement  action   by   cognizant regulatory
 authorities  will  force industry to  comply with pollution regulations  or face  severe
 penalties.

 Perhaps  another factor  as important as the mandating aspect  is the  social awareness of
 protecting the community from the harmful  effects  of  air pollution.  A well-conceived
 pollution abatement  program is important to those residing close to the plant. Industries
 that maintain a  good  relationship  with the  surrounding community  may recognize
 benefits such as assistance in zoning changes and less vandalism.

 Since  this manual is designed  for  use in industry-at-large, much of  the  discussion is
 general. The discussions  are  illustrated with examples that are industry-specific such as
 flowsheets,  survey   forms,   checklists,  maintenance  schedules,  and  similar materials
 currently  used in  compliance  programs  of  individual industrial plants.  The  example
 illustrations typify the tools available to the corporate compliance planner.

 The manual is designed to be used in different  ways by  personnel  performing diverse
 functions within the  company structure. The plant executive will wish to know what this
 document provides and how it can best be used by the responsible persons on his staff.
 He may have  no personal need for details of procedures for shutdown, maintenance, and
start-up of an  electrostatic precipitator; he should, however, be aware  of the degree of
technical knowledge and skill that is required to perform these tasks efficiently.  In some
instances, sample detailed  checklists are provided within the text with additional detailed
procedures included in the appendix. Not everyone will read or use all portions of this
manual. Some portions may be excerpted for distribution to the responsible staff.
                                         1-1

-------
As  closely as possible, the structure  of the manual corresponds to the structure of an
industrial compliance program, consisting of three major phases:

     1.    Achieving compliance,

     2.    Demonstrating compliance, and

     3.    Maintaining compliance.

It is difficult to determine  whether  emission sources or emission regulations should be
discussed first. It was decided to place  the Plant Emission  Survey (Chapter 3) ahead of
Emission Regulations (Chapter 4). It is  suggested that the reader refer to Chapter 4 prior
to  conducting an emission survey in  order  to become familiar with the regulations that
apply to specific processes or  operations.

The relationship  of chapters in  this  manual  to  the  three-phase,  overall compliance
program is delineated in Figure 1-1 and  is discussed below.

Achieving Compliance

Chapter 2:  Compliance Program Planning —  Intended primarily for industrial managers
with  highest-level responsibility for'the  compliance  program, this chapter introduces the
basic steps  involved  in tailoring the  program  to  the  company's  needs.  It outlines
departmental functions, as  exemplified in typical  organizational  options for  large and
small industries.

Chapter 3:   Plant Emission  Survey - The emission survey identifies all sources of air
pollutant emissions within an industrial  plant.  This chapter,  directed to the plant engineer
or  process  engineer, describes how to conduct the  survey,  quantify pollutant emissions,
and prepare a source identification file.

Chapter  4:  Emission Regulations - Having  determined  the plant's specific  pollution
problems, the industrial manager, possibly with consultation of the corporation's legal
counsel,  can review  in  this  chapter the  requirements applicable to the company under
current  and  anticipated air  pollution  control regulations.  The chapter  outlines salient
provisions  of the Clean  Air Act  of  1970; requirements for inspection,  monitoring,
recordkeeping, and  data reporting; legal considerations for  confidentiality of proprietary
information;. and the major implications for industry of State Implementation Plans under
the Clean Air Act, including registration/permit programs.

Demonstrating Compliance

When the industrial plant manager  has reviewed the available  options for air pollution
                                          1-2

-------
                                 ACHIEVE COMPLIANCE
                                    PLANNING THE
                               ENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAM
                                      CHAPTER 2
                   CONDUCT PLANT
                  EMISSION SURVEY
                     CHAPTER 3
                QUALIFY AND QUANTIFY
                 EMISSIONS-CHAPTER 5
                DETERMINE APPLICABLE
               REGULATIONS-CHAPTER 4]
                 SELECT AND INSTALL
                   PROPER CONTROL
                EQUIPMENT - CHAPTER 3
                               DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE
                                FORMULATE COMPLIANCE
                             TESTING PROGRAM - CHAPTER 5
  CONDUCT MANUAL COMPLIANCE
        TEST -CHAPTER 5
 INSTALL AND CERTIFY
CONTINUOUS MONITORS
     CHAPTER 6
 SET UP AMBIENT AIR
NETWORK -CHAPTER 6
                                 MAINTAIN COMPLIANCE
                                          '
                                 ESTABLISH CONTINUED
                                 COMPLIANCE PROGRAM
                                      CHAPTER?
               PROCESS OPERATION
                   CHAPTER 7
                   CONTROL EQUIPMENT
               OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
                        CHAPTER 7
                                     FIGURE 1-1
                     A THREE-PHASE COMPLIANCE PROG RAM


 control and  has  conducted the modifications/installations that will bring the plant into
 compliance with  applicable  regulations,  compliance must be  demonstrated to control
 agency representatives by measurement of pollutant emissions  in a series of compliance
 tests  during representative plant  operations. Information  on  compliance  testing  and
 monitoring,  as  well  as continuing compliance  efforts,  includes approximate costs of
 equipment, labor, and other expenditures; these estimates are based on 1977 costs.


Chapter 5: Stack  Emission Measurements — This chapter presents the basic concepts of
emission testing, with detailed consideration of the planning, testing, and reporting phases
of an  emission test program. It provides criteria for determining whether the tests should be
                                         1-3

-------
performed  by in-house technical staff  or by contract for the services of a professional
emissions testing team. Section 5.3 briefly describes  the sampling methods specified by
control agencies for each of the regulated pollutants.

Chapter 6:  Ambient Air Monitoring/Continuous  Stack Monitoring - In conjunction with
measurements of emissions in the stack, industrial plant operators may wish to conduct a
program  of ambient air monitoring  (i.e., measuring specific  pollutants in the atmosphere
near the plant).  Monitoring is done for a variety  of  reasons, often  in conjunction with
planning of  new plants or  expansion  of  facilities.  Continuous  monitoring  of  plant
emissions for specified pollutants is required in certain industries under the U.S. EPA's
New Source  Performance Standards. Chapter 6 describes the fundamentals of ambient air
monitoring and  continuous  stack  monitoring,  including  selection  of  monitoring  sites,
instrumentation, and data reporting.

Maintaining Compliance

Chapter 7:  The Continuing Program - This chapter presents  the elements of an industry's
continuing  program to maintain compliance  status when that status has been  achieved.
It considers the effects of changes in raw materials  and in-process operations, malfunctions
of process or control equipment, start-up and shutdown, maintenance and troubleshooting.
Three  major  particulate control system  are considered in detail:  the fabric filter, venturi
scrubber, and electrostatic precipitator. Each system  is analyzed in  terms of inspection/
maintenance/troubleshooting, spare parts inventory, and manpower requirements.

In presenting this  manual for use  by managerial and technical staff of diverse United
States industries, it is  recognized  that not all specific  needs  can be  addressed. The
information  presented here  should, however,  provide for industrial personnel an insight
into the probable scope of a company's compliance program and the methods  by  which
the plant can achieve and maintain compliance status.
                                          1-4

-------
                                    CHAPTER 2

                        COMPLIANCE PROGRAM PLANNING
2.1 Environmental Assessment and Planning

Environmental assessment and  planning can be integrated  into  a  company's  corporate
structure  in several ways. The  company can manage and operate its own program with
in-house personnel,  hire a consulting firm to outline and implement the  environmental
program,  or  utilize  some  combination of in-house staff  and  consultants.  The  exact
mechanisms  for   carrying out these  responsibilities will  vary  with  each  company,
depending on  its size, staff,  potential environmental problems, and its dedication  to
solving  these problems. This chapter discusses only the aspects of environmental planning
related  to atmospheric emissions.  A full-scale environmental program will also consider
water, solid wastes, and noise  pollutants and will be coordinated  with plant programs for
occupational  safety, health,  and  energy  conservation.  In addition,  other  aspects  of
environmental  planning  such  as  plant  siting,  assessment and  impact studies,  and
nondegradation should be considered but are beyond the scope of these guidelines.

     2.1.1  Corporate Planning of the Environmental Program

Each   company  must  define  its  objectives  as  they  relate,   for example,  to  legal
requirements,  emission  assessment, emission control plans, expansion plans, and corporate
responsibility. As these objectives are explored and defined, an  awareness of the overall
environmental situation will develop and will provide a basis for planning. In  determining
specific objectives and the tasks required to carry them out,  the company must  conduct a
preliminary assessment  of process emissions  at  each  operating  location  that  could
constitute  an  emission source. This assessment will  determine the  number and complexity
of the subsequent steps required to fulfill the desired objectives.

Corporate  objectives must  be defined  to develop a corporate environmental program.
Table 2-1  lists sample  objectives  as well  as program elements and results which aid in
achieving  those sample  objectives. The extent and complexity of the program  will depend
largely on specific objectives and on the number and  type of processes involved.

     2.1.2  Locate and Describe Atmospheric Emission Sources

A first  step in any program is to determine what  processes emit atmospheric  pollutants
and are subject to  a  pollution control  regulation, or could  cause a  public nuisance  or  an
adverse health effect. This inventory  of  sources  provides  the  comprehensive basis  for
many subsequent planning steps and thus should be as complete as possible.
                                         2-1

-------













C/3
RESULT
Q
Z
en"
H
S

— ;

S
«:
, es
TABLE 2-1
TIVES, PROG
u
w
i — J
m
o
o
OH
O
o

j
OH

3
CD


















3
CO
CD








co
-M
S
CD
£
CD
"eg
£
cd
f->
&D
O
£











aJ
O





CO
CD
O
t-r
o
CO
S
_O
°CO
co
"i
CD
cfl

s >
t—t








all processes
s^
CD
s-
CO

O
•7*
4)
Q-
CG
O
S
(S
r> *
-S CD
"C o
u is
co 3
r£ 0
'W CO
-0 fi
C 0
rt 'to
v .22
^ £

o
1-H
co
LM
4)
1r\
£
ctf
u
C5
Q-

C
^O
"co
CO
"s
W
=4-1
efinition o
Q


CO
s
D
£
 dpi
i 1
|I
S CD
— H Q
» "f-
c3 £
a, g

i£



&n
_C
-t-*
CJ ^_,
^H S
^
CO g
S QH
t+H -^
1 V*
. £
uantitativi
new cont
%n
i source testing
fc
£






co
co
co

£
-3
O
t-4
O-
«
1
^

Q






















CC
OJ
S
igineering estii
*^
s



















js
.~ti
^
co
r^ £•
c °
« "43

£ SD
0 D
f i
c o
'3 '•=*
-M PH
c o-
•3 rt
S






^
o <£
"S .2
CD -M
> «
.S 3
| |.S
s 1 1
|| §




£
as
I-.
ElC
O
cL
CO
O
'S
Ui
(-1
"m

H
























r emissions
j4-»
















2-2

-------
As described in Chapter 3, a comprehensive  survey of each process should identify vents
and  emission parameters.  In an  initial survey, only individual sources such  as  boilers,
incinerators,  and  manufacturing  processes  must be  identified.  In  subsequent, more-
detailed surveys, all individual vents and stacks serving the processes should be identified.

     2.1.3 Emission Assessment

Having determined what processes emit pollutants to the atmosphere and what regulatory
requirements apply to these processes, a preliminary assessment of their emissions  is made
by applying  emission factors, making material balances and measurements, and estimating
engineering requirements. Emission tests may be required for compliance with regulations
or when emission estimates are not adequate for inventory purposes.

     2.1.4 Regulatory Requirements

Atmospheric  emissions  are  regulated  at local,  state,  and federal  levels. All of these
regulations must be  searched, with notation  of sections applicable  to  the various plant
processes. The compliance status  of each  process must then be determined by comparing
actual emissions with allowable emissions.

Enforcement personel from state  or local agencies will contact those industries which are
thought  to be violating emission  standards.  The industry is  then responsible for either
proving  they  are  in compliance or  implementing control systems  to  comply with
standards.

     2.1.5 Permit Requirements

Since the early 1970's, and in many jurisdictions well before that, operating permits have
been required for various processes that are vented to the atmosphere. A thorough review
of regulations applicable  to  each plant  site  is required  to  determine precisely  the
processes for which  permits  are  required.* Copies of permit application forms  can be
obtained from the  appropriate agency. Example  forms are shown in Figures 2-1  and  2-2
for  an oil-fired boiler (Figure 2-3) and  a spray booth (Figure 2-4). These forms should be
completed by persons with understanding of the regulations and of the process involved.
Air  pollution  control agencies will  explain any ambiguous wording  or interpretation
regarding processes requiring permits.

Permit applications provide the basis for a control agency's decision to grant or  deny a
permit to  operate. Most agencies  require process flow  diagrams, composition and feed
rates of  raw materials, production rates,  operating schedules, exhaust rates, and related
information characterizing the process.  The information required on  these forms is largely
*See Chapter 4.
                                         2-3

-------
                          FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT

                      (Boilers, Heaters, and Steam Generators)
 1.  Manufacturer.
                                                    Model No.
 2,  Your identification
                                                    Year installed
                                                  Max,
                                                  .Max.
3.   Input capacities {106 BTU/hr):      Rated	
    Output capacities (Ib—steam/hr):    Rated	
    Note: Indicate units if different from above.

4.   Percent used for: Space heat	%     Process	%

5.   Normal Operating schedule:	hr/day,  	day/wk,
                           .Normal
                           .Normal
                                                                wk/yr
 6.  Type of fuel fired:    D Coal
                        DWood
                                     D Oil         D Natural gas
                                     D LPG        D Other, specify.
 7.  Type of draft:
                       D Natural
  D Induced    D Forced
 8.  Combustion monitoring: D Fuel/air ratio
                          D Other, specify
                                              DO.
                      D Smoke
                              COAL-FIRED UNITS

 9. Type of firing:   D Hand-fired              D Underfeed stoker   D Traveling grate
                    D Chain grate             D Spreader stoker     D Cyclones
                    D Pulverized, dry bottom   D Vibrating grates
                    D Pulverized, wet bottom
                    D Other, specify	_	•	
10. Fly ash reinjection:    D Yes                D No
                               OIL-FIRED UNITS
11.  Type of oil:

12.  Atomization:
                   DNo. 2
DNo. 6
D Other, specify.
                   D Oil pressure    D Steam pressure
                   D Rotary cup    D Other, specify.
                      D Compressed air
13. Oil preheater:    D Yes, temp.
                                                  a NO
                                   FIGURE2-1

    EXAMPLE PERMIT APPLICATION FORM FOR FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT
                                        2-4

-------
                                 FUEL DATA
14.  Complete the following tables for each type of fuel:
Type of Heat content
fuel (BTU/unit)
Coal BTU/lb
Oil BTU/gal
Gas BTU/cu ft
Wood BTU/lb
LPG BTU/gaf
Other
Percent
Ash






Sulfur






Quantity of fuel used
Per year
ton
gal
cu ft
ton
gal

Normal/hr
Ib
gal
cu ft
Ib
gal

Maximum/hr
Ib
gal
cu ft
Ib
gal

Type of
fuel
Coal
Oil
Gas
Wood
LPG
Other
Percent annual use
Winter






Spring






Summer






Fal!

1




                                             *Obtain fuel analysis from vendor(s)
                                              and report on an as-received basis.
                                              Use weighted annual averages.
                            CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Control equipment code:

(A) Settling chamber
(B) Cyclone
{C) Multiple cyclone
(D) Electrostatic prectpitator
(E) Fabric collector {baghousej

15. Control equipment data:
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
Spray chamber
Cyclonic scrubber
Packed tower
Venturi
Other	
Item
(a) Type (see above code)
(b) Manufacturer
(c) Model No.
(d) Year installed
(e) Your identification
{f} Pollutant controlled
(g) Controlled pollutant emission
rate (if known)
(h) Pressure drop
(i) Design efficiency
(j) Operating efficiency
Primary collector










Secondary collector










                              FIGURE 2-1 (Cent.)
    EXAMPLE PERMIT APPLICATION FORM FOR FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT
                                     2-5

-------
                            EMISSION POINT DATA
16.  Your emission point identification
17. Are other sources vented to this stack?   D   Yes     D   No
         If yes, identify sources	
18. Type:    D   Round, top inside diameter dimension	
             D   Rectangular, top inside dimensions (L)	x  (W)	

19. Height:        Above roof	ft, above ground	ft

20. Exit gas:       Temp	°F, Volume	acfm. Velocity  	ft/mm

21. Continuous monitoring equipment:       D   Yes      d  No
         If yes, indicate type  	, Manufacturer	
         Make or model	, Pollutant(s) monitored	
22.  Emission data: Emissions from this source have been determined and such data are
    included with this appendix:             D  Yes     D   No
         If yes, check method:   C   Emission test     D    Emission factor
                                 Completed by	, Date
                              FIGURE 2-1 (Cont.)
   EXAMPLE PERMIT APPLICATION FORM FOR FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT
                                     2-6

-------
          AIR  POLLUTION  CONTROL  DISTRICT  -  COUNTY  OF  LOS  ANGELES
434  SOUTH  SAN PEDRO STREET,  LOS ANGELES.  CALIF.  90013.  MADISON  9-4711

                         SPRAY  BOOTH  SUMMARY
                                IStt REVERSE SIIM  I OH INSTRUCTIONS*
                   ONE COPY OF THIS FORM MIJST BE f (LLE 0 OUT COMPLE Tt LY FOR EACH BOOTH
                 AND MUST ACCOMPANY THE TRIPLICATt APPLICATION FOR PERMIT (FORK 400-Al.
    I. BUSINESS LICENSE NAME OF CORPORATION, COMPANY, INDIVIDUAL OWEfi OR GOVERNMENTAL AGENCY UNDER
      KW1CH APPLICATION  (FORM 400-A)  IS SUBMITTED:
    2. BOOTH MANUFACTURER, MODEL NUMBER * SERIAL NUMBER:  [SEE ITEM Z ON REVERSE SIOEt
   3.  BOOTH TYPE:
         AUTOMOTIVE f~]
    t.  BOOTH DIMENSIONS' :
    !.  EXHAUST FAN DAIA:

          NUMBER  OF FANS:

          MODEL NUMBER:

          HORSEPOWER :
                                    MANUFACTURER
                                    FAN SPEED (HP-*)
                                    VOLUME  (CFM):
    6.   OPERATIONAL DATA -
          USUAL OPERATING SCHEDULE:
                                                  HHS/OAV
T.   EXHAUST CONTROL:

      • ATERWASH CI]      EXHAUST F I L TE R S O       NONE[

      IF *»T£B«ASH,  GIVE PUVP CAPiCItY IN GALS./MlN. 	

      IF FILTERED,  GIVE NUUBtH 8 SIZE OF EXHAUST 'ILTER5
                                                               MOTOR  HP..
    8.  NAME ALL TYPES OF COATINGS SPRAYED:

          ENAMEL:    	 GALS./OAY

          LACQUER:   _		 GALS./DAY

          OTHER:    	 GALS./DAY
          (DESCRiBE)
                                             >DDEO THINNE R:
                                             'ODED T HINNERI
                                                  THINNER:
GALS./DAY


GALS./DAY


GALS./OAT
          THE AOOVE  INFORMATION IS  SUBMITTED TO f,E5CHin!r THE U St OF THE BOOTH  FOR WHICH'
              APPLICATION FOR PERMIT  IS BEING WAf-F ON 111!" Af.f OMPANY INT, f ORM •100.A.

        SIGNATURE  01  RESPONSIBLE
            «E"BEB  OF  F I DM i     ^^
     TYPE  OB  PRINT NAME
     AND Of f !CI »L Tl TLT
     OF PEHSON SI &H IHT,
      THIS OAT* f OOU.
                    NAME
                        TITLE
                                 DO NOT WRITE  HELO* THIS LINE
    I.  SOOTH CROSSDRAFT VELOCITY:
                                  7.  BOOTH FACE INDRAFT VELOCITY:
                                                                APPL. NO.
                                                                PROCESSED BY
                                                                             CHECKED 9Y
   3. SCRUBBING OR FILTERING RATIOt
   1.  AVC.. OAIIY SOIVI.NT LOSS TO AIMOSPHLRL:
    COMMENTS:
   16-50040
                                                                             Form 400-C-I
                                       FIGURE 2-2
    EXAMPLE PORTION OF APPLICATION FORM  FOR A SPRAY BOOTH
                                            2-7

-------
                                    FIGURE 2-3
                             SMALL OIL-FIRED BOILER


self-explanatory. Units of measurement must be carefully observed, e.g., an entry may be
in actual cubic feet per minute (acfm)  or  in  standard cubic feet per minute  (scfm,
corrected to 'a  temperature and  pressure  specified  in the regulations). Estimation of
emission rates is discussed in  Chapter 3. If emission  data are unknown,  no value should
be inserted.

In some jurisdictions, the law requires  that permits be obtained before a new  source of
atmospheric emission is constructed  or an existing source is  modified. Permit  forms for
                                         2-8

-------
                                     FIGURE 2-4
               SPRAY BOOTH WITH DRIER DUCT IN BACKGROUND

these operations  allow the control agency to  evaluate  the  emission  control equipment
that is  planned  and to  assess potential compliance with applicable  regulations. If the
agency judges that the source as planned will not operate in  compliance with regulations,
agency officials may require changes in the design of the process or installation.

Only  processes  operating in  compliance  with the  applicable  regulations  can  receive
permits.
                                         2-9

-------
     2.1.6  Control Requirements and Compliance Programs

The preliminary  emission  assessment will indicate potential  problems concerning regula-
tory violations,  product loss, or public nuisance. For  those sources that are shown to
require  control,  a compliance plan must be developed; this plan will be based on detailed
emission estimates and engineering feasibility studies. The compliance program must state
how processes will be brought into  compliance with regulations and when compliance will
be achieved.

Corporate  planning  may require determination  of  detailed  emission  data  such as gas
composition, particulate loading, particle size, and emission rates. This information may
be  required for designing  a new control  device  or  process,  or for obtaining bids  from
vendors of control systems.

Product  losses  through process vents  must  be determined when material cannot  be
accounted  for  in a materials balance  (that is,  a balance in quantities of input/output
materials).  Product losses can occur  in both gaseous and solid forms; depending on their
value, recovery of these losses could be economical.

A final step in the corporate plan is developing a system for maintaining compliance  of all
emission sources. This system  will  include  a program for   updating  the inventory of
existing and new sources and for obtaining the various construction and operating permits
that are  required   periodically. New  regulations  must  be studied  and  the  impacts
appraised.

New federal regulations are published in the Federal Register. Large utility and industrial
companies have  adequate staff to review these regulations. Smaller companies that do not
have the time or manpower to  scan the Federal  Register must  keep in touch with local
agencies or trade associations for the latest regulatory changes.

2.2 Implementing the Environmental Program

Structuring of the various program functions  can be accomplished in  a number of ways
depending  on  availability  and  expertise  of the  corporation's  staff.  Advantages and
disadvantages of several functional plans are described here.

     2.2.1  Corporate Responsibility

One senior person or a small committee of  senior corporate  officials should have full
responsibility for implementing the corporate atmospheric emission compliance program.
This person or group  will serve in a staff capacity and will be directly responsible to the
president of the  corporation. When a program is implemented and operating, this person
or  group can provide continuing internal  review. In smaller  companies, they may direct
                                         2-10

-------
all environmental activities.  This group can  initially perform  or take responsibility for
completing the  objectives described  in  Table 2-1. If engineering personnel are available,
this work can be started internally. If knowledgeable staff personnel are not available, the
assistance of consulting engineers will be required.

     2.2.2 Sources of Information and Assistance

Many  publications are  available concerning  technical aspects of  atmospheric emission
measurement  and control.  Sources of  this  information  include  the environmental
committees of various technical trade associations such as the following:

       1.  American Iron and Steel Institute,

       2.  American Petroleum Institute,

       3.  American Institute of Plant Engineers,

       4.  American Mining Congress,

       5.  Graphic Arts Technical Foundation, Inc.,

       6.  National Coal Association,

       7.  National Oil Fuel Institute,

       8.  National Asphalt Pavement Association

       9.  Technical Association for the  Pulp  and Paper Industry,

     10.  Portland Cement Association,

     11.  Manufacturing Chemists Association, and

     12.  Incinerator Institute of America.

Complete  listings of organizations  and their addresses are given in References 1 and 2.
Technical  societies can  also provide background information and guidance to a corporate
staff  in  assessing emissions; membership  of  one  or  two  key  employees  should be
encouraged. These societies include:

     1.   Air Pollution Control Association,

     2.   American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
                                          2-11

-------
     3.   American Institute of Chemical Engineers,

     4.   American Chemical Society, and

     5.   Source Evaluation Society.

A  primary  source  of information  on environmental subjects is  the U.S. EPA and its
regional offices.

If in-house capability is not available, a consultant or  engineering firm may be engaged to
assist in defining objectives and initial  functions, to identify  the required  subsequent
functions, and  to provide continuity in the corporate  environmental program (see Section
5.2). The Air Pollution Control Association publishes annually a  listing of consultants and
companies that specialize in air pollution control services.

Reports  of  governmental research and grant  activities also provide a valuable source of
information on  specific  processes and  control systems. Federal  organizations active in
atmospheric emission control programs include:

     1.   Environmental Protection Agency —  all sources of air and water emissions, solid
         wastes management;

     2.   U.S. Bureau of  Mines — combustion  and metallurgical processing;

     3.   Energy Research and Development Administration — energy resources; and

     4.   Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) — fertilizers and coal combustion.

     2.2.3  Departmental Functions

After preliminary information  has  been assembled,  various functions must be defined
more exactly, the  format depending on size  of the corporation and  its manufacturing
processes. Some industries face  significant potential emission  problems. These include
most  of the heavy industries  such as   ore refining  and  metallurgical processing, large
combustion   sources,  chemical  manufacturing,  pulp  and  paper  manufacturing,  and
processing of mineral products such as cement and asphaltic concrete. Companies engaged
in  these  types of industries and having more than two or  three manufacturing locations
will, at  least initially,  require an internal staff  to handle environmental  planning. The size
of the staff can  be minimized by use of consultants and outside engineering services.

Engineering  — A corporation's engineering department usually handles all tasks pertaining
to   plant  and  process construction  and operation.  Frequently,  that  department  also
handles  major maintenance projects. Because emissions result from process operations, the
                                         2-12

-------
engineering department generally has initial prime responsibility for evaluating emissions,
completing permit application forms, and developing compliance plans.

The engineering department should thus be responsible for the following activities:

     1.   Process and Vent Inventories — As mentioned  previously, an early step in any
         environmental  program  is  to  inventory  all  processes  that  vent to  the
         atmosphere.  Individual  vents  and  their emission parameters should also be
         inventoried as  described in  Chapter 3. This information will  be useful from an
         air pollution control standpoint and also in determinations of product loss, heat
         loss, and building air balance.

         In large firms  this effort should  be  planned  at the  corporate  level  to ensure
         completeness   and  uniformity,  and  should  be  carried  out  by  the  plant
         engineering staff.

     2.   Emission   Assessment  — A critical  and  potentially  time-consuming task  is
         determining the  rate of  emission from all process vents. These emissions can
         sometimes be estimated from material balances, equipment design and operating
         data, or published emission  factors. The use of experienced  consultants in this
         phase of the work can save  a great  deal of time. Where the estimated emissions
         approach  or  exceed emission regulations, the values should be confirmed by a
         measurement program; if the source is obviously in violation,  a compliance plan
         may  be   based  on  experience  with similar   processes.  Specific  plans  for
         complying with  applicable regulations should be developed by the engineering
         department.  Contact with engineering firms specializing in this type of work
         and  with  control  equipment suppliers is  recommended. Smaller firms having
         few if any environmental experts should hire a consulting firm rather than work-
         ing initially with  control equipment  suppliers. Some control equipment suppliers
         may tend to endorse their own hardware even if another control system is better
         for a specific application. The engineering department should also develop equip-
         ment operating and maintenance procedures.

     3.   Compliance  Plans  —  The  engineering department usually  is responsible for
         development of  control plans and  schedules  or  process  modifications  for
         reducing emissions. The  magnitude of this task  depends on the number of
         sources not in compliance and the modifications required.

     4.   Inspection and Maintenance  of Process and Control Equipment  — As part of a
         continuing compliance program, the operation and maintenance of the process
         and  any pollution control equipment must be  checked routinely. This  effort
         should  be coordinated with the  maintenance  department.  Key  items  to be
                                        2-13

-------
         observed  include leaks in hoods and  control device housings, operation of
         instruments and records of values read, disposal of collected  material,  visible
         plume  from  discharge vents,  corrosion,  and  adherence to  a  maintenance
         schedule.

Legal Activities  — The legal staff should undertake a thorough review of federal, state, and
  O                     o                                tj
local  regulations pertaining to operating and  planned processes. This review will  enable
management to  determine what sources are subject to  the regulations,  details  of these
regulations, and what permits are required. The legal staff should also  review  tax laws
pertaining  to pollution  control  equipment.  They  should  also keep  abreast  of current
regulations pertaining to  wastewaters,  solid residues, noise pollution, industrial  hygiene,
and  energy  resource  management,  since  regulations applicable  to one environmental
problem will frequently  affect another. The  company's legal staff can  usually provide
contact with outside legal counsel knowledgeable in environmental matters.
                     O                   O

Budget Department  (Comptroller's Office)  -  The corporation's budget group will
probably  enter  the  environmental  planning  phase  at  the  point of preliminary cost
estimates for control of processes that do not comply with regulations. Further studies of
control may not be warranted in marginal operations for which compliance would require
major  expenditures.

Initial funding requirements for emission assessments, tests, and compliance plans could
be incorporated into routine  operating or engineering budgets. A single member  of  the
accounting  staff should  be  assigned to the budgeting  and recording of environmental
program costs.

Research and Development — Initiation of new processes or  process changes  may  affect
pollutant  emissions. The research and development group should  therefore be  aware of
potential problems in manufacturing and also in product use  and eventual disposal. R&D
departments frequently  have a  laboratory that can assist in  making preliminary routine
measurements.

2.3  Related Responsibilities

In addition  to  the atmospheric  emission aspects of environmental  planning, a corporate
staff must-consider other environmental aspects of their manufacturing operations:

     1.   Liquid discharge,

     2.   Sludge or solid waste discharge,

     3.   Product use and eventual  disposal,
                                         2-14

-------
     4.   Accidental spills or emissions, and

     5.   Industrial hygiene.

Although some  of  these do  not directly  affect atmospheric  emissions, many  environ-
mental  problems are interrelated. As examples, resolving an industrial hygiene problem by
ventilation of  a  workroom  may create a new emission source, and installing a scrubber
system  to remove atmospheric contaminants may introduce new  problems of wastewater
discharge or sludge disposal. Potential atmospheric emissions  from the use or eventual
disposal of a  product  (such  as spray cans, reactive solvents, pesticides) must also be
considered.

Again,  the  nature of  these  related  environmental responsibilities will vary widely for
specific  companies and for specific products. Early consideration of  potentially related
problems could save effort and expense in subsequent control plans.

2.4  Examples of  Corporate Environmental Programs

Each company must decide how to integrate an environmental program into its corporate
structure. Examples are presented here to illustrate several practical arrangements.

     2.4.1  Large Environmental Staff

Figure 2-5 illustrates how environmental control functions may  be integrated  into a fairly
large organization. This chart shows the environmental control group in a large  company
with responsibility  for  control  of air  and water  quality  and  for  industrial  hygiene
activities. The  director  of  the  environmental  control  group   would  report to  the
vice  president of operations and would have full responsibility  for corporate activities in
environmental  matters. This group will provide direction to plant managers in complying
with environmental requirements.  A  person or  persons at  the   plant or division  level
should  also  be  responsible  for handling  day-to-day  activities  and  carrying  out  the
corporate program. Figure 2-6 presents an alternative for a similar organization; here the
environmental  functions  are  made  part of the  corporate engineering  operations.  This
organizational  structure might be appropriate for a large company with relatively minor
environmental problems.

Figure 2-7 shows an example organizational chart for an electric utility  company. Utilities
generally face significant  potential environmental problems affecting air and water quality
and  land use.  Therefore a post at  the  senior  level  is generally established to direct
environmental efforts.  Depending on the atmospheric emission problems, another assistant
could be assigned solely to this  area. Utilities make extensive use of outside engineering
companies to assess and solve atmospheric emission problems.
                                         2-15

-------
                            < LJJ
              CC LU _1
              050
              h z cc
              Q gCJ

                LU

                LL
                O

   LU
   O
cc Q
LU D
I- -I
< CO
                                                                                    I-
                   o
              DC   ^
              O   cc

              o LL m
              LU O —i
              CC   —
              —   C3
              fl   -•»
                   t_
                   LU
  e
>w
-** LU
  a:
                u <
                UJ LL
                CCO
                             C/>
                             LU
                             h-
 CJ

'CO
                             X
                             o
                            .cc
 LU
 CC
                                          LU
      uo
      OJ
      UJ
      cc
-"    D

cc    —
I-    LL
                                            CO


                                          oj
                                       °-   5
                                                             O
                                                             Z

                                                             DC
                                        -H >
                                          CO
                                          CO
                                          LU
                                         .CJ
                                          o
                                          cc
                                          Q_

                                          Q

                                         -
-------
                                          VICE
                                       PRESIDENT
                                      OPERATIONS
                              DIRECTOR
                                 OF
                          MANUFACTURING
                     DIRECTOR
                         OF
                    ENGINEERING
                                     RESEARCH  DESIGN
                            UTIL-  ENVIRONMENTAL
                            ITIES      CONTROL
             PLANTS
               OR
            DIVISIONS
  PERSONNEL   MANUF.
                             PLANT
                          ENGINEERING
                EQUIP. AND
                  BLDGS.
PROCESS
 UTILITIES AND
ENVIRONMENTAL
    CONTROL
                                    FIGURE 2-6
                     ALTERNATIVE PARTIAL ORGANIZATION
     2.4.2 Small to Medium Environmental Corporate Staff


A  corporate  ad  hoc staff  of  one to  about  five  persons could  handle  most of  the
environmental planning functions of a multiplant corporation with relatively few emission
problems. After  an initial peak workload, this staff could be reduced to one or two. The
degree of utilization  of outside help will greatly affect  the corporate  staff requirements.
The  environmental group is generally assigned to the engineering department. Individuals
at  each plant location are  then  assigned tasks as required by the corporate staff. The
engineering department  at  each  plant  can  exercise  the option of requesting assistance
from consultants if the current workload is too great. A company may elect to request a
variance from the control agency which will enable  them to have  more time to evaluate
their environmental needs.
                                       2-17

-------
          y-zi-
          ^ii
C
                                             i>
                                             LU

                                             CC
DC  m<
                                           CN
                                           UJ Z
                                           OC O
                                             N
                                             (D
                                             CC
                                             O
                                              X
                                              UJ
LU
Q ^
             Oh
          UJ
          y -..
          > LU > D:
            ? O 5
          2-18

-------
Figure 2-8 shows integration of environmental tasks into the corporate structure of a
small company.
               VICE
             PRESIDENT
            OPERATIONS
               PLANT
            MANAGER(S)
      PRODUCTION
         DEPT.
                            ENGINEERING
                               DEPT.
    AD HOC
ENVIRONMENTAL
   ADVISORY
     STAFF
ENVIRONMENTAL
   ENGINEER
                                FIGURE 2-8
         EXAMPLE PARTIAL ORGANIZATION FOR A SMALL COMPANY
2.5 References


     1.   The Encyclopedia of Associations, published yearly by Gale Research, Detroit,
         Michigan.


     2.   National Trade and Professional Associations, published yearly by Columbia
         Books, Inc., Washington, D.C.
                                    2-19

-------

-------
                                     CHAPTER 3
                             PLANT EMISSION SURVEY
3,1 Introduction

The  initial step  in a plant program for  monitoring and controlling atmospheric emissions
is  an emission survey. In this survey, all of the pollutant sources are identified and the
quantities of emissions from  each  source are determined, as shown in Figure 3-1. Results
of the survey will provide management  personnel with a comprehensive overview and will
also  provide enough detail from which  to  formulate plans for abatement and monitoring
programs.  The eventual cost  of a  poorly executed survey will almost always exceed the
initially higher cost for a well-executed survey.

This section  describes  survey  procedures, from  planning through  data reporting, and
provides examples of survey forms and checklists. Methods for conducting such surveys
efficiently have been developed over the years. In every case, three fundamental steps are
involved:

      1.    Identifying and cataloguing the emission sources,

      2.    Identifying and quantifying the emissions, and

      3.    Preparing a source identification file.

 These procedures are  described in the sections that follow.

 3.2 Identifying and Cataloguing Emission Sources

 Identification of pollutant sources within an industrial operation is accomplished  in two
 steps:  analysis of process flow sheets  and tour of plant facilities. The process  flow sheets
 serve essentially as a map, indicating points at which emissions are known to occur or are
 possible.  In  the subsequent plant tour, the emission surveyor then verifies these sources
 and possibly identifies others. In these  efforts he will require assistance from process
 supervisors and engineers and  will also  rely on his own  observations.

      3.2.1 Process Flow Sheets

 A  flow sheet of each process within the facility should be presented in sufficient detail to
 indicate the flow of all raw materials,  additives, end products, by-products, and wastes. A
 simple  process flow  sheet  is  shown  in  Figure 3-2. The flow  sheet should  identify  all
                                            3-1

-------
                                     FIGURE 3-1
                PLANT PERSONNEL VERIFYING EMISSION SOURCES
                            DURING EMISSION SURVEY
 points of feed input and  all points  at which atmospheric,  liquid,  and solid wastes are
 discharged.  The engineer or foreman responsible for each process should verify that the
 flow sheets identify all sources. Many plants, as shown in Figure 3-3, have numerous sources
 that must be identified correctly for identification purposes.

 Analysis  of  process flow sheets ean be further verified by  review  of permit applications,
 process blueprints, photographs, and  inspection manuals. With the aid  of these and any
 other resources available, the emissions surveyor can then develop checklists in the form
 of survey data sheets that  will be used in  the plant tour to ensure  complete and efficient
gathering  of pertinent data. These  survey  data  sheets  will pertain  chiefly  to  two
categories: (1) process and  feed  data, and (2) control equipment and emissions data  An
                                        3-2

-------
                                               co
                                               G
                                              D tO UJ
                                              —I < Q_
                                              cc
                                   UJ D
                                   CC LL
                                                                                                     cc
CO
UJ
              D UJ DC
               CO


               H
               UJ
               cc
<1
Q-5
<^
^ S
o o
to o
                                              CC
                                              O
                                              CO
                                                                                                 CN
                                                                                                 ro
                                                                                                 u_
                                                                     UL

                                                                     CO
                                                                     UJ
                                                                     o
                                                                     o
                                                                     cc
                                                                     Q_

                                                                     UJ
                                                                                                     X
                                                                                                     UJ
                                         UJ
CLEANING
FURNACE
                                                                                   CO
                                                                                   O
                                                                                   CC
                                                D CC

                                                ^°
                                                < CO
                                               3-3

-------
                                    FIGURE 3-3
                  ROOF OF A TYPICAL CHEMICAL PLANT WITH
                        NUMEROUS EMISSION SOURCES
example  process survey  data  sheet  is  shown in  Figure  3-4,  representing presurvey
evaluation of a fuel-fired combustion source. These examples can be modified to apply to
most types of control equipment now in operation.

The process survey data sheet should include the following:

     1.   Detailed information on operating conditions for the process as designed;

     2.   Identification of normal operation as continuous, batch, or intermittent, with
         frequency of emission discharges for each operation;

     3.   Description  of raw materials, products, and wastes; and

     4.   Values for   normal operating temperature,  equipment  performance  ratings,
         flows, pressures, and similar data that are routinely monitored and/or recorded.

A blueprint of the  exit stack should be obtained for use on the plant tour. If a blueprint
is not available, a  sketch of the  exit stack,  with  accurate measurements,  can be  made
during the  tour. Examples of  stack  survey  data sheets are presented for  electrostatic
precipitators, baghouses, and scrubbers in Figures 3-5, 3-6, and 3-7.
                                         3-4

-------
                      POWER PLANT SURVEY FORM
TYPE OF HEAT EXCHANGER
RATED INPUT CAPACITY.
MAXIMUM OPERATING RATE


RATED STEAM OUTPUT	
MAXIMUM STEAM OUTPUT.


FURNACE VOLUME  width


OPERATING SCHEDULE 	


COAL FIRING


    TYPE OF FIRING
    FLY ASH REINJECTION


    SOOT BLOWING


         D Continuous

         D Intermittent
                           Coal-fired
                           Oil-fired
                           Gas-fired
                   PRIMARY
                       n
                       n
                       n
                STANDBY
                   n
                   a
                   a
If multiple-fired, check appropriate boxes

	BTU/hr
       , BTU/hr


        Ib/hr (a)


        Ib/hr (a)
  -ft x depth


  _ hr/day .
	BTU/lb steam


	BTU/lb steam


. ft x height	ft =	ft3
  day/wk
wk/yr
D Grate           Type	

D Spreader stoker

D Pulverized coal   D Dry bottom   D Wet bottom

D Cyclone
               D  YES
           D NO
         TIME INTERVAL BETWEEN BLOWING
         DURATION
 minutes
   OUTSIDE COAL STORAGE


       MAXIMUM AMOUNT STORED OUTSIDE
                        minutes
                    DYES
            D NO


            .tons
                            FIGURE 3-4

            EXAMPLE PRESURVEY DATA SHEET FOR FOSSIL-

                   FUEL-FIRED STEAM GENERATORS
                                3-5

-------
                     POWER PLANT SURVEY FORM


    ISOUTSIDE STORAGE SPRAYED                 D YES    O NO

    COAL COMPOSITION          Range           Average

       Ash            	% to	%	%

       Sulfur          	% to	%	%

       BTU/lb as fired    	   to	   	

    ARE FUEL CONSUMPTION RECORDS KEPT         D YES    D NO

    FOR STOKER SYSTEM,
                  Coal size 	
    FOR PULVERIZED GOAL AND CYCLONE SYSTEM
                   FIRING METHOD       D Frontwall
                                       D, Front wall - rear wall
                                       D All wall
                                       D Tangential
                                       D Other        Type
OIL FIRING
    FIRING METHOD       D Frontwall
                        D Front wall — rear wall
                        D All wall
                        D Tangential
                        D Cyclone
                        D Other                        Type,

    TYPE OF FUEL        D No. 1
                        Q No. 2
                        D No. 4
                        D No. 5
                        D No. 6
                        a Other                        Type


                          FIGURE 3-4 (Cont.)
             EXAMPLE PRESURVEY DATASHEET FOR FOSSIL-
                   FUEL-FIRED STEAM GENERATORS
                                3-6

-------
                       ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
Manufacturer's name

Date of start up	
  ,  Model No.
Design efficiency
Number of electrical fields in direction of flow,

Total plate area ^^__^_^_^_^_^_

Methods for cleaning plates

Normal rapping sequence. Plates	

Preconditioning or dilution air	

Gas conditions                Design

    volume, acfm            ^__
    Wires
Normal
    temperature, °F
    fan motor amperes
Rectifier
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Operating
condition
design
normal
design
normal
design
normal
design
normal
design
normal
design
normal
Rectifier power output
Voltage
kilovolts






Current
milliamps






Sparking rate
sparks/min






                                 FIGURE 3-5
                EXAMPLE PRECIPITATOR SURVEY DATA SHEET
                                     3-7

-------
                          FABRIC FILTER COLLECTOR

 Manufacturer's name	
 Make or model number

 Date of start up	
 Design efficiency	%

 Number of compartments	

 Number and size of bags	

 Type of filter material	

 Average bag life		
Pressure drop across collector, inches of water               Design       Normal
     just prior to bag cleaning                           	      	
     just after bag cleaning                              	      	

Gas Conditions
     volume, acfm                                     	      	
     temperature, °F                                   	      .....
     dew point                                        	      	
     fan motor amperes                                 	      .
Air to cloth ratio

Type of cleaning
       D shaking — number of compartments	
       D reverse air flow — number of compartments
       D repressing — number of compartments	
       D pulse jet (cleaned while on stream)	
       D other	
Normal cleaning cycle
Normal particulate removal sequence,
Preconditioning of dilution air	
                                 FIGURE 3-6
                EXAMPLE FABRIC FILTER SURVEY DATA SHEET
                                     3-8

-------
                           SCRUBBER OR CYCLONE
Manufacturer's name
Make or model number

Date of start up	
Design efficiency
Type of collector
    D cyclone
    D venturi scrubber
    O turbulent bed
    D other	
D  raulticyclone
D  variable throat
D  plate
Operating conditions
     pressure drop across col lector, in. H20

     gas volume out of collector, acfm

     gas temperature to collector, °F

     gas temperature out of collector, °F

     fan motor, amperes

     liquid flow rate to scrubber, gpm

     recirculation of scrubbing liquid, %

Type of liquid used in scrubbing	
Liquid and/or particulate removal sequence
Preconditioning of dilution air
D  fixed throat
D  spray
                        Design
                Normal
                                  FIGURES-?
           EXAMPLE SCRUBBER OR CYCLONE SURVEY DATA SHEET
                                      3-9

-------
In further preparation for the plant tour,  a tentative filing or catalog  system will  be
helpful. For ease of data handling, each process can be assigned a unique name or letter,
and emission points for each process can be numbered as shown in Figure  3-8. If the tour
discloses an additional process or emission point, it can be easily logged into the system.
                                    FIGURE 3-8
                  TECHNICIAN IDENTIFYING PROCESS STACK
     3.2.2  Plant Tour

A  tour of  the plant facilities, including discussions  with the  person responsible for  each
process, is  the most productive means  of identifying all sources and verifying the process
flow sheets. Enough data should be gathered from  the  files and  by on-site inspection to
allow calculation of a  material balance as a basis  for  qualifying  and  quantifying  each
emission  source.
                                         3-10

-------
The plant tour starts at the files. There  the surveyor will gather design specifications for
each process  and control device. Correspondence may also yield  pertinent information
relating to operation and maintenance of process and control equipment, current status
of compliance, comments of control agencies, public complaints, and the like. This kind
of  background  information  can enhance  the understanding  needed for a  meaningful
onsite inspection of each process and control device.

Each  air  contaminant  source has a  duct that vents from the process to  an  outside
chimney  or stack. The exhaust gas is moved by a fan, or in some instances where heat is
applied,  by natural draft. For each operation, the ducting should  be followed from the
process to the  point of entry  to the atmosphere.  In some instances,  the  exhaust gas
stream is difficult to follow. Introduction of make-up air, split gas streams, and ducting
of  several operations to  a  common stack complicate  the  overall exhaust system and
require careful tracing to  ensure that exhaust gas paths  are properly defined. Placement
of fans and control devices must be noted. Air conditioning, heating, and make-up vents,
as shown  in Figure 3-9, must not be mistaken for process stacks.

After  defining all process systems,  the surveyor should check the roof to identify any
emission  points  that are "left over."  The  check  ensures  that  all egress  points are
accounted for.

Equipment requirements  for  an  onsite survey  depend largely on the processes surveyed.
Following is a partial list  of basic equipment:

     1.   50° to 1200°F  dial thermometer (12-inch stem),

     2.   Velocity measuring device (Velometer),

     3.   50-foot tape measure,

     4.   Set  of basic shop tools,

     5.   Camera,

     6.   Detector tube samplers (for measuring gas concentrations),

     7.   Survey data forms, and

     8.   Safety equipment (hard hat, safety shoes, goggles).

Obtaining  accurate  stack  information  during  the tour,  as shown in Figure  3-10, is  a
prerequisite to effective stack sampling, since the configuration of sampling sites and the
characteristics of the exhaust  gases  will affect the  quality  of samples that  may be
                                         3-11

-------
                                   FIGURE 3-9
         AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM AND DUCT TO ROOF OF BUILDING


extracted. In addition  to flow considerations, the factors of accessibility and safety are
important to emission testing. Clearance for probes and sampling apparatus, availability of
electricity,  potential  for exposure  of personnel and  equipment to weather or excessive
heat, presence of toxic or explosive gases, and other safety factors should be noted and
recorded during  the  plant  tour.  Outlet  ducts must  be  examined  to ensure proper
                                        3-12

-------
                                 FIGURE 3-10
    OBTAINING ACCURATE STACK INFORMATION DURING THE PLANT TOUR
sampling. In most states, a stack as shown in Figure 3-11 requires an extension to meet
emission  testing  requirements.  However,  some  states  have  adopted  a procedure  for
sampling  cyclone outlet elbows with  a  Hi-Yol Sampler.  Stack data should be recorded
on a form as shown in Figure 3-12.
                                     3-J3

-------
                                  FIGURE 3-11
        CYCLONE OUTLET REQUIRING MODIFICATION BY MOST STATES
                    PRIOR TO PERFORMING EMISSION TEST

3.3 Identifying and Quantifying Emissions

All of  the data obtained thus far from the process  flow  sheets, process survey forms,
control  equipment  survey  forms,  stack  survey  form,  photographs,  correspondence,
discussions, and the  plant tour can now be organized  for development of an emission
survey  plan.  This plan will indicate the quantity of emissions to be expected from each
source, with possible variations  due to  season,  time  of day, feed materials, and similar
                                       3-14

-------
Sampling location parameters
Process vented
Platform height, ft
Platform width, ft
Platform length, ft
Inside diameter, in. at port
Wai! thickness, in. at port
Material of construction
Ports: a. Existing
b. Size opening
c. Distance from platform
Straight distance before ports, ft
Type of restriction before ports
Straight distance after ports, ft
Type of restriction after ports
Environment at sampling site
Work space area
Ambient temperature, °F
Average pitot reading, in. H20
Stack gas velocity, ft/min
Stack gas flow, acfm
Moisture, % by volume
Stack gas temperature, °F
Particulate loading, gr/scf
Particle size
Gases present
Stack pressure, in. H20
Water sprays prior to site
Dilution air prior to site
Elevator to site?
Available electricity and distance
Stack or vent number






























































       FIGURE 3-12
STACK DATA REQUIREMENTS
          3-15

-------
variables.  The  emissions   characterization  should  identify  all  important  parameters
affecting control of the pollutants and  possible sampling techniques. These  data will be
used to establish a compliance program  for each source. These programs will describe the
plans that will be  implemented by  the company  to achieve compliance  and  should
contain the following increments of progress or milestones (1):

     1.   Date of submittal of the final control plan to the appropriate air pollution control
         agency;

     2.   Date by which contracts for emission control systems or process modifications
         will be  awarded; or date  by which orders will be issued for  purchase  of
         component parts to accomplish emission control or process modification;

     3.   Date of initiation of  onsite  construction or installation of emission control
         equipment or process change;

     4.   Date by  which onsite construction  or  installation of emission control equipment
         or process modification is to be completed; and

     5.   Date by which  final compliance  is  to  be  achieved.

Figure 3-13 presents an example of the activities that must be completed before compliance
can  be achieved.  Depending  on the nature of  the  emission source and the complexity
and  size of the modifications required, the  time requirements for compliance can range
from a few months to several years (2).

     3.3.1 Data Usage

Emissions  from each  source will be identified and  quantified  as  part of the compliance
program throughout each  of the major  phases: achieving, demonstrating, and maintaining
the  company's compliance status. The  compliance  status of each source determines  the
type of data that  must be collected.

Achieving  Compliance - The first step in the compliance program  is to  bring all emissions
within  the  allowable  limits established by  the   control  agency.  This phase  of  the
compliance program usually involves the purchasing of control equipment. Because of the
high initial  costs of current control equipment,  as well as operating  and maintenance
costs,  the gathering of process data for equipment selection is  of  utmost importance.
Most vendors of  control  equipment  base their guarantee  on  process  data  presented to
them  before the equipment is installed. If the  installed  control equipment does  not
enable the plant to comply with the allowable emission  rate and the process parameters
are  different from  those  specified  to the control  vendor,  then the plant must alter the
process or provide additional control equipment at its  own expense.
                                          3-16

-------
                                  1   3,
                                 -o  .E
                                  >•   5
                                 •^   ™
                                      »
                                              9*  i?
                                                               1
         o  	
         o   p
                                 QC   >
                                                       QJ
                          3-17

-------
Detailed procedures  for  selecting the proper  type and size of  control  equipment  are
beyond  the  scope  of this  manual.  The basis for selection  changes continually with
changes in cost of materials and with development of new technology. When a company
is  uninformed  regarding control equipment, the  best  method of  selection  is  usually
through  an evironmental  consulting group that is not affiliated with a control equipment
vendor.

The most important process parameters that must be collected for  selection of control
equipment are the following:

     Flue gas characteristics (from emission test)

          1.   Total flue gas flow rate,

          2.   Flue gas temperature,

          3.   Control efficiency required,

          4.   Particle size distribution,

          5.   Particle resistivity,

          6.   Composition of emissions,

          7.   Corrosiveness of flue gas over operating range,

          8.   Moisture content, and

          9.   Stack pressure.

      Process or site characteristics (field survey)

          1.   Reuse/recycling of collected emissions,

          2.   Availability of space,

          3.   Availability of additional electrical power,

          4.   Availability of water,

          5.   Availability of wastewater treatment facilities,

          6.   Frequency of startup and shutdown,
                                          3-18

-------
      7.   Environmental conditions (e.g., extremely low ambient temperatures),

      8.   Anticipated changes in control regulations,

      9.   Anticipated changes in raw materials, and

     10.   Plant type (stationary or mobile).

Demonstrating Compliance — The second phase of  the compliance program  is providing
proof that ail emissions  are  within  the specified limits. This involves a compliance test
using a  specified or reference test  method. The test  is usually witnessed by control
agency officials.  During the  compliance test, enough process and emission data must be
recorded  to  satisfy  the  control  agency's requirements  and  to confirm  the  control
equipment vendor's guarantee.  If  the  process  data indicate operation within the design
range  specified  by  the plant  to the  vendor  but compliance  is  still  not  achieved,
documentation  of process  and  emission parameters  will  demonstrate  failure of  the
vendors to meet their guarantee. If the process data recorded during the test are different
from or  are  not within the range  earlier specified by the facility, failure to achieve
compliance cannot be attributed to the control equipment vendor.

Control  agency  requirements for process parameters that  must  be collected during  a
compliance  test  are variable. If any  of the requirements concern process data that are
considered  confidential,  operators  of  the  facility  should  so  inform  the agency by
registered mail.  Most control agencies follow specific guidelines regarding confidentiality.
These matters and other aspects of compliance testing are discussed more fully in Chapter
5.

Continuing  Compliance - After  compliance  of  each  source  has  been  demonstrated,
compliance  status must be maintained.  Chapter 7 describes  in detail  the procedures that
will  provide a continuing compliance program.

     3.3.2 Quantification Techniques

The   emission survey  can  be developed by  applying  a   combination  of  techniques:
calculation of mass balance, application  of emission factors, review  of  permit applications,
analysis of fuels,  and source  emission tests. These techniques are described in more detail
below.

Mass Balance - When the throughputs  and composition  of  raw materials are known,  a
mass balance  usually can be  established around each process.  The materials  balance will
indicate  the extent of solid, liquid, and gaseous wastes. A materials balance for the  entire
facility   will  also  indicate  the  amounts  of  wastes  generated,  a  value  obtained by
                                         3-19

-------
subtracting  the  amounts  of material shipped from the amounts purchased.  Much of the
waste generated is, of course, not airborne.

A search of applicable air pollution control regulations will provide the basis for the mass
balance.  The  control  regulations  state what pollutants  are  regulated and  define  each
pollutant. The definition of each pollutant  determines the conditions under which the
pollutant  is sampled and its chemical or physical makeup. For instance, because water
vapor is not considered an  air pollutant, it need not be accurately accounted for in the
mass balance. Emissions of sulfur  dioxide or organic substances are usually regulated  and
must be estimated in the  materials balance.

A materials balance for gaseous  pollutants can be  determined  by  analysis  of   raw
materials, fuels,  and products to  give the gaseous  pollutant potential of many of  the
compounds  liberated during  a combustion or chemical process.

Fuel  Analysis — Knowledge  of  fuel  composition   is especially  useful  in  estimating
emissions, since many gaseous compounds in the  fuel become airborne after combustion
(e.g.,  sulfur in fuel oil exhausts  as sulfur dioxide). Other constituents, such as ash  and
volatile matter, directly affect the quantity of particulate emissions.

Permit  Applications — A  completed  copy of  the facility's  current  permit application
should  provide  information on  equipment,  input  materials,  and potential emissions.
Permit applications  that  are  no  longer current can  be used for background information
and reference.

Visible Emissions — State  regulations emphasize visible emissions except for water vapor.
Training and certification are required for a compliance determination  of visible  emissions.
Although  an untrained observer cannot make  an official determination, he can attempt to
estimate the percent obscuration  of an object viewed through the stack discharge plume.
If no emissions are visible,  emissions would  be judged to be in compliance with visible
emission regulations. The percent of \isible opacity  is not an accurate indication  of total
mass emissions but can indicate trouble areas.

Emission Factors —  Publications listing emission factors (3) provide a range of emissions to
be expected from  specific  processes.  These values, which are based on  uncontrolled
process operations, can  be  factored  with  the   expected  collection  efficiency  of  the
facility's air pollution control equipment to yield an estimated pollutant emission  rate.
For example,  where the emission factor for a process is 10  pounds of particulate  per ton
of product  and  the process is  equipped with  a particulate control device that is 90
percent efficient, the emissions would  be:

                         10 ib/ton x f    Q   ) = 1.0 Ib/ton
                                         3-20

-------
 Emission Testing -  Emission testing is usually the most accurate method of determining
 emissions. Specific emission testing procedures are usually prescribed for each  pollutant
 from  each process.  Emission testing by  these prescribed methods, however, is also the
 most  expensive technique of emissions survey. An emission testing program may include
 ambient  sampling, a series  of  stack  tests  over  a period of  several hours,  continuous
 monitoring,  or a  combination of these,  as described  more  fully in Chapters  5 and 6.
 Detailed   sampling   procedures  have   been   published   for  various    pollutant
 compounds (4), (5).

 Even  if  it  is  determined  that  emission  testing  of  all  sources  is  required  for  a
 comprehensive  emission survey,  data gathering by  the methods  described earlier  will
 establish  the normal operating conditions  for processes and control equipment and will
 provide a  check on values  obtained  in emission tests. Data from earlier emission tests of
 a process or a similar process are also helpful.

 Testing  methods  other than those prescribed (such  as  use  of  a velometer  or  vane
 anometer to determine  stack gas velocity and of detector tube concentrations for gaseous
 pollutants) can provide  approximate engineering data in a rapid and relatively inexpensive
 manner.
 3.4  Preparing a Source Identification File

 A source  identification  file  provides  a means  of  standardizing data  for  the  emission
 survey. For each pollutant  source,  a standard identification form gives  a description of
 the  process, a  summary of emission data, the current  compliance status,  and proposed
 actions, if any  are intended.  A basic source identification form  is shown in Figure 3-14.
 Some  sources involve several emission points with more  than one pollutant at each point.

 The source identification file should be indexed  to provide easy  access by any concerned
 party. The index should list  all sources and identify each emission point for each source.
 Assignment of  a number for each  emission point, as discussed  earlier, will facilitate  an
 alphanumeric search  for emission points in the source identification file. A facility cover
 sheet,  as  shown  in  Figure 3-15, should precede the index. As an aid  to  management
 personnel  in tracking and holding  large numbers of sources,  a  corporate environmental
 management information system has been developed (6).

 The  source identification file should  provide sufficient information to enable  control
 agency staff  to  complete an  appropriate form for entry of  data into  the National
 Environmental Data Systems (NEDS). Appendix A contains an appropriate form.

3.5 References

 1.   Code of Federal Regulations, Vol. 40, Part 51, August 14, 1971.
                                          3-21

-------
Emission point no.
Emission point name,

Date of record	

Source name	
Description of source
Type of permit

Date of permit.
Applicable regulation(s).
Particulate emissions	.	 units

Allowable emissions.	.	.units

Method of determination	

Gaseous emissions	
       type
 Compliance status
 Date contact awarded
 Date construction began
 Monitoring.
        ambient
        stack —
                                           units,
 Allowable emissions	units

 Method of determination	
                           FIGURE 3-14
                SOURCE IDENTIFICATION FORM

                               3-22

-------
Plant name	
Address	
City, state	
County	
AQCR	
Telephone number
Environmental project director

Official local control agency
       Name	
       Address
       City	
       Telephone number,

 State control agency
       Name	
       Address
       City —
       Telephone number.
 Corporate office
       Name _
       Address
       City, state
       Telephone number
       Environmental director
                         FIGURE 3-15
                   FACILITY COVER SHEET

                             3-23

-------
2.    Technical Guide  for  Review and Evaluation of Compliance  Schedules, U.S.  Envi-
     ronmental Protection Agency, EPA-340/l-73-001a, Washington, D.C., July 1973.

3.    Compilation  of Air  Pollutant  Emission  Factors, U.S.  Environmental Protection
     Agency, EPA AP-42, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, April 1973.

4.    Federal Register, Vol.  36, No. 247, December 23,1971.

5.    Federal Register, Vol.  39, No. 47, March 8,1974.

6.    Corporate Environmental Management Information Systems  Users  Guide,  PEDCo.
     Environmental Specialists, Cincinnati, Ohio, 1972.
                                       3-24

-------
                                     CHAPTER 4

                             EMISSION REGULATIONS



4.1 Legal Requirements Under the Clean Air Act Relative to Testing

     4.1.1  The Clean Air Act - General

The  Clean Air Act of 1970 was structured by Congress to channel regulatory action in a
well-planned manner. Basically, two types of pollutant sources are regulated: stationary and
mobile. This industrial guide pertains only to stationary source pollutants. Congress meant
to control both new and existing stationary sources as follows:

     1.    The regulatory agency (now the U.S. EPA) is charged with the task of setting
          National Ambient Air Quality Standards for nonhazardous pollutants. Once a
          standard is set, each state must develop a plan for achieving and maintaining the
          prescribed ambient air quality. Pollutants  so  controlled are known as criteria
          pollutants.

     2.    New or modified sources of air pollutants are to be regulated to a greater degree.
          The rationale here is that newer technology can be utilized and pollutants better
          controlled for a new source where  the control is part  of the original process
          design.

     3.    Certain air pollutants may directly or indirectly cause an increase in mortality,
          illness, or  discomfort. These are termed  hazardous pollutants. These pollutants
          are first identified by U.S. EPA,  whereupon a standard is proposed within 180
          days for that hazardous pollutant. Test procedures  are defined for the pollutants
          and published in the Federal Register.

The  Clean Air Act Amendments of 1977 (Public Law 95-95) made significant changes in
the Clean Air Act of  1970. A summary of major provisions related to industrial sources
follows:

     1.    A new short-term nitrogen dioxide standard will be promulgated unless there is
          evidence that the standard is not necessary to protect public health.

     2.    A new system is implemented to prevent significant  deterioration of ambient
          air quality. The country will be divided into  three classes, each allowing a dif-
          ferent amount of industrial activity.
                                         4-1

-------
     3.   The new act  now  allows the  agency to assess non-compliance sources with a
         penalty equal  to the cost of complying with regulations, rather than a maximum
         fine.

     4.   Procedures are outlined for new industries that desire to locate in "non-attain-
         ment" areas, i.e., areas where national health standards are exceeded.

All stationary source regulations are addressed in Title I, Sections 101 through 119 of the
Act. A very brief outline of these sections follows:

     Sections 101 through 106 — Defines purpose of the law; establishes research and
     training means; provides for planning and control program grants.

     Section  107 — Mechanism  for  naming Air  Quality  Control  Regions;  assigns
     environmental responsibility to state governments.

     Section  108 — Provides for background studies to establish air quality standards; basic
     data to  include control technology costs, energy  requirements, emission reduction
     benefits, and environmental impacts.

     Section  109 — Mandates the  EPA Administrator to promulgate national ambient  air
     quality standards (AQS) based on the information gathered pursuant to Section 108.

     Section  110 — Directs each state to develop a plan  (State Implementation Han, or
     SIP) to achieve and maintain the AQS set pursuant to Section 109.

     Section  111  — Establishes new source performance standards (NSPS). Authority may
     be delegated to states to implement and enforce standards.

     Section  112 — Establishes national  standards for hazardous air pollutants; applies to
     both new and existing sources.

     Section 113 — Outlines mechanisms for federal enforcement; authorizes federal
     endorcement of standards.

     Section  114 —  Authorizes U.S. EPA  to require  record-keeping and monitoring;
     authorizes inspections and test requirements.

     Sections 115 through 119 — Provides for administrative means of abatement; certain
     state authority is  specifically retained; establishes  a Presidential Advisory Board;
     mandates federal facilities to comply with air pollutant regulations; defines procedures
                                         4-2

-------
     pertaining to fossil-fuel-fired units during periods of fuel switching, fuel unavailability,
     and fuel stipulations as defined by the Energy Supply and Environmental Coordination
     Act.

 Table  4-1 lists the entities affected by the three different types of regulatory schemes and
 the citations wherein the various emission limitations and test procedures are given.

     4.1.2 Criteria Pollutants

 Criteria  pollutants  are promulgated pursuant to Sections 108 and  109.  Particulate matter,
 sulfur  oxides, nitrogen oxides, hydrocarbons, and carbon monoxide were defined as criteria
 pollutants when the 1970 CAA was promulgated. On March 31,1976, lead was added to the
 list of criteria pollutants.* Each state has promulgated regulations to control these pollu-
 tants such  that the national ambient air quality standards (AQS) are achieved. These regula-
 tions,  part of  each  SIP, may vary from state to state.  The regulations cover both existing
 and new sources and may be  thought of as basic regulations.  Determining whether sources
 meet these regulations  may require source tests. Although the U.S. EPA has promulgated
 test  procedures,  tests prescribed by state regulatory agencies for criteria pollutants vary.
 For example, one state may measure the amount of condensible pollutants whereas another
 state may count  only the "front end" of the sampling  train (filterable particulate matter).

 Not only  may  the  test method  vary, but  process monitoring can affect the emission
 regulation. Whether a regulation limits a pollutant in terms of parts per million (ppm)  or
 pounds per ton of raw material throughput determines the process monitoring requirements.
     4.1.3 New Source Performance Standards

It is recognized  that  some  processes emit  greater quantities of  pollutants than others.
Section 111  of the Act requires U.S. EPA  to single out certain processes for new source
performance standards (NSPS). Generally,  such standards are more stringent than those
applicable to existing sources that emit criteria pollutants. Congress intended for such new
sources to employ the best technology in controlling pollutants. Should an NSPS apply to a
criteria  pollutant, a newly built facility must comply with the NSPS  limitation  for  that
pollutant  or with the SIP regulation, whichever is more stringent.

Since these standards are national in scope, the test methods do not vary by state. Specific
test methods are promulgated with the NSPS. Although in general the NSPS do not apply to
existing facilities that emit pollutants, there  are two exceptions. The first exception relates
to emitters of noncriteria pollutants. Such existing facilities must meet a state-promulgated
standard,  which  the  states  are  required to   adopt  under  Section lll(d).  These
*EPA has proposed an ambient air quality standard for lead of 1.5 micrograms per cubic meter, figured
 on a monthly average. Issuance of a final standard by EPA is scheduled for June, 1978.
                                         4-3

-------





















y
<
PS
1— 1
<
2
<
Cd
J
U
-H S
a§
02 «
< Q
5 5
•^
C/}
Z:
O
h~ M
E-
<

*"•*





















c S
* 3
'•g1*

•— s
£ 2
a a.
c *^
o S
"E +•'
.3-0
!:§
*<— '*"
O co
u *"
i* ^"
§•§
en ce


Affected entities*






-o
CO
•e
s

tn
C
O
1
p
-;
,. .
o
u
a.
£
u
o
£
"c E
co ca
to b.
S g
•— u
C u
o IS

CO **-^
s S
c u
V CO
-a.|
£• h

+J CO
CO tj
en .2

All facilities which emit particulate matter,sulfur
oxides, nitrogen oxides, hydrocarbons, carbon

^
*-
CO
"a.
a.
!0
1 •"*"
1 C
-a w
>- 3
re _i
£ 2
TO — ^-
en J
4^ ^
« c

3 ^1
^ fe
£ -
•c -i
•c 5
C c/:















^,
"c
u
_e
L_
CO

monoxide.
L.
-~ t —
to 3
-3 O
J2 |
C i^
CO £*
to 5
.^
c c
* -—
"a "
— cj

C
a. 3
^n ^
S 3
— m
^_
c^_ ^D
O =
"; cs
5; en M
£ § S
3 -2 «
3 .i «
"-J u —


ca
3
W3
^
o"
"cS O
^£
u w
[•r, U
<4« O
O ^"
-3 O
o o
""^ 1-
-> «
^*
_Q^ C
-t; o
E- •*

_ . 1*.
- •«
o §
^ 1






















6 T=
I* S
^ £ 3
co 5 i_
•s g -°
JS "o £•
&.ij S
U U T3
A a. c
E i. o
i-2 1
o «
0 « 2
3 U
J > U
a. u c
s gp s
„ t. -O
ce o ce
""* *rf flj
Sen —
" -i^
-— tn ^*
a- .2 5
:s s •*
^ 1
u v ca
'u *" "^
e5 E to"
^=3
g i 3

61)
.£
flj *^ ^
^ 'F 3
*^ to
a >. • —

** & a-
*K =* en
ro ^—
to ~a
to ^ ^™*
y "^ u
w S -X
C ra "«
Q_ <*> S
— i;
S Sfi C
c T ™
plies to al
nation wid
sources ar





















«'
bronze ingot production plants, iron and steel plan


*,
^
o
**
.-
rS
--
5

_>,
— ^
^CO
"
•2
05
J

to
sources ar






















sewage treatment plants, primary aluminum in-
dustry, primary copper, zinc, and lead smelters,



















_5






















"«
o
u
(C
C
.0
^
S
a,
o
>~.
b
4->
CO
^3
.£
1 f
3 J
^ s-
£ .2
« t:
j= «
s- s
a a-
^ £
a. a.






















.2
"3
^
^ x»-
_ r— "
CO O
=U c£
-3 rj.
V _ -
t^ ^^
v- O
0 •«*
u "*^
o ^o
I-
' eo
^? f
el (O
— C
~ O
r- «
-e
y £ ; ^ 5
% 1 i f s |
™" .. as •£ »^>
c "c *" 2 e w
i- — sT "*2 *^ O
O 3 "tS CB r- "S
•C a. J2 .-tt g S
a. - co 3 g Si) ja
_ -o ^ o .E _c jg
^•S^S^""^ '=
v "^ C- ^ ^ «^ ^ ff
x ™ " 3 co .—< "•
— o _e — rt to *- o
-*- _. ^- & U -j ..*
u S « co -r; — rs j
"5 ^ IS -fi *- « ° °
i "^ i ** => _e ,* '3
* T: * <- o-M "- -=
•S^^^ffl1*
«°S,= OH£= .1
« -Q 5T -J3 ^ L __ J
•S !0 a, CO en — J ' ~ O • —
|^|j|3§: 1
cS^-M-^-^n-i^Q *+-
— r CO .. •*• tfJ 12 *--
.£>•*->•*' ff«a-hs
•SSsj^sijo. g
M ^ cT en"
tc
CJ

^ .2
a< tw
co .2
i- E
l c ^
_« v-
-e "3 c
i- — SS
*o 2 "3

2 .S "5
en ?s *"
»j « -C
5 CO M

~~f O O
O ^H*
°- -s 1
CO CO £•
§-H §
-S ca cc
CO 1 3=
s I ;
= en 3






















mercury, benzene.
*» *""
0 "«
S .to
to S;
C •
""" "3
~^ P i
1 -2

= "H
0 S
• — Ca

H U
c •*•
-^ f5
E co
B be
co e
-3 0
Eo E
13 «
! §
to - -
1 -S
^ > s
1 g -i





































•o
t—
^*
~
•^
a
"1
f

-------
 state-promulgated standards may be less  stringent than the NSPS. The  other exception
 concerns  modification of  existing  sources.  Should an  existing source  be modified  or
 reconstructed to the degree that it may be deemed a new source, it is subject to the NSPS.

      4.1.4 Hazardous Pollutants

 The Clean Air Act differentiates nonhazardous and  hazardous pollutants. The U.S. EPA
 Administrator is charged with promulgation of standards for hazardous pollutants regardless
 of  whether  they  emanate  from  new  or existing  sources.   At  the  state's   option,
 implementation plans may be submitted to U.S. EPA. Upon U.S.  EPA approval, the states
 are authorized to enforce the hazardous pollutant standards within their jurisdiction. Should
 the state  fail to implement such a plan, however,  U.S. EPA will enforce standards for
 hazardous pollutants against both existing and new sources.

 Source test methods are promulgated with the hazardous pollutant standards. These test
 methods are the only approved means by which compliance may be determined.

 4.2 Inspection and Data Requirements Under the Clean Air Act

 Section 114 of the Act gives the U.S. EPA Administrator broad powers to inspect, monitor,
 and test pollutant-emitting facilities and to require record-keeping, monitoring, and testing
 by the regulated source. The 1977 Clean Air Act Amendments have significantly changed
 permit requirements. It is recommended that the reader contact an EPA Region office or a
 state agency  to obtain requirements on  permits. Section  4.4.3 of this publication  will be
 revised at a later date,

     4.2.1  Sources of Criteria Pollutants

 In  general, reporting requirements for sources  of  criteria pollutants  are minimal. These
 requirements  are set forth in the applicable SIP.  Most of the reporting is in the form of use
 permit  applications, which  provide information,  on  process throughput, control facilities,
 stack gas temperatures, and the like. This information is very useful to state and local air
 pollution control agencies because it allows them to inventory total pollutants over large
 areas and thereby to formulate large-scale control strategies.

 On  occasion, the source must verify its claim  of compliance  with applicable emission
limitations by providing source test data. Most monitoring and reporting requirements for
existing  large sources are formulated for the individual source as a result of compliance
negotiations.  For small sources,  such as small  incinerators  used  by  grocery  stores and
grain-conveying cyclones used by small feed and grain stores, the reporting or monitoring
requirements usually are not extensive.
                                         4-5

-------
     4.2.2 Sources Subject to New Source Performance Standards

Requirements  for  testing and reporting under an  NSPS are  usually extensive. Within 6
months  of  startup,  performance  tests must  be   conducted  in  accordance  with
EPA-promulgated methodology. All new sources subject to an NSPS must provide test ports
and facilities adequate for performing source tests as required  by the regulations. This is a
national regulation, and  variations from the test requirements are not permitted. Prior to
performance testing, the  source must notify the  U.S. EPA. Generally, observers from EPA
or from the  state or local agency are present to ensure that proper test methods are used. All
new sources subject to an NSPS are required to have  performance tests.

The individual NSPS regulations specify  monitoring and reporting  requirements. Logs
showing startup, shutdown, and malfunctions must be kept for 2 years. Quarterly reports of
excess emissions must be submitted to the Administrator.

     4.2.3  Sources of Hazardous Pollutants

Hazardous  pollutant  regulations apply  to both  new and existing  sources. The regulations
specify  reporting  requirements  for the  source.  Not, only  must operational  data  be
maintained, but application must also be made to EPA prior to any modification of existing
sources. This  application may be  denied.  No  new or modified source of  a hazardous
 pollutant may start operation without prior notification of EPA.

 Source testing facilities  are required for both new and existing sources. Testing, monitoring,
 and  reporting requirements  for  sources  of hazardous. pollutants are  set forth  m the
 individual regulations for each pollutant.

 4.3 Confidentiality of Data - The Freedom of Information Act

      4.3.1  General Business Information

 It is the general policy of U.S. EPA to  make the  fullest possible disclosure of information to
 the public. In carrying out this policy, the U.S. EPA has devised a procedure intended to
 protect both the interests of businesses that furnish information to the  U.S. EPA and the
 interests of the public.  This procedure is designed to afford  business a fair opportunity to
 assert a confidentiality  claim and to substantiate the claim prior to any U.S. EPA ruling on
 the claim.

  Certain types of business information gained by the U.S. EPA are entitled to be treated as
  confidential and are protected from disclosure to the  public. Generally this includes any
  information concerning which a business has a  legal right to limit disclosure to others. For
                                           4-6

-------
example, proprietary information and commercial or financial information that is privileged
or confidential are specifically exempted from the mandatory disclosure requirements of the
Freedom of Information Act.

Information supplied to the U.S. EPA is entitled to confidential treatment if:

     1.    The business has asserted a business confidentiality claim,

     2.    The business has taken reasonable measures to protect the confidentiality of the
          information,

     3.    The information has not been reasonably obtainable by others without consent of
          the business,

     4.    No statute requires disclosure of the information, and

     5.    Either

          a.   Disclosure of the information is likely to cause substantial harm to the firm's
              competitive position, or

          b.   The information was voluntarily  submitted, but its disclosure would impair
              the Government's ability to obtain necessary information in the future.

     4.3.2 Special Rules Governing the Clean Air Act

Generally, the  procedures  and  substantive  rules  for maintaining  and  claiming  the
confidentiality of business information also apply to data provided to the U.S. EPA under
Section 114  of the Clean Air Act. Information is eligible for confidential treatment in these
circumstances:

     1.    It  was  provided in response to a request by the U.S. EPA made for any of the
          purposes stated in Section 114; or

     2.    It could have been required under Section 114.

Emission  data, however, are not eligible for confidential treatment. Ineligible information
includes:

     1.    Information necessary to determine the characteristics of an emission by a source,
          and
                                          4-7

-------
     2.   General  descriptions of the location  and/or nature of a source to the extent
         necessary to identify the source and to distinguish it from other sources.

Under certain circumstances, this category may also include data relating to:

     1.   The manner and rate of operation of a source, and

     2.   The device, installation, or operation constituting a source.

As a result  of this broad exclusion, much of the information gathered in inspections and
source tests of facilities under Section 114  of the Act is available to the public. This
information may include such items as process throughput, stack gas temperatures, and the
like.

Certain limitations, however,  are applied to disclosure of information relating to research
and commercial facilities. The  following information is considered emission data:

     1.   That concerning research on any project, method, device, or installation that was
         produced, developed, installed, or used only for research, and

     2.   That concerning any product, method, device, or installation designed and  in-
         tended to be marketed or used commercially but not yet so marketed or used.

Such emission data are therefore  available to the public only insofar as it is necessary to
disclose whether a source is in compliance with an applicable standard and to demonstrate
the feasibility, practicability, or attainability of an existing or proposed standard.

     4.3,3  Asserting a Confidentiality Claim

A business that submits information to U.S. EPA may initially assert that the information is
entitled to confidential treatment  by attaching a notice or legend to the information at the
time it is submitted,  employing language  such  as "trade secret," "proprietary," or "com-
pany confidential." Although confidentiality of information previously submitted may be
claimed, the U.S. EPA is obligated only to use such efforts as are practicable to associate the
claim with  the previously  submitted information; consequently,  such  efforts may be
ineffective.  If a business fails  to assert a confidentiality claim, the information will not be
entitled to confidential treatment.

If U.S.  EPA determines that  information  may  be entitled to confidential treatment, each
business  asserting such a claim is asked to comment. In other words, the burden of proof of
confidentiality is on the claimant. These comments must address the following matters:

     1.   The portions of the  information entitled to confidential treatment,
                                         4-8

-------
      2.   The period of time for which confidential treatment is desired,

      3.   The purpose for which information was furnished to the U.S. EPA,

      4.   Whether business confidentiality claim accompanied the information,

      5.   Measures taken to prevent undesired disclosure,

      6.   Extent to which the information has been disclosed to others,

      7.   Pertinent confidentiality determinations,

      8.   Whether disclosure would likely  result  in  substantial  harm to  the  company's
          competitive position, and

      9.   Whether information was voluntarily submitted.

 The  legal office of U.S. EPA is responsible for making the final determination whether
 business information is  entitled  to  confidential treatment. If a business fails to submit its
 comments in the time permitted, the confidentiality claim is waived and the information is
 not entitled to confidential treatment. In all other cases, the legal office will evaluate the
 claim and  comments  and  determine  whether the  information is  in  fact entitled to
 confidential treatment.

 A  notice  of denial is provided to a business whenever  U.S. EPA determines that the
 information is not entitled to confidential treatment. Public disclosure of the information is
 then automatic unless the business commences action in a  federal court to obtain judicial
 review of the determination  and  to obtain a preliminary injunction prior to such disclosure.

 4.4 State Implementation Plans

      4.4.1 Emissions Regulations

 Each state is required to develop and implement a  plan whereby it will achieve the federal
 ambient  air quality standards set for criteria pollutants (Sections 109 and 110 of the Act).
 This plan is known as the SIP. The cardinal part of an SIP is the emission regulation scheme.
                                         *•                             o
 For a given pollutant, a state  may adopt many regulations. This is true of particulate matter,
 for example, where it is not  uncommon  for an SIP to include separate particulate emission
 regulations for indirect-fired heat exchangers, incinerators,  cement kilns, asphalt batching
 plants, and catalytic cracking units, with  a general regulation  for all other sources of
 particulate emissions. Further, the units of various emission regulations may be different,
taking the following forms:
                                         4-9

-------
    1.   Pounds of particulate per hour per pound of process throughput,

    2.   Grains per standard cubic foot of exhaust gas,

    3.   Pounds of paniculate per million BTU heat input, and

    4.   Pounds of particulate per ton of refuse burned.

Persons monitoring a process during performance of a source test must be cognizant of these
units, since they  directly affect the monitoring requirements. For example, much more
detailed process monitoring and  recording are needed to determine compliance  with a
standard expressed in pounds  of  particulate per ton of throughput than with a standard
expressed in grains per standard cubic foot.

     4.4.2  Source Test Regulations

Each  SIP provides a regulatory scheme for source testing. Some of these schemes  require
continuous monitoring in addition to periodic testing. It is stressed that each state may have
different requirements; no industry should assume that requirements of any specific state
are similar to those of its neighboring states or of the federal government. Almost all states
specify the test method to be used. All but four states, however, further provide that the
source may utilize  a nonspecified test method if prior approval is obtained. Most of the
SIP's require the use of EPA's Test Method 5 for  particulate source tests. A substantial
number  specify the ASME-PTC27 method,  and two  jurisdictions (Connecticut and the
District  of Columbia) also  require use of the ASME-PTC21  method for certain sources.
Since  source  tests  are  expensive,  it  is  important that  approval of any proposed test
method be obtained from appropriate authorities in advance. Additionally, the test must be
performed  in  such a way  as  to determine compliance. Not only must  the  facility be
operating normally during the test, but a knowledgeable and reliable person must monitor
and record the production operations to assure that the extracted  sample can be gauged in
terms of the emission standard.

 With regard to obtaining prior approval of a proposed test method, at least 13 states require
 prenotification of a proposed source test. Failure to comply with this regulation in a timely
 manner may negate any test  data  obtained. Since costs of many  compliance tests exceed
 $5,000, this could be an expensive mistake.

 As the results of source tests are being  used more and more as proof of  compliance, the
 requirements  for pretest preparation  and  post-test  reporting are  becoming  more
 sophisticated.  Figures 4-1  and  4-2  show the "Intent  to Test  Notification" form  and
 "Statement of Process Rate"  form used by the Ohio EPA. In addition, that agency requires
 that the following guidelines be observed in preparation of test reports:
                                          4-10

-------


1_-



(M
**—
O
O)
Ol
°"








o

1—
O
LL
H
o


to
LU
O
H
1-
LU
H






o












LU
O
X
Q.
LU
LU










co
CO
LU
DC
O
Q






















2
o
1-
^ 0
2: LL
O ^•
"•g-o o
^III 1 1































LU
•z.






O
LL
0-
^:
o 5
x to
LU g
LU O
H 1-








CO
LU
CC
Q
Q











^
O
I—

5
1- nr
TO CONTAC
FIRM INFOI
^ °
8 P g
CC CO 5
LU LU «<
















1-
^t
|—

	
—
O
a.

LL
CC
t—
CO
CO
—
_
•>_
u_
^
LU
Q
^
_•
O
H
cc
O
LL
Z!

*— '

TO CONTAC'
EAM SAMPLI
-z. ^
° %
CC w
LU "^
ifo^'i ^^0.1-2:0.0
o s o e

2> o
<3 gj 45

1 c ~ d
0 •£ 'E «
*^ co c
11 if
9-0-2 g.
E o « —
Q) *-> -° ft)
^ 2 ~ c
*j — *•• 01
O *TK CO H—
c
co 	 ,
*z ^ (A
_^ O j^
"o ^ "c
Q. >- 3
•Q C ^
OJ Ql . —
^ 3 o
CO Q  -C to ^
o t; m










= ^. S








>
o £
5= T3
O VI
co co
Ol O)
x" x
e e
Q. O.
Q. Q.

oi ^-"








_>
c"2
QS H
0 3
Q."O
u_ — >
o





^




^
+-;

F -!
< E c
5 -2 0
rr <* !r
u- to V
O en a
!^ x x
— £ £
^ a. Q.
< < <
1—
CO i^ CO
>


                                                            Q_
                                                            UJ

                                                            g

                                                            X
                                                            o


                                                        T-  m

                                                        4  Q
                                                        UJ  ^
                                                        CC  ^
                                                            CC

                                                            O
                                                            LL

                                                            H
                                                            W
                                                            Lit
                                                            H

                                                            LLJ
                                                            CC
                                                            CL.
4-11

-------
                                                                        Page 2 of 2

THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SHALL BE SUBMITTED AS
ATTACHMENTS:
V.    DATE OF LAST CALIBRATION
      1.  Velocity measuring equipment	,	
      2.  Gas volume metering equipment..
      3.  Gas flow rate metering equipment
      4.  Gas temperature measuring equipment	_	—
VI.   SAMPLING TRAIN INFORMATION
      1.  A schematic diagram of each sampling train. The name, model number, and date
         of purchase of commercially manufactured trains should be included with the
         diagram.
      2.  The type or types of capture media to be used to collect each gas stream pollutant.
      3.  Sample tube type,  i.e., glass, teflon, stainless steel, etc.
      4.  Probe cleaning method and solvent to be used, if applicable.

VII.  LABORATORY ANALYSIS
      A description of the laboratory analysis methods to be used to determine the con-
      centration of each pollutant.

VIM. DATASHEETS
      A sample of all field data sheets to be used  in the-test or tests.

 IX.   DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS
      A description of any operation, process, or activity that could vent exhaust gases to
      the test stack. This shall include the description and feed rate of all materials capable
      of producing pollutant emissions used in each separate operation.
      Note: All testing shall be performed at maximum rate capacity as specified by the
            equipment manufacturer or at the maximum rate actually used in the source
            operation, whichever is greater.

 X.   STACK AND VENT DESCRIPTION
      A dimensional sketch or sketches showing the plan and elevation view of the entire
      ducting and stack arrangement. The sketch should include the relative position of all
      processes or operations venting to the stack or vent to be tested. It should also in-
      clude the position of the sampling ports relative to the nearest upstream and down-
       stream gas flow directional or duct dimensional change. The sketches should include
      the relative position, type, and  manufacturer's claimed efficiency of all gas cleaning
       equipment.
       A cross sectional dimensional sketch of the stack or duct at the sampling ports, show-
       ing position of sampling points. In the case of a rectangular duct, show division of
       duct into equal areas.

 XI.   SAFETY
       Describe all possible safety hazards including such items as weak roofs, low railings,
       toxic fumes, hot items, electrical power lines, nearby by-pass vents, unguarded
       ladders, etc.
       List all safety warning signals such as fire alarms, sirens, etc.
       Note: Conditions considered unsafe at the time of the test will cause postponement.
                                FIGURE 4-1 (Cont.)
                       PRE-TEST FORM USED BY OHIO EPA
                                        4-12

-------
                       STATEMENT OF PROCESS RATE
TEST NUMBER.
FIRM NAME __
ADDRESS	
                         DATE
                     DATA ON OPERATING CYCLE TIME
START OF OPERATION, TIME
END OF OPERATION, TIME __
ELAPSED TIME, MINUTES	
               IDLE TIME DURING
               CYCLE, MINUTES _
               NET TIME OF
               CYCLE, MINUTES
    DATA ON MATERIAL CHARGED TO PROCESS DURING OPERATING CYCLE:
     FOR FUEL BURNING OPERATION ONLY:
     Weight	Attach analysis         Maximum design BTU input	
     % Excess air _	         Actual BTU input for test 	
    Gas flow
.ACFM
    Total BTU input for all fuel burning equipment on a plant or premises which are
    united physically or operationally (based on permit submissions) -	
Note: Include stream flow chart with proper identification of scale, etc.
II.   FOR INCINERATOR ONLY:
    Total weight charged during test	-Weight per charge .
     Number of charges ^__	 Type waste	
    OTHER SOURCE OPERATIONS:
    Material	
    Material	
    Material	.	
    Material	
    Material	
             .Weight
             .Weight
             .Weight
             .Weight
             .Weight
Note:  Include any pertinent charts or other operational data.
I certify that the above statement is true to the best of my knowledge and belief:
                  SIGNATURE.	__
                  TITLE	
                              FIGURE 4-2
            PROCESS INFORMATION FORM USED BY OHIO EPA
                                  4-13

-------
    1.   Display test results in tabular form (the units of measurement shall be consistent
         with units in the applicable regulations),

    2.   Include a copy of all field data sheets completed during testing,

    3.   Include information required by Item IX of the "Intent to Test Notification,"

    4.   Include a completed "Statement of Process Rate" form for each test, and

    5.   Include a sample of all formulas used in calculating results.

Many states that do not require a formal notification  of an intent to test do require that a
state representative be present during the test. Again, faUure to notify may invalidate the
test results.

In addition to requiring the source to provide test data, many state agencies are empowered
to perform  source tests. Although  most states do not maintain an extensive test program
because of the great expense,  the authority to test is a powerful tool for enforcement of
state regulations. As is the case with industry, the state agency can hurt its case through use
of improper testing methods. Full cooperation must be given with regard to unit operations
during an agency-conducted test.

     4.4.3  Permit System Review Requirements

Permit systems of most air pollution control programs at the state and local level require the
following:

     1.   Source registration data (identify type and location of source),

     2.   Information on the process employed and control devices installed, and

     3.   Emission inventory  data (emission  information for comparison with regulations
          and as input for air impact analysis through modeling).

 Construction and Operating Permits -  The permit system is the main  mechanism by which
 industrial emissions are controlled.

 Before a facility  can be constructed,  a permit to construct must be issued by the  state
 and/or local regulatory  agency. As illustrated in Figure 4-3, a permit application may
 include the following:

      1.   Application forms, including process description,
                                          444

-------
INDUSTRY
CONSULTANT
                                      REGULATORY AGENCY
                                       (STATE OR LOCAL)
                     SUBMITTAL
                    PREPARATION
                INITIAL SUBMISSION
                   COMMENTS
                                         APPLICATION
                                           REVIEW
                                            ISSUE
                                           PERMIT
M- OPERATION
H
Z

1


APPLICATION
1
*



^^
INI
SUBMITTAL
PREPARATION



TIAL SUBMISSION


COMMENTS




ST/
TE
1

APPLICATION
REVIEW
I
i
VCK
ST

TEST
REPORT




-
OBSERVE
TESTS
INSPECT
FACILITY
—

                                            ISSUE
                                           PERMIT
                       FIGURE 4-3
          TYPICAL PERMIT SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM
                          4-15

-------
     2.   Area map showing surrounding structures,

     3.   Site plan showing building/process, and

     4.   Equipment specifications.

Larger industries  having an  environmental  engineering  staff prepare  these  documents
in-house  whereas smaller industries usually retain consultants to help with this activity. In
some states,  applications must be signed  and sealed by a registered professional engineer.
The  regulatory agency reviews the application package and after any questions are resolved,
issues a permit to construct a facility and/or control device. After the facility is constructed,
the industry  or  consultant submits as-built plans to the regulatory agency indicating any
changes from the original plans.

Once the facility has been placed in operation,  it is usual for the agency to  inspect the
facility to  determine whether the plant is built in accordance  with approved plans and to
perform  stack and/or visible emissions tests at all emission sources. An operations permit is
applied for after the shakedown period; if the inspection(s) and tests  indicate compliance
with applicable regulations and standards, an operations permit is issued. The permit usually
incorporates  (1) limitations on  production rate,  and (2)  monitoring requirements such as
type of monitoring  (continuous  or  manual),  frequency  of  sampling, and  reporting
frequency.

If the facility comes under the New Source Performance Standards, it must comply with
federal as well as state and local requirements.

Testing of  new or modified sources must be performed no later than 60 days after achieving
maximum  production rate, but  no longer than 180 days after initial startup. The tests must
be conducted during representative performance, with fuels and raw materials representative
of those  used during normal operation.

The owner or operator has the following responsibilities:

      1.   To give a minimum of 30 days notification of scheduled tests.

      2.   To give a minimum of 30 days notice  of anticipated startup.  U.S. EPA must be
          notified of actual startup within 15 days after startup.

      3.   To provide adequate sampling ports, safe sampling platforms, safe access to the
          platforms, and utilities for sampling and testing equipment.

      4.    To perform emission tests and furnish a written report of test results to the
           Administrator.
                                          4-16

-------
Testing methods are specified in 40 CFR 60.


Permit Renewal — The permit system within a state or local program is operated under the
combined direction of the engineering services and field enforcement services departments.
A typical organizational chart for a local governmental  air pollution agency is shown  in
Figure 44..
                                 MAYOR, MANAGER,
                               COMMISSION, BOARD OR
                               MUNICIPAL DEPARTMENT
                                HEARING OR APPEALS
                                      BOARD
                                   AIR POLLUTION
                                 CONTROL OFFICER
                  ADMINISTRATION
                     (BUSINESS
                   MANAGEMENT)
         TECHNICAL
      SERVICES DIVISION
  AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENT
  LABORATORY ANALYSES
  DATA PROCESSING
  METEOROLOGY
  EFFECTS STUDIES
                                                 TECHNICAL ADVISORY
                                                    COMMITTEES
                  PUBLIC INFORMATION
                    AND EDUCATION
    FIELD SERVICES
       DIVISION
FIELD PATROL
SOURCE INSPECTION
COMPLAINTS
COURT TESTIMONY AND
 CASE PREPARATION
PLUME EVALUATION
 TRAINING
EMERGENCY OPE RATIONS
      ENGINEERING
        DIVISION
CONSTRUCTION PERMITS
SOURCE TESTING
INDUSTRIALSURVEYS
REGULATION DEVELOPMENT
EMISSION INVENTORY
CERTIFICATE TO OPERATE
                                     FIGURE 4-4
        TYPICAL ORGANIZATIONAL CHART FOR A LOCAL GOVERNMENTAL
                            AIR POLLUTION  AGENCY
                                        4-17

-------
A large part of the activity of a state or local air pollution control agency is permit-related.
Figure 4-5 shows that  of the 23 percent (23.3) of time spent in engineering services, 15
•percent  (14.8) is spent in  operation of the  permit system. Field enforcement services
consume up to 8 percent (7.9) of the agency's time. Almost 13 percent (12.9) of the field
services consist of scheduled inspections for permit renewals.
                                  TECHNICAL
                                   SERVICES
    FIELD
ENFORCEMENT
  SERVICES
   D  FIELD
   PATROL AND
   COMPLAINTS
                                              MANAGEMENT
                                               SERVICES
                          ENGINEERING
                            SERVICES
                                  FIGURE 4-5
           GENERALIZED DISTRIBUTION OF FUNCTIONAL ACTIVITIES
             FOR REGULATORY AGENCIES ANTICIPATED FOR 1974
                                     4-18

-------
The reinspection procedure for permit renewals entails a number of functions:

     1.   Processing data for determining whether to issue or deny a certificate to operate,

     2.   Processing data for determining the need for source testing,

     3.   Verifying data for source registration,

     4.   Verifying data for emission inventory,

     5.   Procuring data for court or appeals board action,

     6.   Procuring data for evaluation of operating procedures relative to compliance with
         current standards,

     7.   Procuring data for evaluation of possible nuisance problems, and

     8.   Verifying operating schedules of equipment.

Reinspections are done primarily in connection with permit renewal but may also be done
in response to citizen complaints (which require about 6 percent (6.3) of an agency's time)
or in connection  with a periodic (usually annual) compliance test and/or  inspection.  A
continuing permit system operation is illustrated in Figure 4-6.

Typical of the forms used by inspectors in these surveillance activities are those of the Los
Angeles County Air Pollution Control District for field inspection reporting (Figures 4-7 and
4-8).

     4.4.4  Reporting Requirements During Violations

Industrial plants are  normally considered in violation of regulations when a process or
control device emits pollutants in excess of the rate cited in the applicable regulation or
standard. Excessive emissions could occur because of poor operation and maintenance or a
malfunction in the process.

The Federal Register defines malfunctions as follows:

     "Malfunctions are sudden and unavoidable failures of control or process equipment, or
     processes that do not operate in a normal or usual manner. Failures that are caused
     entirely or in part by poor maintenance, careless operation, or  any other preventable
     condition shall not be considered malfunctions." (2)
                                         4-19

-------
INDUSTRY
CONSULTANT
REGULATORY AGENCY
1-
H
MPLIANCE TESTS
INSPECTION COMPLA
z
z
<
_/
1^
££

PROCESS
ADJUSTMENTS
1 t_
I .
V
NOTIFICAT
, 	 !•
ANN UAL TEST
REPORT
NOTIFICATION OF
VIOLATION/COMPLAINT


RECOMMENDATIONS
* FOR CORRECTIVE
ACTION

ION OF CORRECTION
STACK OR
VISIBLc
EMISSIONS TEST


J NOTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE




i At




SUBMITTAL
PREPARATION
INITIAL SUBMISSION
COMMENTS



(STATE OR LOCAL)
FIELD PATROL
AND COMPLAINTS

ENFORCEMENT
OFFICE

RE VIEW TESTS
FOR CONTINUED
COMPLIANCE
t

APPLICATION
REVIEW
_J 1
I
FACILITY
INSPECTION
1 ,
REISSUE
PERMIT
                 FIGURE 4-6
       CONTINUATION OF PERMIT SYSTEM
                    4-20

-------
         ENGINEERING   DIVISION—FIELD  REPORT
                                                                    DATt 01 INSPECTION1
«*1L(MG A.OORC.SS
                                                                    PENUlT APPL. NO.
IOU1?*£NT LOCATION UOOBESi)
                                                                    A.P.C.O. IONE NO.
  ASON PCKMIT
IS »EOUl"[0:
NCw CON-
STRUCTION
                           CHANCE or
                           OWNERSHIP
CHANGE OF
LOCATION.
                                                                   EOUIPMtNT
DATE COKSTRUC-
TION AUTHOR I if D :
                  TIME SPENT
                  "AKIHC INSPECTION:
USUAL OPERATINC SCHEDULE

  I THIS tOUIPutNT:
                                E*TIM*rtD
                                 COST:
  ES 6 intvs OF
CCSTACTto »v EHCIN
FOR DUST *
PROeLE'.'S C-iLY:
             • f PCHT Is)
                                      /KH.
                                                           /H*.
                                               ESTIMATED
                                               LOSSES:
 rflCIAL £&ulP«tsT DESCBIfTlON.  "CALCULATION Of PROCESS, Hi I «MT I S ( 7 > IIOC^ESS OESCR 1 PT I OfT AND FIND1NCS
                         LI*.
                         /MK.
     '"•""     (  )	
     •ITION:        PERMIT.
                                 TO CONDITiCNS LISTED B(
                                            HOLD. SEE EX.
                                            PLANATION BELOW.
 I  ) 1 CONCUR WITM RCCOMUEHDATteNS
 (  ) I 00 NOT CONCUR olTH KECOUHCNDATIOut
 t  1 SEE COUMOTS ON ATTACHED PACE
                                           1 or.
                                   FIGURE 4-7
           FIELD REPORT FORM, DUST AND FUMES, LOS ANGELES
              COUNTY AIR POLLUTION CONTROL DISTRICT (1)
                                       4-21

-------
              AIR POLLUTION CONTROL DISTRICT  COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES
                        434 South Sin Pedro Strtet, Lot Angeles, C»liforni»  90013


                                     COMPLAINT FORM
                                       (plus* print or type)
Statement of  Mr. I   1 Mrs]  IMS.!  1
              ICn«ck On* Qni

Home Address
                   IStr««t Number t                            (City)                     (Z.pCoaei
Mailing Address 	 Tel. No.
                   (H S«me At Home Enter "Same")
Business Address
                   II* None Erne' "None")                       ICity)
Business Telephone  No.  	 Extension
1. NAME OF COMPANY OR SOURCE: 	
                                            (It NOT Known Lmr* Blank I
2  Nature of emission complained of:   (Checkbox)       Smoke |	|
   Dust  I   I    Soot  I   1     Odors  O    Other  Q
   Describe odor or emission  	
                                              (Eg P^nt.Sfcunk  flonen Egg. Etc.!
3  Date and time emissions observed
                                        ISrwcify Es  From     To   am/pm and Include Date)
4. If possible, designate specific source  ,__
                                            {Eg. Stick, Tink. Eic.l
 5  Have you or any member of your household become ill because of these emissions?
                        Yes  d                  No  Q
 6. Describe nature of illness	

 7  State any damage done to your property, home, furniture, automobile, clothing, etc..
 8.  Will yOU testify in COUrt?     YeS  \__\   No  Q  <" no.wm«*tld»el»r«iononrW»r»i,del
    I declare under penalty of perjury that the above information is true and correct.
    Executed on 	 19	 at  _^	.	. ,  California
                                                        lSign»iure!
                                                                                 40D261:Rev.
                                                                                 1U20/73
                                        FIGURE 4-8
                  AGENCY  INSPECTION  COMPLAINT  FORM  (1)
                                            4-22

-------
 Declaration of



 Address 	
                               COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES


                          AIR POLLUTION CONTROL DISTRICT
(Full Mantel
                       (Ncmcl
                                                    (C-tv)
                                                 .declare that:
                                                                             (Zip Code)
I have read the foregoing declaration and I declare under penalty of perjury that the information is to the

best of my knowledge true and correct.


Executed on          - -.	, ia    t «t                                   _
                                                  (City o* Community)
California.
APCD USE ONLY



Complaint and/or declaration received by



on	19	
           (Dm)


Verified source 	
                      No.
                               (FA or Complain H
            HmpKtort MM* • Print!
               inwocton Signttura)
Address
                                                                               H»etorl
                               FIGURE 4-8 (Cont.)

              AGENCY  INSPECTION COMPLAINT FORM (1)
                                       4-23

-------
Therefore,  a violation can  occur in a  plant  whether the problem results from poor
operation/maintenance or from  a malfunction.  Technically, a malfunction is considered
legitimate, whereas a violation caused by an operation/ maintenance problem could result in
prosecution.

Most agencies require the reporting of violations in accordance with the SIP. Some agencies
request notification by phone, and others use a more formal reporting system.

Because companies often  do not call the regulatory agencies when violations occur, com-
plaints by affected citizens provide a method for detection of violation. Some plants subject
to NSPS must operate continuous monitors; for such plants, an inspector can readily check
the records on the stack monitors to document a violation. For compliance with the NSPS,
the owner or operator of a plant is required  to record any emissions resulting from mal-
functions of startups that are measured or  estimated to be greater than those allowed by
NSPS. A report  of such emissions must be submitted to the Administrator on the 15th day
following the end of each calender quarter.  Figure 4-9  illustrates the violation notification
process.

 Violation Notices - Although procedures for notification and correction of violations vary
 among state and local agencies,  many  of them simulate U.S. EPA procedures.  The proce-
 dures discussed  in this section are typical;  however, each industry should check with the
 appropriate regulatory agency to determine specifics and deviations.

 The following groups are usually involved in  a violation  notice:

      1.   Regulatory agency personnel,

      2.   Industry consultant,

      3.   Industry attorney, and

      4.    Industry management.

 Figure 4-10 illustrates interaction of these groups during the procedure for violation cor-
   o
 rection. The individual agency functions are shown in Figure 4-11.

 The regulatory agency determines a violation and issues a violation notice. The industry
 must respond to the notice within a specific period of time. The regulatory agency and the
 industry confer to  discuss the problem, the intent of  the industry to correct the problem,
 and the corrective alternatives that are available.
                                          4-24

-------
      STATE OR LOCAL
        AGENCIES
                       EPA
INDUSTRY
QC
O
Q.
LU
CC
QC
O
                   DATA STORED
                  PRESENTED UPON
                     REQUEST
       '
         MONTHLY,
       QUARTERLY OR
        ANNUALLY AS
         REQUIRED
                                           11
                                                  INDUSTRIAL
                                                   PROCESS
H
QC
O
a.
LU
CC
LU
Q
O
w
a.
LU
cc
O
O
PHONE CALL
  AND/OR
  REPORT
 i
                             EMISSIONS
                           GREATER THAN
                           NSPS STANDARD
                                                J
                                  15 DAYS FOLLOWING
                                    END OF QUARTER
                           FIGURE 4-9
                    REPORTING OF VIOLATIONS
                              4-25

-------
                                                 INDUSTRY REPRESENTATIVES
REGULATORY
AGENCY ENGINEER ATTORNEY MANAGEMENT

NOTICE OF
VIOLATION
*

CONFE


RESPONSE BY
* LETTER


RENCE f 4

OPTIONAL OPTIONAL



PERMIT ' 	 ~-
APPLICATION

,
COMPL
SCHE





DULE
*
CONSENT
r^BPFR „ 	 L
1
J' STACK
- TfcST
* . * ..,
COMPLIANCE COMPLIANCE
1 I
                            ISSUE
                            PERMIT
                                    FIGURE 4-10
              GROUP INTERACTIONS FOR VIOLATION CORRECTION

A  permit  application is generally filed by a registered engineer. The control agency deter-
mines the compliance status of the process or operation for which the application has been
filed. If the operation is not in compliance, then a compliance schedule is filed, which is the
basis for a consent order. The  compliance schedule is a timetable or milestone chart indi-
cating when certain increments of progress toward correction of the violation will be com-
pleted. The consent order is a formal agreement to complete the engineering indicated in the
permit application according to the compliance schedule. When changes have been made to
correct the violation, a stack test is performed to indicate whether the plant is in compliance
or in violation. If the plant is in  compliance, the regulatory agency issues a permit.

If  compliance is not reached in the first attempt, the process is repeated with a new consent
order.
                                        4-26

-------
           REGULATORY AGENCY FUNCTION
                                                      ACTIVITY

PLANT IN
VIOLATION
.



I
ENFORCEMENT
ACTION

i

PERMIT
SECTION
i

COMPLIANCE
SCHEDULE
1

CONSENT
ORDER











, i
NOT IN
^ 	 COMPLIANCE COIV
IN
PLIANCE







EXPIRED
PERMIT

PERMIT
VIOLATION

NO
PERMIT

TEST INDICATES
NOT IN COMPLIANCE

ISSUES ENFORCEMENT
NOTICE

INDUSTRY SUBMITS
APPLICATION

MAINTENANCE
PROGRAM

NEW
CONSTRUCTION

PROCESS
MODIFICATION

CONTINUE
TO OPE RATE
PLANT
                                                                        COMMENTS
                                                                     FROM RECORDS
                                                                     REVIEW
                                                                     > FROM TESTING OR
                                                                     COMPLAINTS
                                                                    • OBSERVATIONS BY
                                                                     SURVEILLANCE TEAM
                                                                    • STACK TEST
                                                                    'VISIBLE EMISSION
                                                                     OBSERVATION
                                                                    • INDICATES CHANGES TO
                                                                     BRING PLANT INTO
                                                                     COMPLIANCE
                                                                    • INCLUDES
                                                                     TIME TABLE

                                                                    'DETAILS OF
                                                                     CORRECTION
                                                                     TECHNIQUES
                                     FIGURE 4-11
         REGULATORY AGENCY FUNCTIONS FOR HANDLING VIOLATION


Compliance Schedules — When a plant is in violation, an enforcement notice is issued that
leads to the formation  of a  compliance schedule and eventual correction of the problem.
Figure 4-12 illustrates the steps involved in the establishment of a compliance schedule.


The compliance schedule is  a timetable under which certain corrective measures will be
accomplished. Figure 4-12 is  a typical form used as the basis of a compliance schedule. Note
that the compliance schedule conditions are made a part of the permit that, in this case, the
State of Florida would issue.


4.5 References


     1.   Guide to Engineering Permit Processing, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
         EPA APTD-1164, July 1972.


    2.   Federal Register, Vol. 38, No. 84.
                                        4-27

-------
                              STATE OF FLORIDA
                       DEPARTMENT OF POLLUTION CONTROL

                         OPERATION PERMIT CONDITIONS

                          FOR AIR POLLUTION  SOURCES

                    {An "X"  indicates applicable conditions)

DATE:                                            PERMIT NO.-


( )     1.   Test the emissions for the following pollutant(s) at
           intervals of      from the date of  this permit and submit
           two  copies of test data    to the  regional engineer of
           this agency within fifteen days of  such testing.  Chapter
           17-2.07(1).

           (  }   Particulates           (  )   Sulfur Oxides
           [  )   Fluorides              (  )   Nitrogen Oxides
           (  )   Plume Density          (  )   Hydrocarbons

( )     2.   According to revised Chapter 17-2,  (revised 1/18/72), this
           facility must be  modified, up  graded, or eliminated  in order
           to comply with applicable emission  limitations.   *To insure
           compliance pursuant to the time limitation specified in  Sec-
           tion 17-2.03(2),  Chapter 17-2,  Florida Administrative Code,
           the following steps toward compliance are made a  condition
           of this permit,

           (A)   Submit on or before	        	a final control plan
                for complying with Chapter"17-2, Florida Administrative
                Code.  This  plan is subject  to approval by the  regional
                office.

           (B)   Submit on or before	a copy of contract (s)
                for modification/control  equipment and/or fuels necessary
                to comply with Chapter 17-2.

           (C)   On or before	, construction and/or  modification
                must be initia"ted7  SuEmTt 60  days prior to  this date con-
                struction permit applications  and necessary  information.

           (D)   Construction and/or modifications toward compliance must
                be completed by	            Submit no later  than	
                	confirmation of this  condition.

           (E)   Submit on or before	   proof of Compliance. This
                must include any changes  irTthe construction permit appli-
                cation as submitted, and  a final engineering report and
                _   	to prove compliance.  (test results
                and/or calculations!

           *    Th« applicable emission limitation for this  facility is:
                	  	      Section	Chapter 17-2,
                Florida Administrative Code.

( )     3.   Submit for this facility, each calendar year, on  or  before
           March 1, an emission report for the preceding  calendar year con-
           taining the following information:

           (A)  Annual amount of materials and/or  fuels utilized.

           (B)  Annual emissions.

           (C)  Any changes in the information contained  in the permit
                application.


   FS19
   1-74
                               FIGURE 4-12
            TYPICAL FORM FOR COMPLIANCE SCHEDULE
                                    4-28

-------
                                       CHAPTER 5

                          STACK EMISSION MEASUREMENTS
  5.1 Introduction
  Measurement of pollutant emissions in the stack of an industrial process, often called "staek
  testing,    source sampling," or "emissions testing," provides for industry management the
  data required for several determinations:

      1.   Losses of product through the stack,

      2.   Efficiency of control equipment, and
      3.
Compliance/noncompliance with emission regulations.
 Methods  for manual  measurement  of emissions  from  point sources  are  becoming
 increasingly sophisticated, although such practices still remain an art rather than a science
 Requirements for emissions  testing are becoming  more  stringent, and quality assurance
 programs  are being initiated at all levels  of government  to  ensure control of testing
 procedures, transport of samples, and laboratory analysis.

 This chapter provides  background  information on  the concepts, techniques,  and quality
 control  requirements involved in an industrial emissions sampling program. Although no
 attempt is made m this guide to  provide a  training manual on emissions testing, these
 discussions should provide the knowledge that is needed to formulate an industrial testing
 program  secure the services of a professional test team when one is required, and obtain the
 data needed to determine a plant's compliance status.

 Each industry produces an identifiable  "fingerprint" in the air pollutant spectrum, emitting
 particulates, gases, or both in characteristic  combinations.  The  experienced  observer is
 aware, for example, that an asphalt plant emits particulates  of a certain type, and that a
 paint spray booth emits hydrocarbons in the form of solvent vapors. He also recognizes that
 certain  sources may produce major emissions  of specific  pollutants  and only minor
 emissions of others. The principal emissions from a phosphate chemical processing plant  for
 example, are particulates, sulfur dioxide, and fluorides; minor emissions from the same plant
will include ammonia and sulfuric  acid mist, which are of secondary concern.

In formulating an emissions testing  program and determining what emissions should be
measured, the industrial planner must consider these factors:

     1.   The  plant's major emissions sources,

     2.   Sources having an impact on sensitive receptors,
                                       5-1

-------
    3.   Local, state, and federal regulations, and

    4.   Community environmental concerns.

A  basic concept of manual emissions testing is that a representative  portion
faken from a pollutant-laden gas stream being exhausted from a stack or other duct to the
atmosphTe  L purpose is to determine the total mass emission rate or concentrate of a
poZant I a form  dictated by the applicable emission regulations. Rep Rations limiting
em" to  a specified value in parts per million (ppm) or grains per  standard cubic foot
 gT^uire that the concentration of the poUutant be determined.  ReguUtio^hmmn,
emissions to  a specified value in pounds per hour or total mass emiss1Ons requn-e that the
concentration and the total flue gas volumetric flow rate be determined.

In obtaining  the sample, a sampling tube or probe is placed in the stack and the sample is
 "t a*Td! Ihis sampfe is then s'ubjLed to analysis usually in a laboratory Anjys, «f *
sample gives  the concentration of the pollutant in the gas stream. Cdf-^™
emission^ rate requires measurement of the volumetnc flow rate, winch  can be ex
     pmr
          = C x
 where:

      pmr  = the total pollutant mass emission rate

      Cs   = concentration of the pollutant in the gas stream

      Qs   = volumetric flow rate of the entire gas stream out of the stack to the atmosphere.

  A sampling apparatus is designed for a specific sampling method to provide data that display
  the test results in the desired form.

  Throughout the  discussion  of emissions  testing, the  concept of representativeness .is
  Impha^ed repeatedly. For  an emissions test to  be  representative, the following cntena
  must be met:

       1.    Process and control equipment must be operated in such a manner as to produce
            representative emissions. Many regulatory agenc.es requ.re that the process be run
            at the "maximum normal production rate" during the emission tests.

       2.    Locations of  the  sampling  site and  sampling points  must  provide samples
            representative of the emissions.

       3.   The sample collected in  the  sampling  apparatus must be representative of the
            sampling points.
                                           5-2

-------
      4.    The sample recovered and analyzed must be representative of the sample collected
           in the sampling apparatus.

      5.    The reported results must be representative of the sample recovered and analyzed.

 A sample obtained in an emissions  test represents a very small fraction of the total gas
 stream exhausted to the  atmosphere; sample volumes may be as small as 0.002 cubic meter.
 Since only a very small portion of the total pollutant is collected during a test, a high degree
 of skill and knowledge is required  to obtain a representative sample. Complex sampling and
 analytical procedures also require competent and experienced personnel, since any error in
 the sample is multiplied many times when related to the total exhaust flow. Recognizing the
 need for skills and experience in an emissions test team, the industry planner is faced with
 an important decision: whether the test should be conducted by  in-house personnel or by a
 consultant testing group.  Following are some considerations affecting this decision.

 5.2 Utilizing Consultants and Testing Service Organizations

 Many companies engage consultants or service organizations to supplement their own staff
 m  such  specialized areas as law, advertising, and  accounting. Consultant groups are also
 available  to assist  in an  environmental program by performing emission tests, evaluating
 emission  control   systems,  determining  environmental  impacts,  and  related  services.
 Depending on their -experience and capabilities,  such firms can provide a variety of services
 on an intermittent or continuing basis (1). A service that should be strongly considered for
 contracting to  an outside firm is emission testing, especially for initial or intermittent test
 work.

     5.2.1 Contract or In-House Testing Considerations

In considering the use of  an outside testing service, a company must evaluate the following
factors:

     1.   Availability and experience of in-house staff,

     2.   Availability of test and analytical equipment and work area in-house,

     3.    Utilization of test data,

     4.    Estimated cost of in-house versus outside service,

     5.   Estimated total amount of testing (number of sources and repetitions),

    6.   Restrictions imposed by labor unions,

    7.   Safety and employee insurance,
                                        5-3

-------
     8.   Proprietary nature of processes to be tested, and

     9.   Plant security.

Any one of these factors (and possibly others) could be decisive in the choice of in-house
versus outside services; a combination of factors usually affects the final decision.

Availability and experience of  in-house  staff are two  primary  factors.  Personnel with
chemistry or engineering backgrounds could be trained in a 4-day introductory course, for a
fee  of  approximately  $500  (plus  salary of  personnel), together  with participation in
preliminary or  practice runs to gain experience. In-house staff could also gain experience by-
working closely  with  a service company  for a few initial test series. "Hands-on" testing
should be supported by a thorough understanding of the principles involved in obtaining a
representative  sample.  An  alternative to training staff  personnel is to hire personnel
experienced in  emission testing, however, such personnel are not easily found.

Availability of testing  and analytical equipment also takes high priority in the decision to
stay in-house  or go  outside  for  emission  testing. The  cost  of particulate  and gaseous
sampling trains, calibration devices, and analytical equipment is approximately $12,000. If
an in-house laboratory already is equipped  with basic analytical tools, such as a balance,
dessicator, and colorimeter, and with a suitable work area, the cost of sampling equipment
would  be  about $7,000. The availability of staff members with skills  and  experience in
sample analysis must also be considered.

Utilization of test data is  sometimes ignored  in  the  planning of emission tests.  For
approximate data-gathering functions  with  a flexible schedule, a relatively inexperienced
staff may  be adequate. Only  an experienced test team can provide precise engineering data
or perform compliance testing.  Testing by  a third-party team often satisfies the needs of
both the plant owner and the control agency for impartial, accurate emission test data.

The cost of emission testing  is always an important consideration. Unfortunately, a direct
cost comparison of in-house and outside testing is difficult. Many costs, such as those for
equipment, space,  and fringe benefits,  must  be added to direct salaries to arrive at estimated
testing costs. Also, costs per test vary widely with the number and type of tests and with
 accessibility of the test site. A 1973 article summarizing costs for emission testing services
 states the  following conclusions (2):

      1.   A firm doing more than $60,000/yr of testing per location with an environmental
           testing firm  should consider performing most  of  the tests in-house and using the
           test consultant as an auditor.
      2.   A firm doing $20,000 to $60,000/yr of testing work should investigate in-house
           testing, particularly if it has idle or under-used man-hours.

      3.   A  firm doing less  than $20,000/yr of  testing will find that the use  of  testing
           services is almost invariably more economical than in-house testing.
                                           5-4

-------
  A  key factor in assessing cost is the number  of tests to be performed over a given time
  period. For a long-term program that involves frequent testing, the use of in-house personnel
  is usually more cost-effective.

  Employee job functions or descriptions and applicable labor union rules also affect decisions
  regarding test work. Emission testing is not usually covered in descriptions of routine job or
  trade functions.  Although  job  iunctions  are  negotiable,  such  negotiations  can  be
  time-consuming  and, for a brief test series,  not worth the potential problems. Employee
  safety  and possible insurance problems  must  also be considered. Personnel performing
  emission testing  are required to use safety gear; they also must carry heavy equipment and
  often must work from  platforms above ground or at roof level. Exposure to toxic fumes,
  electrical wires,  and inclement weather may add to the  hazards of testing. Special safety
  precautions and great care are required to prevent serious injury (3).

  Testing  of  highly  proprietary processes may necessitate  the use of in-plant  personnel  to
  maintain confidentiality of the process or the emission data. Although this problem may be
  overcome by requiring secrecy agreements with outside testing personnel, some risk is still
  incurred. Plant security procedures that restrict the admittance of outside personnel could
  present a problem in gaining entrance for  contractor personnel into some areas of a plant,
  especially where classified governmental work is performed.

  Some less tangible  considerations are also involved in deciding whether to engage an outside
  test consultant:
1.
2.
3.
           A consultant organization might act as a third party in negotiations with a state,
           local, or federal air pollution control agency.

           Where the company has poor rapport with control agency personnel, an  outside
           test firm could be used to advantage.

           A  consultant firm  would  provide  assistance in related environmental matters
           concerning,  for  example,  potential regulatory actions,  evaluation  of control
           systems, occupational safety  and hygiene problems, and water pollution  aspects
           of emission controls.
     5.2.2 Selecting Consultants and Testing Services

 Selection of a consulting firm requires that  the industry specify exactly what is to be done
 and determine what specific applicable experience is offered by various consulting firms.
 The effort expended in selection of a consultant varies with the amount and  nature of the
 work to be performed. For short-term, relatively simple tasks, selection may be based upon
 phone  contact  and a review of  capabilities.  For  more  extensive and complex tasks, a
 carefully prepared bid solicitation is desirable.

 Recommendations  of business associates, trade and technical associations, and past clients
of a consulting firm can influence the selection. A firm's  promotional literature usually
                                          5-5

-------
describes  facilities,  capabilities,  and  experience.  Written  responses  from  prospective
consultants should include:

     1.    A statement of the objective of the study or task,

     2.    The procedures to be followed,

     3.    A schedule for completing these procedures,

     4.    An estimate of effort and costs, and

     5.    Specific capabilities or staff experience.

The hiring firm can require that all test methods, equipment, and test reports be acceptable
to and approved by the responsible air pollution  control agency. Such requirements would
cover equipment calibration, use of the test methods  required by the agency, test program
preparation, quality control, chain of custody of samples, calculation procedures, and report
format and content. Ideally, a prospective contractor will provide for review an earlier test
report prepared by the firm. Control agency personnel usually  can  assist in  procuring an
emission testing service by  listing a number of capable companies in the local area. It is
 advisable to  visit the prospective test company to inspect the equipment calibration area and
laboratory.

 Suppliers of pollution control and related equipment sometimes offer  consulting and testing
 services.  Although  these companies may  offer extensive experience,  they  may not be
 completely  objective in recommending a method  of control  or in evaluating  an existing
 device. In addition, if confidentiality is involved, it may not be prudent to divulge process
 information to a company that also deals with competitors.


      5.2.3  Obtaining Emission Testing Services

 Written requests for emission testing services should be submitted to candidate companies.
 These written requests should specify:

      1.   What is to be tested, i.e., boiler, process, or other;

      2.   Plant location;

      3.   Purpose of test;

      4.   Compounds to be measured (if known);

      5   Details  of the test  site,  such as height of test  ports, stack  diameter,  platform
           dimensions, approximate gas temperature, and other details of the work area; and

      6.   Desired test and report dates.
                                            5-6

-------
  On the  basis  of  specifications, the  testing firms  will submit proposals and specific
  qualifications.

  Purchase of  emission testing  services  can be accomplished on a fixed-cost basis for a
  well-defined task, or on  a man-hour basis  for  a task whose  scope is not yet defined.
  Estimated total costs or average hourly rates will allow comparison  of bids from various
  respondents. Cost estimates for a given task do not usually vary widely among competent
  testing consultants,  since the  same amount of work is required by  persons with  similar
  salaries.

  To ensure that estimated costs are not  exceeded, the plant officials  must assume certain
  responsibilities:

      1.   Maintenance of constant process operation for the duration of each test.

      2.   Provision of unobstructed sampling ports for access to the gas ducts. A minimum
           3-inch opening is required at the locations requested by the test engineer.

      3.   Provision of 110-volt, 25-ampere electrical supply at the sampling site.

      4.   Provision for access to the sampling site and safe working conditions.

      5.   Prompt clearance of personnel, vehicles, and equipment through plant security.

 5.3 Planning and Conducting the Emission Test

      5.3.1  Sequence of Events in an Emissions Test

 Three  groups  are  involved  in  the planning  and  execution  of  a  compliance  test:
 representatives of the plant whose emissions are being tested, the testing team (consultant or
 in-house),  and  the  responsible  control  agency.  Each  of  these groups has  specific
 responsibilities  in  performance of  the  test. The  plant representative is  responsible for
 monitoring and  recording  facility operations and  for  collecting process samples, such as
 samples of  feed  materials  used  during  the test.  The test  team sets up  the  sampling
 equipment,  performs  preliminary measurements,  conducts the sampling runs, recovers
 collected samples,  and disassembles  the equipment.  The test group is  also responsible for
 analysis of samples  and reporting of results. The control agency representative is responsible
 for guidance before and during the test, for evaluation of sampling procedures, and for
 taking readings of visible emissions during the test. The usual sequence of events is described
 briefly in the remainder of this section.

 Before  the  compliance test,  representatives of each group conduct a  pretest meeting to
 develop  testing procedures,  establish conditions  of facility operation, determine  data
requirements, and  formulate a  test  schedule. All responsibilities  for  specific  tasks are
determined in detail at this meeting.  A test program detailing the elements discussed at the
meeting should be prepared by the test group.
                                          5-7

-------
A compliance test consists of three sampling runs, preceded by preliminary measurements to
check the test equipment.  The normal time requirements for  each phase of the test are
shown in Table 5-1. A usual sequence of events would be completion of tasks 1, 2, 3, and
4A or 4B for the first run; task 2 (optional), 3, and 4A or 4B for the second run; and task 2
(optional),  3, 4A or 4B, and 5 for the third run. If the test team is well-equipped, it will not
be necessary to recover the collected samples until all runs are completed.
                                     TABLE 5-1
                      TIME REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLIANCE
                                 TEST EXECUTION
Task
No.
1
2
3
4A
4B
5
Task
Set up equipment
Make preliminary measurements
Conduct one sample run
Recover sample and set up for next run
Set up for next run without sample recovery
Disassemble and pack equipment
Time required
2-4 hr
Ihr
1-4 hr
1-3 hr
1-2 hr
1-2 hr
 Under ideal conditions, it is possible to set up the equipment and make all three runs in one
 day. A more usual sequence, however, is to set up the equipment on the morning of the first
 day and perform one sample run in the afternoon. The test team then can review the data
 from  the first run that  night to determine whether the tests are yielding valid data. The
 second run is then made on  the morning  of  the second day, and the  last run in the
 afternoon.

 When all testing is completed, the sampling equipment is disassembled  and removed from
 the  site. The equipment is  carefully repacked to  ensure safe transport. Transport is
 especially critical if the collected samples are not recovered on site. A professional testing
 firm will usually provide preliminary test results in about 1 week and a final report in 2 to 3
 weeks.

 The emission test procedures are described in detail in the following sections.

      5.3.2  Developing the Test Program

 At the outset, all of the groups involved in emission testing should understand the potential
 legal implications of the compliance test. Because of the possibility that test results or the
 control agency's decision might  be challenged, full understanding among the concerned
 parties should be achieved and documented before the test is performed.
                                          5-8

-------
 Upon notice from the plant representative that a compliance test is intended, the control
 agency  will prepare  written  guidelines that clearly  delineate  the  acceptable sampling
 procedures. These guidelines will inform the test team and the plant representative of all
 baseline or minimum conditions to be met in the test and  will indicate procedures for
 calculation and reporting of test data. The requirements may be part of an overall regional
 compliance schedule or they  may  be  stipulated in  a Federal  Standard for New Source
 Performance (NSPS).


 On the basis of  specified requirements, the plant representative and  test consultant  will
 develop a proposed compliance test program, which will be discussed with an agency official
 in one or more pretest meetings. One of the most significant items to be determined is what
 constitutes representative facility operation.

 Determining Representative Facility Operation - Representative facility operation must be
 specified in detail before the test, for the protection  of both the facility and the control
 agency.  Facility operations are defined to include the key process operating parameters and
 the operation of  air pollution control equipment. An emissions test can be set up both to
 determine the plant's compliance status and to verify the efficiency of control equipment in
 fulfillment of the vendor's guarantee. If  the latter is part of the test program, samples
 sometimes must be taken both before and after the control equipment.  In any case, the test
 team must be apprised of all criteria to which the test data will be applied.

 Where the facility is new or is a modified older facility, the plant operators must provide for
 the control agency the anticipated facility operating conditions in order to obtain a permit
 to construct  and/or  operate. The specified facility operations  will then be monitored and
 recorded during the compliance  test and later will be routinely monitored as part of the
 continuing compliance program.

 Most control agencies have developed standard facility checklists for each of the major
 industrial  processes and  pollution control systems. Figure 5-1 is a standard  cover sheet
 identifying the persons who will represent the plant, the test team, and the control agency.
 It also identifies the persons in each group who  have senior responsibility and authority in
 matters  pertaining to  the compliance test. Most  communications regarding the test will be
 among  the  representatives; higher  authority  is  usually  sought only in the  event of
 disagreement regarding validity of the test or in other special circumstances.

 Figure 5-2 is a  general "Test Program Agreement on Continuing Compliance Conditions"
 form, setting forth the operating conditions that must be met in the future for the plant to
 maintain compliance.  This  information provides the  basis  on  which  to  establish the
 representative facility  operations  for the  test,  as shown in Figure 5-3, "Test  Program
 Agreement  on Facility Operation".  A specialized checklist series for coal-fired  boilers is
 presented in Appendix B.

In  determining  representative  facility   operation, the plant  representative  has several
important  responsibilities. He should know all aspects  of  plant operation well enough to
                                          5-9

-------
                 TEST PROGRAM MEETING REPRESENTATIVES
Plant Name.
Plant Address.
Source to be Tested,
Plant Representative.

Plant Manager	
Test Team Company Name.

Team Representative	

Responsible Person.	
Members of
Test Team .
 Agency(s).
 Agency Representative.

 Responsible Person	
 Agency
 Observers.
                                     Title
                                                    Date
              .Phone.

              .Phone.
              .Phone,

               Phone.
               .Phone.

               .Phone.
Affiliation
and Tasks
                                   FIGURE 5-1
                  TEST PROGRAM MEETING REPRESENTATIVES
                                      5-10

-------
   TEST PROGRAM AGREEMENT ON CONTINUING COMPLIANCE CONDITIONS

 Process

    1)   Process parameters that must be recorded and submitted to agency or kept on file
        for later inspection
    2)   Percentage by which each process parameter can exceed the tested rate and on
        what time-weighted average
    3)   Future operating procedures
 Control Equipment

    4)   Control equipment parameters that must be recorded and submitted to the agency
        or kept on file for later inspections
    5)   Normal operating procedures

    6}   Normal maintenance schedule

    7)   Frequency of scheduled inspections by agency



 Reviewed and approved by;

 Agency.	Facility	Tester.
                                    FIGURE 5-2
     TEST PROGRAM AGREEMENT ON CONTINUING COMPLIANCE CONDITIONS
anticipate any potential  problems.  He should make sure that all values specified for
operations that could cause upset conditions  are outside  the acceptable values. If these
operations then should cause upset conditions during the test, the test data cannot be used
against the plant in any future litigation. Documentation of upset conditions during testing
is important, since a control agency's compliance test report can be used as evidence by any
public or private group or individual at a later date.
                                       5-11

-------
             TEST PROGRAM AGREEMENT ON FACILITY OPERATION


  Process

    1)   Method of process weight or rate determination

    2)   Process parameters to be monitored and recorded, and their acceptable limits to
        document process operation

    3)   Raw material feed and/or fuel acceptable analyzed values

    4}   Normal operating cycle or procedures

    5}   Portions of the operating cycle or procedure that will be represented by each run


  Control Equipment

    6)   Control equipment and effluent parameters to be monitored and recorded, and
        their acceptable limits to document control equipment operations

    7)   Normal operating cycle (cleaning, dust removal, etc.)

    8}   Normal maintenance schedule

    9)   Manner in which the control equipment will be operated during test
                                      FIGURE 5-3
              TEST PROGRAM AGREEMENT ON FACILITY OPERATION
Although some control agencies have the authority to establish unilaterally the operating
conditions  for a  compliance  test, the agency  representative usually seeks input and
agreement  from  the plant  representative. If  the  agency  does not,  and the  plant
representative believes that the stipulated operating conditions are unjust, then the company
should notify  the agency of its objection by registered letter.  Although the test may be
conducted under the disputed conditions notwithstanding the objection, the plant would
then have the  right to contest the results in court if the agency has been notified  prior to
testing.
                                        5-12

-------
  Another point of significance to the industry being tested is that  the agency should not
  require  the monitoring and recording of any parameter of process operation unless that
  parameter has a direct bearing on process rate or on atmospheric emissions. If the agency
  representative proposes the monitoring of parameters that seem not directly related to
  process  rate or emissions, it is appropriate to ask how the resulting data will be used and
  what values would be considered unacceptable.

  Future  Facility  Operations -  Future operations of the  plant must be factored into the
  determination of representative conditions. If the plant has been operating for some time
  and significant changes are anticipated, the compliance test should be  geared to future
  operations. For example, a plant that has been firing high-sulfur coal may plan to switch to
  using low-sulfur coal as part of a compliance program. The agency will allow firing of the
  low-sulfur coal during the  compliance test if assurance is provided  that  this coal will be
  representative of the plant's future operations. Similarly, use of a new type of solvent could
  be introduced into plant operations to reduce  hydrocarbon  emissions.  Use of the new
 solvent in the compliance test would be allowed if the plant then continued its use in regular
 operations. A statement of future operations is included in the "Test Program Agreement on
  Continuity Compliance" form  (Figure 5-2). Failure  of the plant officials  to consider such
 potential changes m  operation could lead to significant expenditures of time, money, and
 effort in the event that retesting is required because of such a change
                                                              D "
 At the conclusion of the final test program meeting, all of the parties involved should clearly
 understand  how the test will be  conducted, the sampling procedures to be used the
 operating parameters to be monitored and recorded, the raw materials to be fed to the
 process, and any conditions that  would invalidate  the test. With the testing program agreed
 upon and defined in detail, the compliance test should proceed smoothly and should yield
 valid results.

 Measurement  Errors  -  In further  preparation for  the  compliance  test,  the  plant
 representative  should  understand the significance of measurement  errors that might occur
 Although  such  errors can be minimized by selection of an experienced testing firm  they
 rarely can be eliminated entirely. Determining pollutant emission rates by stack sampling
 involves  measurement of a number of parameters. Errors of measurement associated  with
 each  parameter combine to produce  an error in the calculated emission  rate. Measurement
 errors are of three types: bias, blunders, and random errors.

 Bias errors, usually resulting from poor technique,  cause the measured value to differ from
 the true  value in one direction.  This operator error often can be minimized by proper
 calibration of instruments and  by adequate training in instrument operation. Most  bias
 errors can  be eliminated if the testing supervisor provides documentation of the calibration
 of equipment at the pretest meeting. A  one-point field check of calibration is sometimes
warranted.

 Most  blunder  errors occur during collection, recovery, or transportation of the sample or
dunng analysis.  Unfortunately,  such errors are difficult to observe, and the total effect
                                         5-13

-------
cannot be calculated. Elimination of blunders should be a main concern of the testing
supervisor. The plant representative also should be alert to possible blunders.

Random errors, which result from a variety of factors, cause a measured value to be,either
higher or  lower  than  the true value. Such errors  are caused by inabihty of sampling
personnel to read scales precisely, poor performance of equipment motors, and lack of
sensitivity in measurement devices. The usual assumption is that random errors are normally
dlTributld about a  mean or true value and  can be represented  statically m terms o
probabilities. Determining the maximum expected error, however,  does not require a strict
statistical  approach.  Total maximum  error can be estimated by  summing the  maximum
expected errors for each factor.

 The impacts of measurement errors on test  remits can vary greatly. With some parameters
 such /static pressure  of the stack gas, the  error may be ±100 percent and s*no^fa*
the result, appreciably. Conversely,  a blunder error that might seem insignificant, such as
 bumping theTampling  apparatus against the inner stack wall, eould produce emission values
 that are 10 times higher than the true emissions.

 In an  effort to minimize errors, the sampling  procedures  prepared by control agencies
 include quality control, Most of these quality controls, however, are designed to ehmuiate
 only the  errors  that produce a value lower than the true one, giving a low bias. It is the
 responsibility  of the testing  team  to eliminate errors  or procedures that produce  results
 higher than the true value, giving a high bias.

      5.3.3 Sample Site Requirements

  The sampling site designated for  an emissions  test can affect the quality  of  the  sample
  exited Ite selection should be simple at new installations,  since most states  require
  installation of  an acceptable sampling site  as  a condition  for  obtaining  a construction
  permit.  Acceptability is generally determined  with reference to  the distance  from the
  nearest upstream and downstream disturbance to gas  flow by an obstruction or change in
  direction. More sampling points are required  for each test the closer it is to a disturbance, as
  shown in Figure 5-4.
  In addition to flow considerations, accessibility and safety are important. Clearance for the
  probe and  sampling  apparatus,  availability of  electricity,  exposure of  personnel and
  eouLent to weather or excessive heat, presence of toxic or explosive gases,  and  other
  safety factors must be considered. The following guidelines constitute minimum  require-
  ments for safe and accessible stack sampling facilities:

   Sampling Ports -

        1   Port location - Ports should be located at least eight stack diameters downstream
   of any bends, inlets, constrictions, abatement equipment or f^/^.^*^*^
   least two stack diameters upstream of the stack exit or other flow disturbances. Where these
                                             5-14

-------
LLJ
cr
Q.
D
c/i
oc
LU LJJ
Q
cc
LU
CD
                                                                         LLJ
                                                                         tr
                                                                         co
O
Q
  «
I- LiJ
LU O

II
Q c/)
Q

LL
O

cc
LLJ
CO
                  SINlOd 3SU3AVU1 dO H3SWHN
                                 FIGURE 5-4
                   MINIMUM NUMBER OF SAMPLE POINTS
                                     5-15

-------
criteria are not met, a stack extension may be required unless the plant representative can
demonstrate that this remedy is not feasible. In such  a case, an alternative port location
must be approved by the control agency.

     2.  Port type - A sampling port should be a standard industrial flanged pipe of 3-inch
inside diameter (ID) with a 6-inch bolt circle diameter.  An easily removable blind flange
should be provided to  close the port when  not in use. Ports larger than 3-inches ID are
permissible and even desirable on large-diameter, double-walled stacks,  which necessitate
use of longer probes. These ports also should be equipped with a standard industrial flange
of the same ID  as the port. Gate valves should be installed only when unusual stack condi-
tions or the presence of hazardous materials require such devices  to ensure safety.

     3.   Port installation - Ports should be installed flush with the interior stack wall. Ports
should extend outward from the exterior stack wall no  less than 2 inches nor more than
8 inches,  unless additional length  is required for  gate valve  installation.  Ports should be
installed no less than 2 feet nor more than 6 feet above the floor of the platform. Ports
should be installed with  respect to the limitations of  the clearance zone, described later.

     4.   Number of ports required - If the sum of the stack ID plus one port length (stack
inside wall to end of port extension) is less than 10 feet, two ports should be installed on
diameters  90 degrees apart. Proposed U.S. EPA guidelines for continuous  monitoring of
certain  categories of sources may necessitate the installation of four ports on diameters 90
degrees  apart for stacks in this size range. If the sum of the stack ID  plus one port length
(stack inside wall to end of port extension)  is equal to or greater than 10 feet, four ports
should be installed  on diameters 90 degrees apart.

     5-  Port loading - The port installations should be capable of supporting the following
loads:

           a.   Vertical shear of 200 pounds,

           b.   Horizontal shear of 50 pounds, and

           c.   Radial tension of 50 pounds (along stack diameter).

Work Platform -

      1.  Size and extent  of platform - If two ports are  required at 90 degrees, the work
 platform  should  serve that quarter of  the stack  circumference between  the  ports and
 extend at least 3  feet  bejond each port. Minimum platform width is 3 feet. If four ports
 are  required  at 90  degrees, the work platform should serve the entire  circumference of
 the  stack. Minimum platform width is 4  feet unless the sum of the stack  ID plus  one port
 length  (stack inside wall  to end of  port extension) is less than 10 feet, in  which case the
 minimum platform width is 3 feet.
                                         5-16

-------
     2.  Platform access — Safe and easy access to the work platform should be provided via
caged ladder, stairway, or other suitable means.

     3.  Guardrails, latterwells, and stairwells — A safe  guardrail should be  provided on
the platform. Angular rather than round rail members should be used if possible. No ladder-
well, stairwell, or other such opening should be located within 3 feet of any port. Ladder-
wells should be covered at the platform and any stairwell leading directly to  the platform
should be equipped with a safety bar (or the equivalent) at the opening.

     4.  Platform loading — The work  platform should  be able  to support at least three
men and 200 pounds  of  test equipment (at least 800 pounds total).  If the stack exits
through a building roof, the roof may suffice as the work platform, provided the minimum
test  site requirements are still met. In such cases, all other requirements are the same as for
a remote stack.

Clearance Zone  — A three-dimensional, obstruction-free clearance zone should be provided
around  each port. The zone should extend 1 foot above the port, 2 feet below the port, and
2 feet to either  side of the port. The zone should extend outward from the exterior wall of
the stack to a distance  of at least one stack ID plus one port length (inside wall to end of
port extension) plus 3 feet. The clearance zone is illustrated in Figure 5-5.

Power Supply - Power sources shall be as follows:

     1.  Platform — One 115-volt, 15-amp, single-phase, 60-Hz AC circuit with a grounded,
two-receptacle  weatherproof outlet.  Receptacles should  accept standard,  three-prong,
grounded, household-type plugs, or  else suitable adapters shall be provided.

     2.  Stack base — One 115-volt, 30-amp, single-phase, 60-Hz AC circuit with a grounded,
two-receptacle  weatherproof outlet.  Receptacles should  accept standard,  three-prong,
grounded, household-type plugs, or  suitable adapters shall be provided.

Vehicle Access and Parking — Except for situations in which sampling operations  must be
conducted from a rooftop or similar structure, stack sampling is sometimes coordinated and
controlled from a  cargo van or trailer, which is parked near the base of the stack for the
duration of the  sampling period. Vehicle access and parking space must be provided, since
various  umbilical, communications, and equipment transport lines will be strung from the
van or trailer to the stack platform and will remain in position during the operations.

Compliance With  Safety Standards — Stack sampling facilities must meet  all applicable
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements and must conform to
any other relevant safety guidelines.

Optional  Permanent  Monorail System —  Some  plants may wish to install  a permanent
monorail system to facilitate self-monitoring. Persons considering such installations should
be aware that commercially available test equipment varies in size and configuration and will
not necessarily operate on a permanent monorail system as shown in Figure 5-6.
                                         5-17

-------
 SAMPLING PORTS
 A. 2 PORTS, 90° APART WYOIAM-
    ETER LESS THAN 10' + PORT
    LENGTH
    4 PORTS, 90° APART W/DIAM-
    ETER OVER 10' +• PORT LENGTH
    AT LEAST TWO STACK DIAMETERS
    BELOW STACK EXIT
    AT LEAST EIGHT STACK DIAMETERS
    ABOVE LAST OBSTRUCTION
        WORK AREA CLEARANCE
     WORK PLATFORM
                                                      PORT DIMENSION REQUIREMENTS
                                               (OUTSIDE}

                                                    2"MIN.
                                                    8" MAX. UNLESS GATE VALVE
                                                    INSTALLED

                                                    3" I.D. (MINI INDUSTRIAL FLANGE
                                                    CAPPED WHEN NOT IN USE
                                                  INSTALL GATE VALVE IF STACK
                                                  CONTAINS DANGEROUS GASES
                                                  OR GASES OVER 200°F UNDER
                                                  POSITIVE PRESSURE

                                                      STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS

                                                     50 IBS, SIDE LOAD
                                                     50 LBS.RADIALTENSION LOAD
                                                     200 LBS. VERTICAL SHEAR LOAD
                                                     750 FT. LBS. MOMENT
                                                                 AT LEAST ONE STACK DIAMETER
                                                                 PLUS 3' FROM STACK CIRCUMFERENCE
     A.
     C.
AT LEAST 3- WIDE (4' WIDE FOR
STACKS WITH 10' OR GREATER
I.D.) AND CAPABLE OF SUPPORT
ING 3 PEOPLE AND 200 LBS. OF
TEST EQUIPMENT

SAFE GUARDRAIL ON PLAT-
FORM WITH ACCESS BY SAFE
LADDER OR OTHER SUITABLE
MEANS. IF LADDER IS USED,
LADDER WELL MUST BE
LOCATED AT LEAST 3' FROM
PORTS

NO OBSTRUCTIONS TO BE
WITHIN 3' HORIZONTAL
RADIUS ON PLATFORM
BENEATH PORTS
                                                              POWER SOURCE

                                                                  115V, 15A, SINGLE PHASE, 60 HZ AC
                                                                  LOCATED ON PLATFORM
                                         FIGURE 5-5
                             TYPICAL SAMPLING PROVISION
Miscellaneous Requirements —  In addition to the specific  requirements described  in  this
section,  other  requirements may be  specified  for sources with very large stacks or
nonstandard sampling locations. Examples of such requirements are:

     1.   Power hoists for sampling equipment when the platform is in excess of 200  feet
          above ground level.

     2.   Additional attachment points  above and to each side of the ports for supporting
          very long monorails.

     3.   Provisions for sampling vertically in horizontal ducts.
                                             5-18

-------
                                     FIGURE 5-6
                                MONORAIL SYSTEM


Excess  Air  — In  addition to the  above requirements, certain processes  (such  as sulfur
recovery units) may require  provisions for determining the composition and flow rates of
feedstock streams. This information, taken at the time of sampling, is needed to determine
the amount  of excess air in the stack effluent.

Stack Extensions — Many times the maximum straight run of stack is not sufficient to meet
the agency  requirements or the stack is lined  and ports cannot be cut into the stack. A
simple solution applicable to some  smaller-diameter stacks is the use of a stack extension as
shown in Figure 5-7. Stack extensions need not be permanent and can be made out of sheet
metal or plywood for testing purposes only.

     5.3.4 Conducting the Emissions Tests

At the time of the compliance test, the plant representative has two major responsibilities:
(1) to ensure that process operations are in accordance with the representative conditions
established in the test program, and (2) to ensure that the emissions sampling is performed
as planned.  Although the latter is the direct responsibility of the test team supervisor, the
plant representative should  observe  these  sampling  operations closely enough to be
confident that the specified procedures are followed. Again, the use of checklists is advised;
these can be used by an in-house test team for quality control.
                                         5-19

-------
                                      FIGURE 5-7
                                 STACK EXTENSION
Starting the Test  - The  plant representative should be present when the test team starts
preparations. They will unpack the test equipment, check for possible damage, set up the
sample recovery lab, and assemble the sampling train. If an agency observer is present, he
will  give  close attention to these initial operations. His monitoring of test procedures
protects the interests of both the agency and the operating facility. If the test team requires
considerable  direction  and  assistance  from  their  supervisor, this  is  an indication  of
inexperience  and a signal to the plant representative to observe test operations as well as
process operations. In such a case, he  may request the  assistance of another plant official
during the test. A standard test team  and equipment for  particulate  sampling is shown in
Figure 5-8. A checklist  for observation of calibration, sample apparatus assembly, and final
checks is shown in Appendix B. If testing is performed improperly, the agency observer may
require  performance of  another  sample  run.  Any additional sampling necessitated by
improper sampling techniques should be performed at the expense of the testing firm as part
of the contract agreement. Any responsible testing firm will be willing to guarantee that all
sampling procedures will be acceptable to the control agency.

In the course  of  the test, all parties  are  expected to perform their duties  quietly and
thoroughly, with as little  conversation  as possible. The plant representative should instruct
all process operators to deal solely through him during the test and to discourage queries or
comments from any of the nonplant personnel. In particular, the operators should make no
                                          5-20

-------
                                       FIGURE 5-8
                             TEST TEAM AND EQUIPMENT

 process change, even at the request of the agency  observer or test team supervisor, without
 approval  of the plant representative. The same courtesy should be  extended to the test
 team, who should not be questioned or instructed by any person except their supervisor.

 Monitoring Facility Operations - With some assurance that the test team is functioning as
 planned, the plant representative will give his major attention to facility operations during
 the test. Plant personnel are responsible for these functions: (1) monitoring and  recording
 the process parameters as specified in the test program, (2) collecting  process raw materials
 for subsequent analysis, and (3) monitoring the operation of control equipment. Functions
 of the test  team are clearly defined and should not interfere with  process operation  The
 cluef responsibilities of the agency representative are to observe and to  record data.

 It is not possible  to formulate for all  industrial operations a general checklist of process
parameters.  These are highly  particular to the plant process and are dictated also by the
                                         5-21

-------
applicable  control  regulations.  One  can,  however,  consider  examples  of  process data
checklists for  specific industries. The process parameters that are monitored and recorded
should demonstrate whether the facility is  operating in a manner that is considered normal
for future operations.

If an equipment malfunction or upset should occur, the agency observer and test team
leader should  be notified immediately. The resulting sample run should be invalidated and
no analysis performed.  A charge of noncompliance  could result from use of data taken
during upset conditions.  For this reason, the plant representative should in no circumstances
allow the subsequent analysis of samples obtained during malfunction or upset. The cost of
performing an additional sample run while  the test  team and sampling gear are on site is
small compared with the cost of retesting at a later date.

Monitoring Control  Equipment - Plant  personnel  are responsible for monitoring and
recording control equipment parameters during the compliance test. Because of the broad
range of control devices  and  techniques  that are applied to industrial operations,  the
discussion  and  examples given  here  are  directed  toward  particulate sampling  only.
Particulate control equipment can be categorized in several groups, based on similarities ,n
the several types of equipment  within each group.  Typical checklists for basic categories of
particulate control equipment are given in Appendix C, covering electrostatic precipitators
fabric  filters,  centrifugal  collectors (dry  mechanical  collectors), and scrubbers (wet
 mechanical collectors), respectively. These checklists include most of the control equipment
 parameters that should be monitored and recorded during a compliance test.

 Completing  the Compliance Test - At the conclusion  of  each test run, the sample is
 recovered for laboratory analysis. Several types of errors can occur during sample recovery.
 The plant representative may refer to a sample recovery checklist (Appendix B) as a guide to
 evaluating the performance of the test team in these critical operations.

 Many errors  can be detected by simple  observation.  Spillage during sample removal, use of
 solvents in  plastic containers, and handling of samples  in  an  improper environment are
 examples of unacceptable procedures. A filter from  a particulate sampling device should be
 dry. Where a control device is used and is operating  properly, the filter should contain no
 distinct particles that  are visible to the  eye. The color of the sample catch should be
 approximately the same in each test run.

  During recovery of samples from a compliance test, a chain of custody should be established
  and recorded. An example chain of custody sheet is shown in Appendix B. Such a sheet
  documents the events of sample recovery and can be used if litigation arises.

  Transport of the samples from test site to the laboratory is also documented. A checklist for
  the purpose is shown in Appendix B. Except when the plant undergoing the compliance test
  is equipped with a suitable analytical laboratory, the plant representative usually docs not
  observe the analytical procedures. An analysis checklist, which  appears ,n Appendix B,
  shows the  types of  quality controls that are  applied to  analytical procedures  by a
  professional testing team.
                                           5-22

-------
  Before the test team leaves the site, the plant  representative should  obtain copies of all
  emission data sheets that have been filled out during the test runs. Similarly, he should if
  possible obtain a copy of data records and notes made by the agency observer: if copies are
  not available, he should review the observer's notes and data, and initial them. In reviewing
  these materials, the plant representative will check for any unusual data values or comments
  and for possible  inclusion of confidential data. The agency observer is responsible for
  maintaining the confidentiality of the emissions values and process operating data, subject
  to the  possibility of fines or other punitive  measures in the event that confidentiality is
  violated.  In summary, the plant representative  should obtain copies  of all data, logs,' or
  comment  sheets  that will  leave the premises. Alternatively,  he should be  given  'the
  opportunity to examine all such records, to designate any portions considered confidential,
  and to initial the records.

  Compliance Test Report  - The final step in compliance testing is preparation of the test
  report.  This is the official record of the test, which can become a legal business record
  admissible in  court. Many control agencies provide a standard report  format such as that
  shown in Figure 5-9.

  After the testing firm completes the test report, copies are forwarded to the client who
 requested the tests. The client is usually  an industry,  although enforcement agencies also
 engage  consultants to perform  emission tests.  The  industry funding  the tests will have
 representatives review the report prior  to submission to the control agency. The plant
 representative should review these reports closely  and perform data validation  checks as
 appropriate. These would  include the  same  elements that are involved in a  preliminary
 emission estimate:  calculation of mass balances, process temperatures and pressures, fan
 curves,  design parameters,  and stoichiometry. Review of these elements will indicate any
 significant discrepancy in the test report data.

 5.4 Specified Methods for Measurement of Pollutants

 This section deals  with the methods specified for sampling of particulates, sulfur dioxide
 nitrogen oxides, fluorides,  carbon monoxide,  and hydrocarbons. It also briefly describes
 determination  of velocity and volumetric flow rate, moisture content, and molecular weight
 of a gas stream. In all sampling procedures, the main  concern  is to obtain a representative
 sample;  the U.S. EPA has published reference sampling methods for all  of these pollutants
 except  hydrocarbons  so that  uniform procedures  can be applied in testing to obtain a
 representative sample.

 Each sampling  method requires  the use  of complex  sampling equipment which must be
 calibrated and  operated in  accordance with specified  reference methods. Additionally the
 process  or source that  is being tested must be operated in a specified  manner, usually at
rated capacity, under  normal procedures.  Calibration/operation of equipment and process
operation are not considered  in  the brief descriptions that follow; they are nonetheless
important in the emissions test.
                                         5-23

-------
                 SOURCE TESTING  REPORT FORMAT


Cover
   1.   Plant name and location
   2.   Source sampled
   3.   Testing company or agency, name and address.

Certification
   1.   Certification by team leader
   2.   Certification by reviewer (e.g., P.E.).

Introduction
   1.   Test purpose
   2.   Test location, type of process
   3.   Test dates
   4.   Pollutants tested
   5.   Observers' names (industry and agency)
   6.   Any other important background information.

Summary of Results
   1.   Emission results
   2.   Process data, as related to determination of compliance
   3.   Allowable emissions
   4.   Description of collected samples
   5.   Visible emissions summary
   6.   Discussion of errors, both real and apparent.

 Source Operation
   1.    Description of process and control devices
   2.    Process and control equipment flow diagram
   3.    Process data and  results, with example calculations
   4.    Representativeness of raw materials and products
   5.    Any specially required operation demonstrated.

 Sampling and Analysis Procedures
    1.   Sampling port location and dimensioned cross section
   2.   Sampling point description, including labeling system
   3.   Sampling train description                         _         .
   4.   Brief description of sampling procedures, with discussion of deviations from
        standard methods                                  .     ,_..*.    ffnm
    5.   Brief  description of analytical procedures, with discussion of deviations from
        standard methods.

 Appendix
    1.   Complete results with example calculations
    2.    Raw field data (original, not computer printouts)
    3.    Laboratory report, with chain of custody
    4.    Raw  production data, signed by plant official
    5.   Test log
    6.    Calibration procedures and results
    7.    Project participants and titles
    8.    Related correspondence
    9.    Standard  procedures.

                                 FIGURE 5-9
                   SOURCE  TESTING  REPORT FORMAT
                                      5-24

-------
     5.4.1 Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate

The  U.S. EPA has published Method 2 as a reference method for determining stack gas
velocity and volumetric flow rate. At  several designated sampling points, which represent
equal portions of the stack volume (areas in the stack), the velocity and temperature are
measured with instrumentation shown in Figure 5-10.

Measurements to determine volumetric flow rate usually require approximately 30 minutes.
Sampling rates are dependent on stack  gas velocity. A preliminary velocity check is usually
made prior to testing to aid in selection of the proper equipment and in determining the
approximate sampling rate for the test.

The volumetric flow rate determined by this  method is usually within  ± 10 percent of the
true  volumetric flow rate. Collaborative tests have shown that skilled test teams using
Method 2 can achieve accuracies within ± 4 percent.
1.90-2.54 CM
(0.75-1.0 IN.)
                        TEMPERATURE SENSOR
                     TYPE-SPITOTTUBE
                                                                   LEAK-FREE
                                                                   CONNECTIONS
                                   FIGURE 5-10
                        VELOCITY MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
                                       5-25

-------
Total cost of the  equipment for measuring volumetric flow rate is approximately $4,500;
this  cost  represents the  equipment  specified in EPA Methods  2, 3  (molecular weight
determination), and 4 (moisture determination).

An alternative method for determining volumetric flow rate is to use data describing the
exhaust fan. A plot of fan performance (fan curve) provided by the manufacturer can be
used to determine approximate volumetric flow rate. This procedure should be used only as
a check to validate the data obtained by use of Method 2. If a combustion source is being
tested, a stoichiometric calculation can be performed to determine the stack gas flow rate.

A technician  could  perform this procedure  by  reading the method description and the
available manuals. It is advisable, however, that  the technician attend a training course if
possible.

     5.4.2 Molecular Weight and CO2 or O2

The EPA  Method 3 is used to determine carbon dioxide or oxygen content and molecular
weight of the stack gas stream. Depending on the intended use of the data, these values also
can be obtained with an integrated or grab sample. Both methods are discussed here.

Grab sampling is used primarily to determine the molecular weight of the gas stream. A
sampling probe is placed at the center of the stack or no closer to the wall than 3.28 feet,
and a sample is drawn  directly into an  Orsat analyzer or  Fyrite-type  combustion gas
analyzer.  The sample is then analyzed for carbon dioxide and  oxygen content. With these
data, the dry molecular weight of the gas stream can then be calculated.

Figure 5-11 shows the equipment used to obtain a grab sample.  Total cost of the equipment
for this method is approximately
 An integrated sample is required when the analytical results will be used to calculate a
 correction factor for pollutant  emission rate, such as percent excess air or the "F" factor
 (for combustion sources). For an integrated sample, sampling probes are located at several
 designated points in the stack, which represent equal areas, and a sample is extracted at a
 constant rate. As the gas passes through the sampling apparatus, the moisture is removed
 and the sample is collected in a flexible bag. The sample is then analyzed by use of the Orsat
 analyzer.

 The minimum detectable limit  for this method is 0.1 percent. No collaborative  tests have
 been performed.

 Figure 5-12 is a  schematic of an assembled apparatus for collection of an integrated stack
 gas sample. In addition to this equipment, an Orsat analyzer is required. Total cost for this
 equipment is approximately $1,000.
                                          5-26

-------
                  PROBE
FLEXIBLE TUBING
         T
                   TO ANALYZER
           FILTER (GLASS WOOL)
                                         SQUEEZE BULB
                              FIGURE 5-11
       GRAB SAMPLE SETUP FOR MOLECULAR WEIGHT DETERMINATION
1.9 CM (0.75 IN.
         AIR-COOLED
         CONDENSER
       FILTER
    (GLASS WOOL)
                                      QUICK DISCONNECT

                                                n
                             FIGURE 5-12
   INTEGRATED SAMPLE SETUP FOR MOLECULAR WEIGHT DETERMINATION
                                 5-27

-------
     5.4.3  Moisture Content

EPA Method 4 is the reference method for determining the moisture content of the stack
eas. A value for moisture content is needed in some of the calculations for determining
o
pollutant emission rates.

A sample is taken at several designated sampling points in the stack, which represent equal
areas. The sampling probe is placed at each sampling point, and the apparatus is adjusted to
take a sample at a constant rate. As the gas passes through the apparatus, a filter collects the
participate matter,  the moisture is  removed,  and the sample  volume  is measured. The
collected moisture is then measured, and moisture content of the gas stream is calculated.

No  collaborative tests have been conducted  on this  method, and no minimum detection
limits have been established. This method should not be used if the gas stream contains
liquid droplets since it will produce erroneously high results.

A schematic of the sampling  apparatus used in this  reference method is shown in Figure
5-13. In addition  to this  equipment, the  following field  equipment and  supplies are
required:

     1.   Balance to measure within  1  gram, and

     2.   Thermocouple and potentiometer or equivalent.

Commercial units are available at a cost of approximately $3,000. Total cost of equipment
for moisture determination is approximately $4,000.

Method 4  also provides an alternative procedure, which is an approximate  method for
determining  moisture content of  a gas  stream.  Figure 5-14 shows a schematic of the
sampling apparatus used in the approximate method. The probe is placed in the stack, and a
sample  of  approximately 30  liters  is pulled through the sampling apparatus.  As the gas
passes through the sampling  apparatus,  a filter collects the particulates, the moisture is
removed, and the sampling rate is measured. The amount of moisture removed is measured
and the approximate moisture content is calculated. This approximate method should be
used only to estimate moisture content.

If the gas stream contains liquid droplets, the following method is used. Determine the stack
gas temperature at  several designated points in the stack. The moisture content can then be
determined by  assuming that the gas stream is saturated and by using a psychrometric chart
or saturation vapor pressure tables.

     5.4.4 Particulates

Procedures for taking a participate source test are more detailed than those used in sampling
gases. Because  particulates exhibit inertia! effects and are not uniformly distributed within a
stack, sampling  to obtain a  representative sample  is   more  complex than for gaseous
                                          5-28

-------
              1-9 CM (0.75 IN.}    PROBE

         PITOTTUBE^   i—*  * _
       FILTER
       {EITHER IN STACK
       OR OUT OF STACK)
       REVERSE-TYPE
       PITOTTUBE
f
STACK
WALL
CONDENSER-ICE BATH
SYSTEM INCLUDING
SILICA GEL TUBE
                                                              AIR-TIGHT
                                                              PUMP
                                   FIGURE 5-13
                            MOISTURE SAMPLE TRAIN
                            SILICA GELTUBE
                                                RATE METER
        HEATED PROBE
     FILTER
     (GLASS WOOL)
           MIDGET IMPINGERS
                        PUMP
                                 FIGURE 5-14
                   APPROXIMATE MOISTURE SAMPLE TRAIN

pollutants. EPA Method 5 (as shown in Figure 5-15) is the most widely used procedure for
determination of participate emissions from a stationary source. In-stack sampling guidelines
are presented in EPA Method 17.
                                     5-29

-------
                                                CO
                                                D


                                                <
                                                oc

                                                <
                                                Q_
                                                Q_

                                                <

                                                LU
                                                _J
                                                Q_
                                             LU

                                             OC
                                                 a.

                                                 in

                                                 Q

                                                 O
                                                 X

                                                 H
                                                 UJ
                                                  a.
                                                  LJJ
5-30

-------
  According to Method 5 (except as applied to fossil-fuel-fired steam generators), a partieulate
  is  defined  as any  material  collectible  at  250°F  on a filtering  medium. The sampling
  apparatus used  in  Method 5  is designed  to catch partieulate matter at this specified
  temperature.  Most states accept Method 5, even though they define particulate differently.
  Ihe sampling apparatus, however, may have to be modified to conform with the state's
  definition of particulate.  For example,  a  state  may define particulate  as  any material
  collectible at stack conditions,  a definition that would  allow the filt™ media to be
  located in the stack.

  In  performing a particulate source test, samples  are taken at several designated sampling
  points in the stack, which represent equal areas.  At each sampling point,  the velocity
  temperature, molecular weight, and static pressure  of the particulate-laden gas stream are
  measured. The  sampling probe is placed at the first sampling point,  and the  sampling
  apparatus adjusted to take a sample at the conditions measured at this point. The sampling
  probe  is then moved to the next point,  and the process is repeated continuously until a
  sample has been taken  from each designated sampling point. To achieve valid results in a
 particulate source test,  the sample  must be  taken under the  same conditions at each
 sampling  point  in  the  stack.  This is  commonly  referred  to as isokinetic  sampling.
 Measurement  of stack conditions allows adjustment  of the sampling rate to meet this
 requirement.

 As the  gas stream proceeds through the sampling apparatus, the particulate matter is trapped
 on  a filter,  the moisture is removed, and the volume of the sample is measured.  Upon
 completion of sampling, the collected material is recovered and sent  to a laboratory for a
 gravimetric determination or analysis.

 The time required for collection of a particulate sample depends on the number of sampling
 points required, the sampling time per point, and the sample volume required. A minimum
 sampling  time  of 2 minutes per point is recommended.  Generally the sampling time is at
 least 1 hour but less than 4 hours. Three particulate samples per source  are required.

 Commercial sampling units are  available at a cost of approximately $3,500. Following is a
list of the additional equipment required for a particulate source test and analysis:

     Sampling equipment and supplies

      1.  Orsat analyzer or equivalent,
      2.  Thermocouple and potentiometer,
      3.  Brushes to clean probe,
     4.  Glass  wash bottles (two),
     5.  Glass  sample storage containers (500-ml),
     6.  Petri dishes (glass or polyethylene),
     7.  Graduated cylinder,
         Plastic storage containers,
8.
9.   Funnel and rubber policeman,
                                    5-31

-------
   10.  Filters (glass fiber)
   11.  Silica gel,
   12.  Crushed ice,
   13.  Stopcock grease, and
   14.  Acetone (reagent grade).

   Sample analysis equipment and supplies
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
         Glass weighing dishes,
         Desiccator,
         Analytical balance (to measure within 0.1 mg),
         Balance (to measure within 0.5 g),
         Beakers (250-ml),
         Hygrometer,
         Temperature gauge, and
         Desiccant (anhydrous calcium sulfate, indicating type).
probe is required; this will add to the overall cost. Total eost of equipment for a complete
particulate stack test is approximately $10,000.
Different methods of sampling for peculates are based on
matter. The sampling apparatus is  modified to coUect the P



collection at a relatively lower temperature generally ylelds h^her values.


     5.4.5  Sulfur Dioxide
    e, EPA Method 6 is the reference method for
 (S02 ) from all stationary sources except sulfunc acid plants.
                                                                         .
                                                                       of sulfur
 in stack gas velocity.

  As the 2as zoes through the sampling apparatus, the sulfuric acid mist and sulfur trioxide are
                                            5-32

-------
 mist and  sulfur trioxide are discarded, and the collected material containing the S09  is
 recovered  for analysis  at  the  laboratory. The concentration of S02 in the sample  is
 determined by a titration method.

 For determination of the  total mass emission rate of S02, the moisture content and the
 volumetric flow rate of the exhaust gas stream must be measured.

 For Method 6, the minimum sampling time is 20 minutes  per sample and two separate
 samples consWute a run.  Three runs are required, resulting in six separate samples. An
 interval  of 30 minutes is required between each sample. Longer  sampling times  may be
 required if a larger sample is needed.

 Stack concentrations  of 50 to 10,000 parts per million of sulfur dioxide can be determined
 with this method. The minimum detectable limit has been determined to be 3.4 milligrams
 of  S02  per cubic meter  of gas (2.1  x 10-7  pound  of  S02 per cubic foot of gas).
 Collaborative tests  have  shown  that an experienced test team using  quality controls can
 conduct a source test for sulfur dioxide with accuracy within ±4 percent

 Figure 5-16 is a schematic of an assembled sulfur dioxide sampling apparatus. Commercial
units are available at  a cost of approximately $1,700. In addition to this apparatus, the
toiiowing equipment and supplies are required:

    Sampling equipment and supplies

     1.  Glass wool (borosilicate or quartz),
     2.  Stopcock grease,
     3.  Vacuum gauge,
                 o  D 7
     4.  Wash bottles (polyethylene or glass),
     5.  Storage bottles (polyethylene),
     6.  Thermocouple and potentiometer,
     7.  Pipettes (one each: 5-ml, 20-ml, and 25 ml),
         Volumetric flasks (100-ml and 1,000-ml),
         Burettes (5-mI and 50-ml),
         Erlenmeyer flask (250-mI),
         Dropping bottle (125-ml), and
  8.
  9.
 10.
 11.
    12.  Graduated cylinder.

    Sampling analysis supplies
    1.
     Deionized, distilled water,
2.   Isopropanol (80 percent),
3.   Hydrogen peroxide (3 percent),
     Thorin indicator (l-(o-arsenophenylazo)-2-napthol-3,6-disulfonic  acid, disodium
     salt, or equivalent),
     Barium perchlorate solution (0.01 N), and
     Sulfuric acid standard (0.01 N).
   4.

   5.
   6.
                                       5-33

-------
                                            LU
5-34

-------
Because of breakage it is advisable to provide spare sets of all glassware. Total cost of the
equipment for a source test for sulfur dioxide is approximately $3,000.

Other sampling methods utilize different chemical solutions, such as a sodium hydroxide
solution, to trap the sulfur dioxide; a different analytical procedure is required. Also EPA
Method 8 may be used as an  alternative  method  for determining S02  emissions from
stationary sources.

Some states specify a sampling method that collects sulfuric acid, sulfur trioxide, and sulfur
dioxide. The analysis then gives  total sulfur oxides. This method usually yields values only
about 1 to 5 percent higher than those obtained with Method 6 in which the sulfur trioxide
and sulfuric acid are discarded.

Plant operators  should be aware  that with the use of Method 6 for sulfur dioxide  and
application of the F factor to obtain values in pounds of sulfur dioxide per million BTU of
heat input, it is critical that an accurate oxygen measurement be made at the same sample
point and at the same time that the sulfur dioxide sample is obtained.

Although a  technician could learn to sample for sulfur dioxide by reading manuals,  it is
advisable that testing personnel take a formal training course.

     5.4.6  Nitrogen Oxides (NOX)

EPA Method 7 is the reference method for determining emissions  of nitrogen oxides from
stationary sources. Sampling for NOX  by this method is relatively simple with the proper
equipment.

A sampling  probe is placed at any location in the stack, and a grab sample is collected in an
evacuated flask. This flask contains a solution of sulfuric acid and hydrogen peroxide, which
reacts with the NOX.  The volume and moisture  content of the exhaust gas stream must be
determined  for calculation of  the  total  mass  emission rate. The sample is sent to a
laboratory where the concentration of nitrogen  oxides, except nitrous oxide, is determined
colorimetrically.

Each grab  sample is  obtained fairly rapidly  (15-30  seconds),  and four  grab samples
constitute one run. A total of 12 grab samples is required for a complete series of three runs.
An interval  of 15  minutes between each  grab  sample is required. The range of this method
has been determined to be 2 to 400 milligrams NOX  (as N02) per dry standard cubic meter
(without  dilution). Collaborative  tests  have shown that an experienced  test team  can
conduct a source test for nitrogen oxides with accuracy within ±6.6 percent.

Figure 5-17 shows a  schematic  of the  sampling apparatus  for  an  NOX  source  test.
Commercial units are available at a cost of  approximately  $1,200. Glassware needed to
conform  to  EPA Method 7 is available from several glass manufacturers.  In addition to the
apparatus as shown, the following equipment is required:
                                         5-35

-------
                                                     oc
                                                     I-
                                                     LU
                                                     _l
                                                     Q_
                                                     LU
                                                     Q

                                                 £  X
                                                 if)  O


                                                 CC  LU
                                                 D  O
                                                 (3  O

                                                 LU  ^
                                                     Q
                                                     O
                                                     X
                                                     I-
                                                     LU
                                                     Q.
                                                     LU
5-36

-------
    Equipment and supplies

      1.  Heating tape capable of maintaining 250°F in the probe,
      2.  Type-Spitottube,
      3.  Stopcock grease,
      4.  Inclined manometer or equivalent,
      5.  Connecting tubes for pitot to manometer,
      6.  Sling-psychrometer,
      7.  Glass wash bottle,
      8.  Steam bath,
      9-  Beakers (250-ml, one for each sample and standard (blank)),
    10.  Volumetric pipettes (1-, 2-, and 10-ml),
    11.  Volumetric flask (100-ml, one for each sample and 1,000-ml for the standard
         blank),
    12.  Spectrophotometer to measure absorbance at 420 nm,
    13.  Graduated cylinder (100-ml with 1.0-ml divisions), and
    14.  Analytical balance to measure to 0.1 mg.

    Reagents

      1.  Concentrated, reagent-grade sulfuric acid,
      2.  Distilled water,
      3.  Hydrogen peroxide,
      4.  Sodium hydroxide,
      5.  Red litmus paper,
      6.  Deionized, distilled water,
      7.  Fuming sulfuric acid (15 to 18 percent by weight),
      8.  Free sulfur trioxide,
      9.  Phenol (white solid reagent grade), and
    10.  Potassium nitrate.

Total   cost  of the  equipment for  conducting  a source test for  NOX  emissions  is
approximately $2,500.

An accurate oxygen measurement must be made at the same sample point and at the same
time the sample is obtained when the F  factor calculation is used  to determine values in
pounds of NOX per  million BTU of heat  input. NOX  sampling requires less skill, training,
and time than most sampling procedures.

    5.4.7 Carbon Monoxide (CO)

EPA Method 10  is the  reference method for determining  emissions of carbon monoxide
from  stationary  sources.  An integrated  or a continuous gas sample may be required,
depending on operating conditions.  Both methods are discussed.
                                        5-37

-------
When the operating conditions are uniform and steady (no fluctuations in flow rate or
concentration of CO in the gas stream), the continuous sampling method can be used. A
sampling probe is placed in the stack at any location, preferably near the center. The sample
can be extracted at any convenient and constant sampling rate. As the gas stream passes
through the sampling apparatus, any moisture or carbon dioxide in the sample gas stream is
removed.  The CO  concentration  is then measured by a nondispersive infrared analyzer,
which gives direct readouts of CO concentrations.

Figure 5-18 is a schematic  of an assembled sampling apparatus used to determine CO
concentrations by the continuous sampling method.

An integrated sampling method is required when operation of the source is uniform but
unsteady (fluctuations in flow rate can occur). For an integrated sample, the sampling probe
is  located at any  point near  the  center of the stack, and the  sampling rate is adjusted
proportionately to the stack gas  velocity.  As the  stack gas passes through the sampling
apparatus, moisture is removed and the sample gas is collected in a flexible bag. Analysis of
the sample is then performed  in a laboratory with a nondispersive infrared analyzer. Any
carbon dioxide or  residual moisture in the sample must be removed before the sample is
passed through the  nondispersive infrared analyzer.

Figure 5-19  is a schematic of an assembled apparatus for integrated sampling of CO. Figure
5-20 also shows the analytical equipment.
              AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
TO ANALYZER
                         PROBE
                                \
                FILTER {GLASS WOOL)
                                    FIGURE 5-18
                       CONTINUOUS SAMPLE TRAIN FOR CO
                                        5-38

-------
         FILTER
       (GLASS WOOL)
                              RATE METER
                                        \
                           VALVE
                              AIR-COOLED
                              CONDENSER
                                VALVE
QUICK DISCONNECT
                                                 BAG
                                FIGURE 5-19
                   INTEGRATED SAMPLING TRAIN FOR CO
                                     NEEDLE
                                     VALVE   |f=
 SAMPLE
                                                 RATE METER
     NON-DISPERSIVE
     INFRARED ANALYZER
     (NDIR)
             ZERO     SPAN
           CALIBRATION GASES
                                  FIGURE 5-20
                         SAMPLING APPARATUS FOR CO
A  1-hour sampling period is generally required for this method. Sampling periods are
specified  by the  applicable standard, e.g.,  standards for  petroleum  refineries require
sampling for 1 hour or more.

For Method 10, the minimum detectable concentration of CO has been determined to be 20
ppm in a range of 1 to  1,000 ppm. Collaborative tests have shown that this method can be
executed with accuracies within ±101 milligrams of CO per cubic meter.
                                     5-39

-------
       Sampling equipment and supplies


       1.    Pitot tube (type S),

       2.    Inclined manometer or equivalent, and
       3.    Tubing to connect pitot tube to manometer.


       Analytical equipment and supplies


           CaUbration  gases:  N2  with a known CO concentration, prepurified grade of N3

           and two  adtoonal N2 with CO concentrations corresponding  to  30 and 60
           percent of span of the nondispersive infrared analyzer.



                          used " the field should be provided- Total cost of the
 An Orsat analyzer or detector tubes may be used to determine the presence of carbon

 rrtabt STo   r r hod%hrever' are not acceptabie *™™ ^ ">™
 detectable bmrt of the Orsat analyzer ls 1,000 ppm and the detector tubes are not accurate
 enough.


 Collection of  CO for nondispersive infrared analysis presents no special  problems  and
 requires no  great degree of training.  However,  operaLi of the analyzer VoeXuTre
 training and experience.                                            *         require


     5.4.8 Fluorides


 Two EPA reference methods, Method 13A and Method 13B, can be used to determine total
 fluoride emissions from a stationary source.  The difference in  the  two methods is  the

 analytical procedure for determining total fluorides. Fluorides can oecur as peculates or as
 gaseous fluorides; the particulates are captured on  a filter  and the gaseous fluorides  are
 captured in a chemical reaction with water.
Meod   fo                                                        ure o-n
Method 5 for particulates. As the gas stream passes through the sampling apparatus the

gaseous fluorides are removed by a chemical reaction with water, the p'artLFate fluorides


        th  , T \    ; and l,he Sample VOlU*e " meaSUreA The SamPle is — ed and
           2    II    analyS1S- PrOCedures of M«*ods 13A and 13B are complex and

Method n^,™    " a" eXPerienCed chemfat- Method 13A is a colorimetric method, and
Method 13B utilizes a specific ion electrode.
                   ,                         f°r b°th methods' SamPH"g Periods are
         by the applicable standard, e.g.,  standards applicable to triple superphosphate
                                      5-40

-------
plants  require sampling  of 1 hour  or more. The  standard may also specify a minimum
sample volume which will dictate the minimum length of the sampling period.

The determination range  of Method ISA is 0 to 1.4 micrograms of fluoride per milliliter; the
range of Method 13B is 0.2 to 2,000 micrograms of fluoride per milliliter.

Collaborative tests are  currently being performed and evaluated. Preliminary results indicate
that the field sampling  phase of Methods 13A and 13B is generally reliable.

Figure 5-21 is a schematic of an assembled fluoride sampling apparatus used in Methods 13A
and 13B. Commercial units are available at a cost of approximately $3,500. In addition to
this apparatus, the following equipment/supplies  are required:

     Field equipment and supplies

     1.   Filter heating system capable of heating the filter to ~250°F,
     2.   Brushes to clean probe,
     3.   Glass wash bottles (two),
         sample storage bottles (wide-mouth, high-density polyethylene, 1-liter),
     4.   Plastic storage containers,
     5.   Graduated cylinder (250-ml), and
     6.   Funnel and rubber policeman.

     Sampling supplies

     1.   Filters (Whatman No. 1 or equivalent),
     2.   Silica gel (indicating type),
     3.   Distilled water,
     4.   Crushed ice,  and
     5.   Stopcock grease.

     Sample analysis for  Method 13A or 13B

      1. Distillation apparatus shown in Figure 5-22,
      2. Hot plate (capable of heating to 500° C),
      3. Electric muffle furnace (capable of heating to 600° C),
      4. Crucibles (nickel, 75- to 100-ml capacity),
      5. Beaker (1,500-ml),
      6. Volumetric flask (50-ml),
      7. Erlenmeyer flask or plastic bottle (500-ml),
      8. Constant-temperature bath (capable  of  maintaining a constant temperature of
         ±1°C in room-temperature range),
      9. Balance  (300-g capacity to measure ±0.5 g),
     10. Calcium oxide (certified grade containing 0.005 percent calcium),
     11. Phenolphthalein indicator (0.1 percent in  1:1 ethanol-water mixture),
                                         5-41

-------
 1.9cm 10.75 IN-)
TEMPERATURE


        PROBE
1.9cm (0.75 IN.)

       PITQt TUBE
                 OPTIONAL
               FILTER HOLDER
                 LOCATION
                                                   THERMOMETER

                                           FILTER HOLDER            VALVE
        REVERSE TYPE
        PITOTTUBE
          ORIFICE MANOMETER
                                                      AIRTIGHT
                                                      PUMP
                              FIGURE 5-21
               SAMPLING APPARATUS FOR FLUORIDE
                              CONNECTING TUBE
                              12-mm ID
                              124/40
    THERMOMETER TIP MUST EXTEND BELOW
    THE LIQUID LEVEL
                             HEATING
                             MANTLE
                                                          T 24/40
                                                          CONDENSER
                                         250ml
                                         VOLUMETRIC
                                         FLASK
                               FIGURE 5-22
                       DISTILLATION APPARATUS
                                   5-42

-------
    12.  Sodium hydroxide (pellets, ACS reagent grade or equivalent),
    13.  Sulfuric acid (concentrated, ACS reagent grade or equivalent),
    14.  Filters (Whatman No. 541 or equivalent), and
    15.  Sodium fluoride (reagent grade).

    Additional sample analysis equipment or supplies for Method ISA only

    1.   Spectrophotometer (to measure  absorbance  at 570 nm, providing at least a 1-cm
         light path),
    2.   Spectrophotometer cells (1-cm),
    3.   Silver sulfate (ACS reagent grade or equivalent),
    4.   Hydrochloric acid (concentrated, ACS reagent grade or equivalent),
    5.   SPADNS solution, and
    6.   Zirconyl chloride octahydrate.

    Additional sample analysis equipment or supplies  for Method 13B only

    1.   Fluoride ion activity sensing electrode,
    2.   Reference electrode (single junction, sleeve type),
    3.   Electrometer (a pH meter with millivolt scale capable of ±0.1 mv resolution, or a
         specific ion meter made specifically for specific ion measurements),
    4.   Magnetic stirrer and TFE-fluorocarbon-coated stripping bars,
    5.   Glacial acetic acid,
    6.   Sodium chloride, and
    7.   Cyclohexylene dinitrilo tetraacetic acid.

It is advisable to provide a spare set of the glassware used in field sampling. If the source to
be tested has a large stack (greater than  5 feet in diameter),  a  longer sampling probe  is
required; this will add to the cost. Total cost of equipment for a complete fluoride stack test
is approximately $10,000.

Other sampling  methods for fluorides use chemical solutions to remove gaseous fluorides
from  the sample  and  require different analytical procedures. As  an example,  the Los
Angeles  County method  utilizes sodium  hydroxide  to remove  the fluorides. The  lower
detectable limit for this method is approximately  16 micrograms of fluoride in 1.7 cubic
meters of sample gas.

Fluoride  sampling  requires  skilled   and  trained  sampling  personnel.  The  analytical
procedures require only normal laboratory skills.

     5.4.9  Hydrocarbons

The U.S. EPA  has not published a  reference  source testing method for hydrocarbons.
Each state  or local  control agency that regulates emissions of hydrocarbons selects a source
test method.  If source  testing  for hydrocarbons  is  required, the control  agency should
specify the sampling and analytical method.
                                         5-43

-------
Hydrocarbon emissions may contain both condensible and noricondensible hydrocarbons.
Noncondensible  hydrocarbons are simply gases;  condensible hydrocarbons can occur as
gases  at  certain  temperatures  and as liquids or  even  solids at  lower temperatures. The
sampling method  must be  designed for the type  of data that is  needed, e.g., total
hydrocarbons (condensible + noncondensible), coudensible hydrocarbons only, or noncon-
densible  hydrocarbons only, A sampling method  for each is  described briefly.  Some
hydrocarbons are  photochemically reactive  and  some are not reactive. No hydrocarbon
standards are usually specified for nonreactive hydrocarbons.

     1.   Continuous method for determination of total hydrocarbons. A sample probe is
         located at  any  point in the stack,  and  the stack gas is drawn through a heated
         sample line to  a gas chromatograph with  a flame ionization detector (GC-FID).
         Concentrations are read from a potentiometric recorder.

     2.   Grab  sampling  for determination  of  noncondensible hydrocarbons only. Grab
         samples  of stack gas are collected with evacuated dry flasks in the same manner
         as described for nitrogen oxides. A stainless steel sampling probe and evacuated
         flask should be used instead of glass in the sampling apparatus.  Samples ma\
         also be collected in the same manner as the CO-integrated bag sample. Analyses
         may be  performed with an infrared spectrophotometer or a gas chromatograph.

     3.   Adsorption techniques for  sampling   of  condensible  h) drocarbons  only.  A
         sample is  obtained  in the  same  manner  as  described  previously for  sulfur
         dioxide.  Chemical  solutions that will collect the hydrocarbons are placed in the
         sampling  apparatus.  Analysis  of the  sample  can   be  made  with  a  gas
         chromatograph. Depending on the  chemical solutions, condensible  hydrocarbons
         with boiling points 320°F and greater can be sampled.

     4.   Adsorption technique for sampling of specific  hydrocarbons. A sample may be
         adsorbed on some  collection medium  such as silica gel,  activated charcoal, or
         packing. The adsorption medium and sample are brought to the laboratory for
         analysis. The hydrocarbons are then desorbed into the  analyzer. This method is
         relatively more accurate   and reliable when  the  types  of hydrocarbons are
         known and standard solutions of the anticipated hydrocarbon  can be used to
         calibrate the analytical instruments. When the specific  hydrocarbon compounds
         are not known, the  analysis  is usually  less representative and determination of
         exact compounds is much more costly.

Selection  of the sampling  method  is  critical in  sampling  for hydrocarbons. Very
significant errors, involving both positive and negative bias, can occur. Knowledge of the
specific types of hydrocarbons in the  exhaust gases will aid in  selecting the  appropriate
sampling method.  Total  costs, required equipment, sampling times, and detection limits
depend on the specific method used.
                                         544

-------
5.5 References

1.   Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association, 26(7):713-724, July 1976.

2.   Schulze. R.H.  The Economics  of Environmental Quality Measurement, Journal of
    the Air Pollution Control Association, 23(8):671-675; August 1973.

3.   Gerstle, R.W., and DeWees, W., Safety Aspects of Emission Testing, Stack Sampling
    News, March 1976.
                                        5-45

-------

-------
                                     CHAPTER 6

                     AMBIENT AIR MONITORING/CONTINUOUS
                                STACK MONITORING
 6.1 Introduction

 This chapter deals with monitoring of the ambient air around industrial plants and with
 continuous monitoring as it applies to point sources of pollution. It is intended as a guide
 for industrial planners who may be relatively unfamiliar with the purposes of monitoring
 and the uses of monitoring data.
                         G

 The basic concept of ambient air  monitoring, as in emission testing, is measurement of a
 representative  sample.  In  emission testing,  the  cross-sectional area  of the  gas stream is
 fixed, and  results are  generally  representative of the total volume  of stack effluent. In
 ambient air monitoring, however, the  measurements are indicative of only a small portion
 of the atmosphere and cannot be assumed  to be representative of the total atmosphere.
 In theory,  the pollutant  concentrations  measured in ambient air  monitoring  could  be
 entirely different if  the monitoring instruments were located a short distance away.  To
 obtain a truly representative sample  of ambient  air, one  would  have to place man)
 monitors in a given area, but  such  a svstem would be  economically unfeasible.

 A  company may  conduct  ambient  air monitoring for  several  reasons.  Some state
 regulations  require that industries monitor for particular pollutants, such as fluorides, and
 some  states permit ambient  monitoring in  lieu of complying with a specified emission
 limitation. Some regulations include provisions that limit the concentration of a pollutant
 at the property line, which must be monitored. Some companies perform air monitoring
 simply to  measure  the impact  of a  plant's emissions on local air  qualit).  Ambient
 monitoring  also  can provide  information that  is useful in determining the normal  or
 background level of air quality, in following air quality trends, and in providing guidance
 for emergency control  procedures  during  air pollution episodes. Regardless of the reason,
 ambient monitoring is usually performed  with respect to a  particular polluting source  or
 group  of sources to provide measurements of a specific pollutant.

 Under the 1970 Amendments to the Clean  Air Act,  EPA in December 1974 issued final
 regulations  preventing significant deterioration of air quality in areas cleaner than the na-
 tional  ambient air quality standards. These rules went  into effect nationwide in June 1975.
 On August 7, 1977, the new Amendments to the Act generally toughened  and expanded the
 scope of this program.

 Basically, the new Amendments  require  each state  to classify clean  air areas as either
 Class I (where air quality has to remain virtually unchanged); Class II (where  moderate in-
 dustrial growth would be allowed); and Class III (where more intensive industrial  activity
would  be permitted).  The  air quality in each of the three types of areas will be allowed  to
                                         6-1

-------
deteriorate only be specific amounts fixed by the Amendments.  In no case, however, will
air quality by allowed to exceed federal health standards.

The final rulemaking implements provisions of the Amendments intended by Congress to be
immediately effective as  of the August  7, 1977 enactment date.  Only pollution sources
which commenced construction before August 7 are exempt from the immediate changes.

Among these changes is the immediate application of the new ambient air increments men-
tioned above.  These increments are more  stringent  than  those allowed under EPA's old
significant deterioration regulations.

These final rules also  immediately designate certain areas as Class I, and forbid states to re-
designate  them into either of the other two classes.  They are:  (1) international parks,
(2) national wilderness areas exceeding 5,000 acres, (3) national memorial parks exceeding
5,000 acres, and (4) national parks exceeding 6,000 acres.

With only a few exceptions, all areas of the United States  have been placed in Class II, but
may apply for classification as Class I or Class HI.  In areas designated Class I or Class II,
increases in pollutant concentrations will be permitted as shown in Table 6-1.
                                     TABLE 6-1
                ALLOWABLE DETERIORATION IN CLASSES I AND II

                                       (Mg/m3)
            Pollutant
Class I
                                                                  Class II
      Particulate
          Annual geometric mean
          24-hour maximum

      Sulfur dioxide
          Annual arithmetic mean
          24-hour maximum
          3-hour maximum
    5
   10


    2
    5
   25
 10
 30


 15
100
700
 Under the nondegradation scheme, only these incremental amounts may be added to the
 existing background air quality.  Once  the increment has been added to the background
 pollutant  concentration, no further industrial or  other expansion may take place  in this
 area.  Allocations of the  allowable increments will be on a first-corne/flrst-served basis.
                                          6-2

-------
Review of pollution sources before they are built has been proposed to insure they do not
violate the new deterioration increments in actual operation. As required in Section 165 of
the Amendments, EPA's proposal will require a preconstruction permit for any of the 28
major pollution source categories named in the Amendments that have potential air pollu-
tion emissions of 100 tons per year, or for any other pollution sources that have potential
emissions of 250 tons per year. EPA's current regulations cover only 19 source categories
(including power plants, steel mills, and other stationary sources).


6.2 Selection of Sites for Ambient Air Monitoring

The number of  sites to be incorporated  into  an  ambient air monitoring  network  will
depend largely on the amount of data required to meet the objectives. At  a small source
where  one  wind direction  usually predominates, monitors are usually operated  at  two
sites: one to monitor  the effects of the source,  and the other to  provide  upwind or
background concentrations. Where wind  directions are  variable, or other similar emission
sources  are operating  nearby,  additional  samplers will be  required to  identify  the
concentrations that are  attributable to a specific source.

Because  ambient air monitoring deals with an open, unconfined volume of air  rather than
with a volume that is enclosed in a stack, there are no  detailed specifications for location
of  ambient air   monitors.  Other  than   such   obvious  considerations  as accessibility,
availability  of electrical  power, and relationship  to possible interfering pollutant sources,
the principle factors in site selection are meteorology and topography.

     6.2.1 Meteorology

Because  wind movement accounts for dispersion of the pollutants from the source,  it  is
important to obtain detailed information about  local meteorology,  and  in particular
about the local wind patterns. Following are possible sources of meteorological data:

      1.  Local offices of the U.S. Weather Service

      2,  Local airports,

      3.  Stations of the State Fire Weather Service,

      4.  Military installations,

      5.  Public utilities and industrial complexes,

      6.  High schools, colleges, universities, and

      7.  National Weather Records Center (Ashville, N.C.).
                                          6-3

-------
The  National Weather Records Center can provide by far the most comprehensive records
of meteorological  data.  In addition  to providing current data,  the Center  will  also
prepare,  on request,  a summary  of  all pertinent data available for a given geographical
area. Queries and requests may be addressed to:

     Director, National Climate Center
     National Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration
     Federal Building
     Ashville, North Carolina 28801

At  some facilities, none of  the seven  sources  may  be available  or they  may not be
applicable.  In  areas  which are  topographically  much  different  from  the  source of
meteorological data that have been collected by other groups, it may be necessary, in fact,
to monitor  the local micro meteorology and conduct upper air studies in varying degrees
of intensity either to  verify that the published sources accurately predict the local wind
patterns  or to verify the differences.

The  controlling factor in site selection is movement of the winds.  With some knowledge
of the predominant wind direction in  an area,  the  path of pollutants from the emission
source to  the  point  of  ground-level  impact can  be predicted roughly  and  the  most
suitable  location for  an air  monitoring  site can be  determined.  The most convenient
method  of  performing this analysis  is by the use  of  a wind rose  of the  type shown in
Figure 61.

An annual wind rose  of this type can be used for site anal) sis. The  lengths of the  lines
for each of the 16 wind directions represent the percentage of the  time that the wind is
blowing  from that direction. The percentage value is shown at the end of  each line, hi
this  example, the wind comes from the  south 24  percent of the time; since this is the
highest single  percentage, south can be considered the predominant direction. The second
most frequent direction  is west-northwest, with a  frequenc)  of 12.9 percent. If wind
direction is the  only  criterion  for  site  planning, the most logical location for an air
monitor in  this example is due north of the facility, where the monitor would experience
the  maximum impact from the  source.  The second, or background, station  would be
placed west-northwest of  the  facility  because  the  wind blows  toward this  direction the
least during the year, and the station  would receive impact from the east-southeast  only
1.1 percent of the time.

When  more precise information  is required for  site location,  computerized atmospheric
dispersion  models can yield such information.  Several models  in current use predict for
a given  situation  such things  as ground-level concentrations at various points  around a
source,  location  of  the  maximum  concentration  of  pollutants  from  a  source,  the
combined  effects  of several sources, and the concentration for any time period from  1
hour to  1 year, at an\  ground-level receptor, resulting from any source or combination of
sources.
                                          6-4

-------
12.9%
  W  8.9%
                         5.3%
                                       9.8% CALM
                              24.0%
                     FIGURE 6-1
            EXAMPLE OF ANNUAL WIND ROSE
                         6-5

-------
The  basis  of these models  is  the  Gaussian plume assumption, which says that every
plume,  regardless  of  the  source, will take on a  characteristic shape depending upon the
stack parameters and meteorological conditions.  This concept is illustrated in Figure 6-2.
The  Gaussian concept says that pollutant concentrations  in  the horizontal and vertical
directions, relative to the plume centerline (x-axis in Figure 6-2) assume a normal or
Gaussian distribution  (1).

Because  it is desirable to place an air monitor  in  the  area  most likely to  receive  the
highest  ground-level concentration of pollutants, most modeling efforts are designed to
predict  where this maximum concentration  will occur.  Although  these models are  not
totally accurate, they provide valuable guidelines in selection of monitoring sites.
                                                                              -y,z)
                                                                                y,0)
                                       FIGURE 6-2
               COORDINATE SYSTEM SHOWING PLUME DISPERSION (1)
                                          6-6

-------
      6.2.2  Topography

 The  transport of air pollution is also affected by topographical features. Under conditions
 of irregular topography, application of the standard Gaussian  dispersion equation is often
 invalid.  Obstructions such as hills, mountains, and river valleys have a profound effect on
 the  dispersive  capability of the  atmosphere.  Because none  of  the current dispersion
 models  do not adequately account for these effects,  a certain amount of intuitive judg-
 ment is required in choosing an air monitoring site in complex terrain. For example, slopes
 and valleys are generally poor sites for air monitors because pollutants are generally not well
 dispersed and the measured concentrations would not be representative. Monitors  placed
 on shorelines usually do not  give  meaningful results because local circulation patterns
 (lake and  sea breezes) are created by bodies of water (2). Hillsides and mountains cause
 turbulence and as  a result could bias site readings.  A manmade obstruction,  such as a
 building, also tends to cause  downwash on  the leeward side of the building (3). When
 locating a monitor near a source  of ground dust, it is advisable to elevate the equipment
 above the  level  of maximum ground turbulence or simply to place it as  far as possible
 from  the  source.  Again,  personal judgment is  always  required, based  on  a  visual
 inspection of the  site.

 6.3 Equipment for Ambient Air Monitoring

 Most industries  organizing  an  ambient air monitoring  program  will need to  measure
 concentrations of sulfur dioxide and particulates in a  manner that corresponds as far as
 possible with the  methods and   averaging times  specified in local, state,  and  federal
 regulations.

 Particulate  monitoring  is usually  done with  a high-volume air sampler, a vacuum-type
 device that provides average concentrations over a 24-hour period. Monitoring for gaseous
 pollutants  can be done with static samplers that give  averages over  a 30-day period and
 with  d>namic samplers that give  24-hour averages. A typical industrial network would
 consist of the following:

      1.  One or several high-volume air samplers;

      2. Special  monitoring equipment,  e.g.,  for measuring fluorides, corrosion studies,
         or vegetation sampling; and

      3. Several dynamic S02  and/or one continuous  S02  monitor.

Almost   all  ambient  air  monitoring  programs  are  accompanied  b>   meteorological
monitoring  of wind direction  and  velocity;  where it is appropriate and economical!)
feasible,  temperature-sensing devices can be  operated at various  elevations to indicate
stability  of the air mass.
                                         6-7

-------
     6.3.1 Participate Monitoring - Total Suspended Participates (TSP)

The  high-volume  sampler,  shown in  Figure  6-3,  has gained  wide acceptance  in  the
measurement  of concentrations of  suspended  particulates. This sampler  is  a rugged,
reasonably inexpensive device with good filtering efficiency that can  be operated for long
periods with  minimum  maintenance. It has been used  in  the National Air  Sampling
Network (NASN) since 1953.

The  NASN periodically  reports  air quality  data for  all parts  of the country  including
urban  and nonurban areas.  The nonurban data provide an  estimate of the background
concentrations of suspended particulates. Long-term averages of NASN data from urban
areas can be used for estimating the relative degree of particulate pollution in the air of
various communities; the data  may  also be  used for correlation  of air  quality with
population, geographic location, and extent of industrialization. When used in  this way,
NASN data can be  a valuable aid  in estimating the degree of pollution in the area being
studied.

A high-volume  sampler  uses a vacuum-cleaner type of motor  and blower  to draw large
volumes of air through  a filter on which particulates are collected for measurement and
analysis.

A high-volume sampler  will  handle 30 to 70 cubic feet of  air  per minute, or 50,000 to
75,000  cubic feet  in  a  typical  24-hour  period. The rate of flow  varies somewhat,
depending on the make of sampler and the  type of filter. Ordinarily, the rate of flow
falls off considerably as particulate matter collects and builds  up on the filter. This is of
twofold concern. First, the high-speed motor in the sampler usually requires 25 to 30
cfm of air for proper cooling; if the sampler is operated for extended periods with lower
airflow, the  motor  may overheat and fail. Second, the total volume of air sampled must
be estimated with fair accuracy to allow accurate calculation of particulate concentration.

The total airflow  through  the sampler  is determined from  rotameter readings  at the
 beginning and end  of the operating period. This procedure  assumes that the decrease  in
 flow  rate is  linear  with time  and that the average  rate is representative  of the entire
 sampling period. Figure 6-4  illustrates a typical data sheet.

 The high-volume air sampler should provide the following information:

      1.    Daily 24-hour readings for TSP,

      2.    Maximum 24-hour values for TSP, and

      3.    Annual geometric mean value for  TSP.
                                          6-8

-------
          FIGURE 6-3
  HIGH-VOLUME AIR SAMPLER

Courtesy: General Metal Works, Inc.,
         Cleves, Ohio
              6-9

-------
                HI-VOLDATA RECORD
                                                       HI-VOLDATA RECORD
                                                             (Continued)
 STATION LOCATION
 CITY & STATE   _
 SITE ADDRESS	
 PROJECT	
                .SITE NO..
  INSTRUMENT LAST CALIBRATED.
 SAMPLER IDENTIFICATION NO.
 FILTER NUMBER	
 START SAMPLING	
                   mo   day    yr    hr   min   CFM
 STOP SAMPLING.
 WIND:.
.calm,.
  VISIBILITY:	
  SKY:	clear,.
  HUMIDITY:	
     .clear,.
    mo   day   yr
   — light,	gusty
                                   hr   min   CFM
         .hazy
	scattered,	overcast
.dry,	moderate,	h um id
 TEMPERATURE °F:	<20	20-40	41-80	61-80	>80

 — Faceplate must be hand tight
 - Flow rate must be ±10% of established flow rate
 — Faceplate gasket must be in good condition
 - Rotameter must be free of foreign material
 - Rotameter operation must be stable
 - Sampler motor brushes must be changed every 400 hrs of operation

            Sample was collected in accordance with
                    the above guidelines
                       signature
  REMARKS.
                                             Net Paniculate Wgt._
                                             Air Volume	
                                             Paniculate Concentration.
                                             Total Sampling Time	
                                                                           hours
                                                        REMARKS.
                                          FIGURE 6-4
                     FIELD SHEET FOR HIGH-VOLUME AIR SAMPLER
                                                                             .grams
                                                                                   .m-
     6.3.2  Monitoring for SO2

Sulfur dioxide (SO2) may be monitored by a variety of techniques:

          Type monitor          Monitoring techniques              Average time

          Static                   Sulfation plate                         30 days

          Dynamic               Bubbler train                           24 hours
           Continuous
                        Various instrumental
                           techniques
                                                            Variable
                                               6-10

-------
The  static  sampling data can  be  correlated  with  the dynamic  and/or  continuous
monitoring  data.  The  correlation  relationships,  however,  vary  with  meteorological
conditions, and data from one location may not be applicable to another location. This
technique  has, to a  greater  degree,  been replaced by  the  use of computer modeling
techniques that  are  beyond the  scope  of this  document. The static sampler (sulfation
plate, Figure  6-5) is made by coating the inside of a 4.8-cm-diameter,  plastic petri dish
with lead dioxide  paste. To expose a sulfation plate, the lid  is removed and the plate is
placed in a bracket that will  secure the plate in an upside-down position. The petri dish
serves as the shelter,  shipping  container, and lead dioxide  support.
     8 mm
      48 mm I.D.
-PLASTIC PETRIE DISH
LEAD DIOXIDE PASTE
 REMOVABLE PLASTIC COVER
                                                     -<)—dD-
                                              SULFATION PLATE HOLDER
                                              1/8"PLEXIGLAS
                                  FIGURE 6-5
                       SULFATION PLATE AND HOLDER
                                     6-11

-------
The  dynamic  and continuous sampling units usually consist of  a  system incorporating
several components, as  shown in Figure 6-6. The system for a dynamic gaseous collection
unit consists of:

     1.   Inlet section,

     2.   Absorption section,

     3.   Flow regulation device, and

     4.   Prime mover (usually a pump).

Typical of  the  absorption devices used in  a dynamic sampling train are the  midget  and
Greenberg-Smith impingers. Other devices available are listed in Table 6-2.

The equipment for a continuous monitoring system for gases might  consist of:

     1.   Inlet section,

     2.   Gas pretreatment section,

     3.   Detector,

     4.    Pho to multiplier,

     5.   Spectrometer, and

     6.   Readout device.

 Pretreatment  of the gas stream, depending  upon the conditions and gas to be monitored,
 could include techniques for:

      1.   Pressure adjustment,

      2.   Removal of particulates (usually a filter),

      3.   Removal of moisture (usually a silica gel column), and

      4.   Temperature adjustment (usually a condenser).

 Recommended manual and instrumental  monitors for gaseous pollutants are listed in
 Table 6-3.

      6.3.3  Meteorological Monitoring

 Many industries will wish to establish  meteorological  monitoring stations to  provide data
                                          6-12

-------
                                              QC
                                              H-
                                              QC
                                              CO
                                              CO


                                          CD  £
                                          CO  f_

                                          LU  ^

                                          ID  -*
                                          g  V

                                          LL.  ±

                                              Q_
                                              CO
                                              o
                                              s
                                              <
                                              z
                                              >-
6-13

-------
for dispersion modeling, for  plotting a pollution rose, for correlation with ambient air
sampling data,  and for  validation of complaints. As discussed earlier, most systems will
monitor wind direction and  wind velocity as a minimum, with possible  addition of a
temperature tower to obtain atmospheric stability information. Wind speed is measured
with an  anemometer,  and wind direction with a  wind  vane; a  temperature  tower is
equipped with resistance thermometers and thermocouples.
                                    TABLE 6-2
                        ABSORPTION SAMPLING DEVICES
Principle of operation
Simple gas-washing
bottles. Gas flows from
unrestricted opening
into solution. Glass,
conical or cylindrical
shape.

Modified gas-washing
bottles







Large bubbler traverses
path extended by spiral
glass insert.


Impingers. designed
principally for collection
of aerosols. Used for
collection of gases.
Restricted opening.
Fritted tubes available
which allow use as
bubbler.
Smog bubbler

Devices
Standard



Drechsel
Fleming
Fritted
bubbler




Glass bead
bubbler

Fisher
Milligan
bottle
Greiner-
Friedrichs
Greenburg
Smith

Midget




Fritted
bubbler
Capacity
(ml)
125-500



125-500
100
100-500




100-500


275


100-200

500


100




10-20

Sampling
rate
(1/min)
1-.5



.1-.5
.1-.5
.1-1.5




.1-.5


.1-.5


.1-.5

.1-.5


.1-.5




1.0-4.0

efficiency
90 - 100



90 - 100
90 - 100
95 - 100




90 - 100


90 - 100


90 - 100

90 - 100


90 - 100




95 - 100

Comment
Bubblers are large.
Reduction of sampling
rate increases efficiency-
Several units in series
raises efficiency.
Similar to above
Difficult to clean
Fritted tubes available
for simple gas-washing
items above. Smaller
bubblers provide in-
creased gas-liquid
contact.
Provides for longer
gas-liquid contact;
smaller bubbles.



Similar to Fisher
Milligan
Cylindrical shape









                                         6-14

-------
                                    TABLE 6-3
                      RECOMMENDED SAMPLING METHODS
    Pollutants
                                           Ambient sampling
    Manual procedure^
     Instrumental**
Sulfur dioxide (S0?)
Nitrogen dioxide (N02)
Carbon monoxide (CO)


Photochemical oxidants
(ozone)
Pararosaniline - colorimetric
(modified West Gaeke pro-
cedure)

Sodium hydroxide-sodium
arsonite method by A.A.
Christe et al. Analyst, 519-524
(1970)
Evacuated flask or bag with
nondispersive infrared

Neutral buttered potassium
iodide
Colorimetric (modified West
Gaeke procedure)
Coulo metric
Flame photometric
Colorimetric
Coulometric
Electrochemical
Chemiluminescent
Continuous sampling, non-
dispersive infrared

Chemiluminescent - specific
Coulometric - most instru-
ments
Colorimetric - not specific
for00
*Federal Register 36: 8186 April 30, 1971 (official recommendation).
**Hochheiser, Environmental Science and Technology, Volume 5-678,1971 (not an official
  recommendation).
6.4 Continuous Stack Monitoring

Continuous stack monitoring as applied  in industry is not to be confused with programs
of continuous air monitoring.  Continuous monitoring of ambient air is seldom conducted
by organizations other than control agencies or research groups, or in large-scale operations
such as those of the Tennessee Valley Authority. The required equipment is costly and a
high degree of technical skill is required for calibration, operation, and maintenance of the
automated sampler/analyzers. Continuous monitoring by an industry consists of monitoring
emissions at the source (stack) by means of a variety of detectors, which are described later
in this section.

The New Source Performance  Standards  (NSPS) require continuous  monitoring of specific
pollutants  by certain  industries (1). At present, the number of  industries required  to
monitor continuously is quite small.  Because continuous  monitoring provides more
comprehensive emissions data than are obtained by manual source test methods, the number
of industries required to install monitors  will probably continue to increase. Only those in-
                                        6-15

-------
dustries affected by the NSPS as of February 1977 are discussed here.  Since additional con-
tinuous monitoring may  be required by state and local regulations, it is suggested that in-
dustry officials maintain  contact with the local control agencies as to current and anticipat-
ed requirements.

In addition to  meeting NSPS, continuous emissions monitoring  can serve as a useful tool
for optimization of process and control  equipment (2).  Unlike  manual source tests,
continuous monitoring allows  the observation  of real-time changes in emissions while
adjustments are made  in process  and control equipment. Thus the process  operations can
be optimized to obtain and maintain maximum efficiency.

In many  industries, product  lost  up the  stack is profit blown away. This  is true of
sulfuric acid  plants and other industries. At petroluem refineries where excess particulate
emissions  from the catalyst regenerator of a catalytic cracking unit  may cause loss of
valuable  catalyst,  continuous monitoring  could prevent  such  losses (3).  Monitoring of
C02  or 02  in stack gases  of  a  power  plant can  lead to  improvements  in combustion
efficiency (2).  Monitoring also  serves as an alarm system to alert plant operators when a
process malfunction occurs. Primary zinc, lead, and copper smelters can use data obtained
from  properly  operated  continuous monitors to demonstrate compliance  (1).  If utilized
properly,  the investment in continous stack monitors not only  will  aid in meeting NSPS
requirements but also will pay dividends.

Only  industries required by the NSPS to continuously monitor  emissions,  as of February
1977, are considered in this section. Those industries and pollutants for which continuous
monitoring is now required are listed in Table  6-4.  Monitoring requirements for new or
modified  industries affected by NSPS are given in the Code  of Federal Regulations (CFR),
Vol.  40,  Part 60,  Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources.  (These require-
ments were also published in the Federal Register of October 6, 1975.)

Continuous   monitoring  systems  to meet  NSPS requirements  fall  into two categories:
opacity monitoring for particulates, and continuous (extractive and in-stack) monitoring for
gases. Both  systems  are described briefly in this section; detailed information on specific
systems can be obtained from the manufacturer. Regardless of which system is used, all as-
pects from location of the sampling point to the recording of data should he considered in
detail by  the purchaser before any purchase is made.  Savings on the original purchase are
often lost to repeated  maintenance of poorly designed and installed continuous monitoring
systems.

Industrial planners should consider continuous  monitoring  as a  process control technique
as well as an environmental monitoring requirement.  Continuous monitoring is expensive;
it requires   considerable attention,  on a  continuous basis, to calibration/certification
procedures,  operation and maintenance, and data handling. If  it  becomes necessary to
consider  continuous stack  monitoring, a systematic approach should be considered for all
aspects of the system. Such an approach is illustrated in Figure 6-7.
                                         6-16

-------
Data recording,  processing, presentation, and storage are all very important aspects of the
continuous monitoring program. There are many methods of data handling, as illustrated
in Figure 6-8.

     6.4.1 Opacity Monitoring for  Particulates

Opacity is a  measure of the  degree to which the emissions from a stack obscure the view
of an  object in the background. Opacity readings  (in percent) indicate the  visibility-
obscuring properties  of the  total gas stream,  not the particulates alone. The opacity
monitor does not provide a reading of particulate concentration (Mg/m3  or other units);
most  stack   monitoring  that does  measure particulate concentration is still  done by
manual methods. Sampling trains  incorporating  various procedures  collect a sample over
a specified period of time (e.g., a minimum of  1 to  2 hours); the  total sample collected
in this time  period  is called  an integrated sample, whose analysis yields a composite pic-
ture of the particulate concentrations during the sampling period.

Equipment   for  instrumental   continuous  monitoring  of  particulates  has  been  in
development  for several years.   A promising commercial unit now on the market uses a
filtration beta radiation attenuation technique.  This unit incorporates components for di-
                                       TABLE 6-4
                  INDUSTRY-MONITORING REQUIREMENT MATRIX
Facilities required to
monitor emissions
Fossil -fuel -fired steam
generator
Nitric acid plant
Sulfuric acid plant
Petroleum refinery
Primary copper smelter
Primary lead smelter
Primary zinc smelter
Steel plants, electric arc
furnace
Ferroalloy production
facility
Opacity
X



X
X
X
X
X
X
S02
X


X
X
X
X
X


N0x
X

X







02 or
C02
X









CFR
references
60.45

60.73
60.84
60.105
60.165
60.185
60.175
60.273
60.264
                                        6-17

-------
   cc
   UJ
CC
o
    O
    fr-
    ee
    LJJ
    O
UJ  X

    o
    LJJ

O  LJJ
LJJ  CO
    CO

O  |-
'Z.  Z

Em
O  uj

t  CC



    a
    LJJ
    CC


, t
< CO
|_UJ
CO \-
L



f
LJJ
CO
f


CERTIFIED
SYSTEM




1
MONITORING
SYSTEM


LOCAL


INDUSTRY
REQUIRES
EMISSION
MONITORING
Z Q
O Z LU
H  m
_] H 2 H 0 w
< — < ^ < CE §
^ n3 t--t— ^LLCL
LUfe S^U-O-W
Q^5 ^FnOCCUJ
LJJZ _1^^-
                                                                                                                   CO
                                                          6-18

-------
                                                    UJ

                                                    CO
                                                CO DC
                                                CO O
                                                LU t
                                                CC
                                                U- CO
                                                   ^
                                                   O
                                                   O
                                                   O
6-19

-------
lution, filtration,  detection of the attenuation of beta radiation, and recording of data.
Research and development of monitoring instrumentation is also producing other advanced
systems and new measurement techniques.  In this discussion, however, we are focusing on
the requirements set forth in the NSPS for industry, and therefore on the theory and uses
of opacity monitoring instruments, which are specified in those requirements.

In  manual determinations of opacity,  the degree of obscurity is determined by trained
personnel who visually observe the emissions plume. In commercial  opacity monitors, the
trained observers  are replaced by a  light source and a light detector. A  beam of light
from the source is directed through  the emissions to be measured and into the detector.
If  the emissions  do not obscure or diminish the  light, then  100 percent of  the light
reaches the detector and the opacity is zero. If the emissions completely obscure the light
so  that none  of it reaches the detector, then the opacity is 100 percent. By use of filters
that  absorb  known  percentages  of  light,  the monitor  can be calibrated to  determine
various degrees of opacity. Readings are corrected to stack exit conditions for comparison
with visually  observed opacity. Opacity monitors are also referred to as transmissometers
or smoke monitors.

Commercial opacity monitors are of two  types: single-ended  and  double-ended (Figure
6-9). Both types operate on the principal of measuring the amount of visible light being
absorbed by the emissions. On the double-ended monitor, the light source is located  on
one side of the stack and the detector on the other side, opposite the source. The light
beam makes  one  pass  through the  emissions  before  reaching  the detector.  The
double-ended opacity monitor has been in use the longest and is the least expensive. It
does, however, have some inherent  problems. Because the source  and detector are  on
opposite sides of  the stack, it is  difficult to maintain the fine degree of alignment that is
required for proper operation. Changes in line voltage between the source and detector will
cause changes in opacity readings.  Zero and span checks are more difficult with this type of
monitor than  with a single-ended system.

With the single-ended  opacity  system, the  light source and detector are located on  the
same side of  the  stack. A mirror or some type of reflecting device  is then located on  the
other side of the stack, opposite the source. A light beam from the source makes two
passes through the emissions  before reaching the detector.  This doubling of the light path
allows for increased sensitivity. Because both the light source and detector  are on  the
same side of  the  stack, it is  a  simple matter to  make  a relative  or  differential
measurement between the light  source intensity and the amount  of  light reaching  the
 detectors. Problems such as voltage variations and electronic drift are cancelled out in this
type of relative measurement.

In  both  types of opacity monitoring systems, the optical  windows require  a constant
 purging of clean air  to  prevent  buildup  of dust,  which  reduces sensitivity and induces
 errors in the  readings.
                                         6-20

-------
                              IO
                              2
                           tc2
                           O>
                           *t
                           oo
                           «
                           ^St
                           WJ <
                           EC"

                           < <
                           UJ UJ
                                                    o
                                                    UJ
                                                    P
                                                    LU
                                                    O
                                                    CO
                                                    CO
                                                 9 i
                                                 <° uj
                                                 UJ ^
                                                 a;uj

                                                 w -
                                                 — co
                                                    QC
                                                    O
                                                    LL
                                                    UJ

                                                    O


                                                    X
                                                    o
                                                    UJ
                                                    I-
6-21

-------
Opacity monitoring systems must be capable of measuring opacities at a minimum of once
every 10 seconds.  Average readings are to be recorded at least once every 6 minutes by
an appropriate strip-chart recorder or data-logging device.

Before being placed in operation, the opacity monitoring system must undergo 168  hours
of  performance testing. Calibration  is performed by  using certified filters, which give
opacity readings at low, mid, and high points. The specifications listed in Table 6-5 must
be met during the testing period.

Once an opacity  monitor  is put  into  operation, a record  of  each  consecutive 6-minute
average, calculated manually or automatically, must be kept for  reporting purposes. To
assure proper operation, zero and span checks are made daily.  Maintenance, cleaning, and
optical alignment are performed as needed.

                                     TABLE 6-5
            PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPACITY MONITORS
                Parameters
          Calibration error

          Zero drift (24 hours)

          Calibration drift (24 hours)

          Response time
 Specifications
< 3^ opacity

< 2% opacity

< 2% opacity

10 sec (maximum)
The  following questions should  be considered in selection  of a  site  for monitoring
opacity.

     1.   Is the monitor located so that the representative emissions from the designated
         process will be measured?

     2.   Will  the  emissions being  measured  be representative of those being emitted
         from the  stack?

     3.   Is the site easily accessible?

     4.   Will the monitor be protected from adverse conditions?

Because at many facilities only certain specific sources must be continuously monitored,
site locations are made in relation to these processes. If the process has a control device,
the opacity monitor  must be  located after the device. Facilities with multiple sources
using a  common  stack may be able to use a single monitor if  all sources are subject to
the same  standards. Where multiple sources are  using the same stack but are subject to
different standards, individual opacity monitors must be used.
                                        6-22

-------
Monitoring  locations must be  selected  such that the  facility  can demonstrate  that  a
representative  sample of  the  emissions  is  being observed.  Areas to  be avoided  are
locations where stratification  or layering of dust in the gas  stream may  occur and areas
where  water droplets will  cause interference. Stratification is common in  horizontal ducts
as the heavier  particles tend to settle toward the bottom (Figure 6-10). Other  areas to be
avoided are sharp turns, obstructions, or changes in the  cross-sectional area of the duct.
Junction of two or more  gas streams will  also cause stratification, even in vertical ducts.
Any site  under consideration should be thoroughly tested for stratification prior to the
installation of an opacity monitor.

Water  droplets in  the gas stream will  have the same  effect  on the opacity  monitor as
particulates. If water droplets are a problem, alternative monitoring requirements must be
considered.

Accessibility to the opacity monitor is not only good  sense but is a requirement of the
NSPS  (1). Personnel should be able to service the monitor without spending unnecessary
time looking for a ladder  or climbing over  equipment. Some zero and span checks  require
daily visits to the monitoring  site; some  opacity monitoring models conduct zero  and
span checks automatically.

Frequent changes in optical alignment  will require unnecessary maintenance.  In order to
minimize this problem, opacity monitors  should be  located in areas free from excessive
vibration. Another cause  of alignment  problems is thermal  expansion and contraction of
the monitor supports.

Even though most opacity monitors are  designed to  withstand adverse conditions,  it  is
best to provide adequate shelter for both the instrument  and personnel.

     6.4.2 Continuous Monitoring for Gases

Current technology for continuous  monitoring  of stack  gases  is in a state of flux.  Most
units are prone  to interferences from pollutants other than  that being analyzed, and they
are also subject to electronic instability.

 The  general  considerations for a continuous monitor  of gaseous pollutants are  listed  in
 Table 6-6.

      6.4.3 Instrument Specifications and Certification

 The EPA has issued specifications for  monitoring instruments that are used to determine
 compliance with the NSPS for  specific  industries; these are listed in Table 6-7.

 Each   continuous  monitor  installed  must  be  tested  to  certify  that it   meets the
 requirements  of Vol. 40 CFR Part 60 (as published in the Federal Register, October 6,
 1975). Typical of these certifications are  the  requirements for  S02  monitors on sulfuric
                                          6-23

-------
 0,
I

o
  " o

   o ft .
             o .
                    o -
          '  O
»  0  -
       -0
 HORIZONTAL DUCT, STRATIFICATION DUE TO SETTLING
                             0  e



                           • 0«
                               O  O
                            VtT
   JUNCTIONS, STRATIFICATION DUE TO POOR MIXING
         .   6 . *
                               . 9
                             ' e
                           * * •• *o
 TURNS AND OBSTRUCTIONS, STRATIFICATION DUE TO

     INERTIA OF PARTICLES AND TURBULENCE



                 FIGURE6-10

      STRATIFICATION OF PARTICLES IN DUCTS
                    6-24

-------
                                     TABLE 6-6
              CRITERIA FOR CONTINUOUS MONITORS FOR GASES
    Specificity


    Sensitivity, range


    Stability

    Precision, accuracy



    Sample average time


    Reliability, feasibility



    Calibration


    Response
     Effect of ambient
      conditions

     Data output
Response should be only to trace material(s) of
interest.

Method must be sensitive over the concentration
range of interest.

Sample must be stable in the analyzer.

Results must be reproducible, and must represent
the actual stack concentration when compared with
the reference method gases.

Method must fit into the required sample averaging
time for control.

Instrument investment and maintenance costs,
analysis time, and manpower must be consistent
with needs and resources.

Instrument should not drift; calibration and other
corrections should be automatic.

Instrument must function rapidly enough to
record significant process changes as they occur.

Changes in temperature and humidity must not
affect the accuracy of the observed results.

For some  applications, output of the analyzer
should be in a machine-readable format.
acid plants. Certification of the continuous  monitor's accuracy  must be  completed in
the seven steps outlined below:

     Step 1.   Analysis of calibration gases. The monitoring instrument must be calibrated
              at three concentrations of sulfur dioxide: 0, 50 percent, and 90 percent of
              span. Each calibration gas must be analyzed in triplicate by the EPA ref-
              erence method.

     Step 2.   Calibration check.  The three calibration gases must be analyzed  by the
              monitor for a total of 15 readings.
                                        6-25

-------
     Step 3.    Zero drift check. The  zero  must be offset by at least  10 percent of the
               span to check negative  zero  drift.

     Step 4.    Operational  test.  The  monitor must  be operated an additional period to
               verify proper operation.

     Step 5.    Accuracy test. Gas samples  are extracted from the stack and analyzed for
               S02 by  the manual reference  method. At  least nine samples must  be
               collected.

     Step 6.    Field calibration  check. The zero  and span drifts must be  checked for a
               minimum of 15,  two-hour periods. This check can be  simultaneous with
               the accuracy test.

     Step 7.    Response time check. With  the monitor in  place,  the  time  for the
               instrument to respond  from a zero reading to maximum concentration is
               measured.

Typical procedures used in a certification program for an S02 monitor are as follows:

     1.  Certification Procedure  Development

         After  a  detailed  review of  the monitoring requirements, a stepwise procedure
         will be  prepared  for certification of  the S02 monitor. This procedure will be
         specific  to plant  requirements  and operations,  and will include  log sheets to
         record data from each step of the certification.

     2.  Calibration Check of Monitor

         First,  the standard gases will  be sampled and analyzed  to verify  their S02
         concentrations.  A  minimum of three samples  is  required by EPA.  Each
         analyzed concentration must be  within 20 percent of the mean for that gas.
         After  analysis  of  the standard gases, the  monitor must measure the  gases at
         least 15 times  to  verify its calibration. The monitor's response time will also be
         measured a minimum of three times (Steps 1, 2, and 7).

     3.  Operational Check of Monitor

         After  installation, the  monitor must be operated  for at least 2 weeks for an
         initial check of all operations. The first week is solely for checking the zero
         drift.  The second week of  operation is required to demonstrate  the monitor's
         initial reliability (Steps 3 and 4).

     4.  Field Accuracy Check of Monitor

         The accuracy of  the monitor is  established by  collecting samples of the  stack
         gas, analyzing  the samples  by  the reference  method  for  SO2  and  comparing
                                         6-26

-------
       the  analytical  results  with the monitor averages for the sampling periods. A
       minimum of 9 samples over a 9-hour period will be collected for laboratory
       analysis. Concurrent with this sampling, the monitor will be checked for zero
       drift and span drift. The drifts will be determined for at least fifteen, 2-hour
       periods.

                                  TABLE 6-7
                        INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATIONS
S02 and NOX Monitors:
   Accuracy*


   Calibration error*


   Zero drift (2-hour)*

   Zero drift (24-hour)*

   Calibration drift (2-hour)*

   Calibration drift (24-hour)*

   Response time

   Operational period

02 or C02  Monitors:

   Zero drift (2-hour)*

   Zero drift (24-hour)*

   Calibration drift (2-hour)*

   Calibration drift

   Response time

   Operational period
< 20% of mean value of reference method
test data

< 5% of each (50%, 90%) calibration gas
mixture

2% of span

2% of span

2% of span

2.5% of span

15 minutes maximum

168  hours maximum
  0.4% Go or CO,
<0.5%00 or CO,
<0.4%02 orC02
<0.5%02 orC02
10 minutes
168 hours
   ^Expressed as a sum of absolute mean value plus 95% confidence interval of a series of tests.
                                      6-27

-------
     5.   Report Preparations

         All data generated will be tabulated and reduced to a format for comparison
         with  EPA specifications. The results of laboratory  analyses will be compared
         directly  with  the monitor record. The final  report will include  the  data
         collected, calculations, and  certification of the acceptability  of the monitor.

It is apparent that industries must expend considerable time and money in coordinating
the certification of stack monitoring equipment to  meet the NSPS.

Misinformation  about continuous stack monitoring is widespread. Because some in-stack
monitors (such as the transmissometers) are available, many  persons believe that the
average monitoring system also is an in-stack device attached  to a detector and recorder.
Most stack monitoring  systems,  however,  are extractive  rather  than in-stack devices.
Several pollutants  can be  analyzed using an extractive system, whereas most in-stack moni-
tors are limited to analyzing a single pollutant.  The extractive system, however, presents
a serious problem  of gas conditioning.  For proper operation, the detector must receive gas
that is at ambient pressure and temperature, with negligible moisture content.  Thus, in an
extractive  system,  the  gas entering the detector must  be  preconditioned  to prevent
erroneous readings and/or malfunction of the detector.

The average detector for gas monitoring is small and costs in the range of $3,500 to $5,500.
         D              o            o                         ^
The conditioning  system, however, requires both a considerable amount of space and a
sizable investment. The  cost of the  conditioning system may well  be two to three  times
the cost of the detector.  Care  must be taken to select a conditioning system that is compat-
ible with the detection device.

Another significant factor in stack monitoring for gases is location of the monitor; as in
particulate sampling, the  stratification  of gases in ducting and stack  must be considered.

Most stack sampling  (manual  or continuous) is  conducted at  a location  where there  is
undisturbed flow. The concept of isokinetic sampling for particulates  does  not necessarily
apply  to gaseous sampling. It is advisable to conduct a series of exploratory tests across a
stack  to determine whether the  gas being measured  is uniform  in  concentration  or  is
stratified.

If  the  exploratory  examination  reveals that the  gases are  stratified, another location
should be  considered. In gas  sampling, the monitor  may be placed at, or following, a
turbulent zone, so that  mixing of the gases takes place before the gas stream is sampled.

Sulfur Dioxide Instrumentation -  Many  types of instruments are in current use for contin-
uous analysis of S(>2  gas, including spectrometers and electrochemical sensors.  Wet chemi-
cal analyzers are not practical for stack monitoring, since they are subject to fouling by mist
and particulates and to interference from unremoved gases and water vapor.
                                         6-28

-------
The spectrometer using the infrared (IR) or ultraviolet (UV) region of the SO2 spectrum
is the  monitor most commonly used, since  other types of monitors require withdrawal of
a sample from the stack. These monitors use the stack as their optical paths and thereby
provide  cross-stack  average  measurements. The  S02 absorption spectrum is  matched
against a reference pattern in such a way that other materials do not interfere.

Electrochemical instruments can detect both sulfur dioxide  and nitrogen  oxides. A fuel
cell sensor generates an electric current by electro catalytic oxidation or reduction of S02;
the current is directly proportional to the S02  concentration  in the sample of the gas
stream. These sensors must be replaced periodically  to provide accurate readings.

The inspector  can calibrate  the instruments by  inserting known  concentrations  of
calibration gas  into the  analyzer. Two known  concentrations can be carried in small
sample cylinders and  calibrations  performed according  to the  manufacturer's specifica-
tions at  operating temperatures and pressures. Periodic maintenance is required to remove
dust, oil, and  condensation from the system.

Nitrogen Oxides and Other Instrumentation - The NSPS for NOX emissions from new and
modified steam  generators apply to both NO and N02, although less than 5 percent of the
NOX is present as N02. Therefore, measurement of  the NO content of the stack gas is ade-
quate for monitoring purposes (unless too much excess air is introduced into the exhaust gas
stream).

Nitrogen  oxides  instrumentation  includes photometric and  spectroscopic analyzers,
electrochemical  devices, and chemiluminescent detectors.  Wet analysis instruments are not
practical for in-stack monitoring.

Photometric   and  spectroscopic  analyzers measure light   transmission  at  a  specific
wavelength. Since  these  instruments   depend  upon  light transmission, they may give
erroneous  readings as  a  result  of absorption of  radiation by particulate matter  or
condensates in combustion gases.

Electrochemical instruments, discussed earlier  concerning monitoring of S02, may give
high N0x readings as a result of the presence of S02. An absorber can be installed  at the
sample inlet system to remove S02 from the sample.

Nitric  oxide  is  detected by the chemiluminescent reaction of NO with ozone-producing
light (Figure 6-11). The  intensity  of  the  light, which is detected by a photo multiplier
tube, is proportional to the NO concentration. The  instrument is calibrated with standard
concentrations of NO by techniques similar  to those mentioned for S02  calibration.

These  are  the most common  instruments  in current use. Depending upon the source,
additional continuous monitoring instruments may  be required.  For  combustion sources,
it  may be  necessary to determine combustion efficiency of excess air.  This  is  done by
                                        6-29

-------
monitoring carbon  dioxide  or  carbon monoxide by nondispersive infrared  (NDIR)
detection, or  by monitoring oxygen with paramagnetic techniques. A schematic of the
NDIR system is illustrated  in Figure 6-12. At refineries, petroleum storage facilities, or
bulk loading  facilities  for  organic  chemicals  (all of which  must  be monitored for
hydrocarbons), a gas chromatographic system is used. A typical schematic is illustrated in
Figure 6-13.
NOX GAS FLOW




OZONE GENERATOR


hv-
	 »

                         REACTION
                         CHAMBER
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
     TUBE
                                                      SPECTROMETER
                                                                         READOUT
                      REACTION:
                      NO + 03 -* N02 + 02
                                   FIGURE6-11
                  SCHEMATIC OF CHEMILUMINESCENT TECHNIQUE
                                      NDIR SPECTROMETER'
                         RECORDER
           CO2 GAS FLOW
                          CONDITIONER
                                        STANDARD GAS
            'SET AT A GIVEN WAVE LENGTH FOR A PARTICULAR GAS
                                   FIGURE 6-12
            SCHEMATIC FOR NONDISPERSIVE INFRARED DETECTION
                                      6-30

-------
                     CHROMATOGRAPH

	 — 	 M
H 	
~»
CONDITIONER
REACTION:
HC+ FLAME

£

ION DETECTOR

^ rt





H2 FLAME ELECTROMETER READOUT
. • {CHROMATOGRAPH)
•* HC(ION)
FLAME IONIZATION DETECTOR
                                 FIGURE 6-13
                      SCHEMATIC OF CHROMATOGRAPH
6.5 References

1.   Turner, D.B.,  Workbook of Atmospheric Dispersion Estimates, U.S. Department of
    Health, Education, and Welfare, Cincinnati, Ohio, 1970.

2.   Munn, R.E., Descriptive Micrometeorology,  Chapter 13, pp. 118-128, Academic
    Press, New York, New York, 1966.

3.   Slade,  D.H., Meteorology  and Atomic Energy, U.S. Atomic Energy  Commission,
    Office  of Information Services, Washington, D.C., July 1968.
                                      6-31

-------

-------
                                    CHAPTER 7

                           THE CONTINUING PROGRAM
 7.1  Introduction

 Following the establishment of an  air  quality management program and a successful
 compliance test, an industrial organization must conduct an active, continuing program
 to maintain compliance with regulatory requirements. Some of the routine activities of a
 state and/or local regulatory agency can have a direct effect on the operation of a contin-
 uing compliance  program.   These control activities include scheduling inspections for per-
 mit  renewal, patrolling industry operations and investigating complaints,  and  scheduling
 additional source testing, as circumstances may require.

 In order  to meet the  continuing requirements of regulatory agencies, industrial  planners
 must consider:

     1.   Plant and control equipment operation,

     2.   Equipment maintenance,

     3.   Changes in processes and control equipment, and

     4.   Testing to verify compliance with emission standards.

 This chapter  describes the  interactions  that  can be expected with  various  regulatory
 agencies  and  the  several  facets  of  an  effective industrial program  that will  ensure
 compliance with  regulations and will promote  acceptance by citizens of the community.

 Much  of  the  activity of industrial  air  pollution control programs to  date has been
 directed toward  installation of  air  handling and control systems that will enable the
 industry to:

     1.   Comply with state and local  pollution control regulations and ordinances,

     2.   Meet federal NSPS,

     3.   Assist in  meeting the air quality goals set forth in state implementation and
          maintenance plans, and

     4.   Comply with the intent of the nondegradation  planning concept.

The  Council on  Environmental Quality, in their seventh annual report to the  President,
indicated  that the cost of operating and maintaining air pollution  control equipment for
industrial  sources alone would  be $1.2 billion in 1975  and predicted an increase to $3.1

                                        7-1

-------
billion in  1984. The cumulative cost for operation  and maintenance from 1975 through
1984 would be  $21.7 billion. This  expense may  be significantly increased in many
situations  because of  a  lack of  information  regarding  installation, operation,  and
maintenance of control equipment.

     7.1.1   Process and Raw Material Changes

Often  an industry can reduce its air  pollutant emissions  by process changes, as when a
paper mill  adds  a black  liquor oxidation system for  odor control, or by a change  of
process materials,  as  when  a paint spray  operation substitutes a solvent containing
nonreactive rather than reactive hydrocarbons.

A combination of process modification and raw material changes might  be substituted for
processes and materials now used in making  water-base paints; powder  coatings might be
substituted for solvent-based paints.   Many industrial operators such as printers, lithogra-
phers, and makers of cans and barrels  can use coating solutions of this type.  Pilot studies
are needed to determine the feasibility  of such  changes and to maximize possible economies.


Process Changes-Industry is looking  toward  process changes as a  way to reduce the load
on pollution control systems or, preferably,  to eliminate  the problem  at its source. The
kraft paper  industry is discussed here as an example of pollution reduction by changes in
the process. For  years the odors from kraft paper mills have been  a source of community
nuisance  complaints. One source of  odors is the direct  contact evaporator prior to the
recovery furnace. The normal flow of black liquor from the digester after blowdown is to
the multiple-effect evaporators  for  concentration,  then  on  to  the cascade  evaporator
(direct-contact evaporator) for further  concentration, and  then  to the recovery  furnace
for product recovery.   Add-on control devices used  to  control odors from this process  are
becoming  very expensive,  and any further  reduction  in  air emissions  probably  must be
accomplished through process modification.

 The kraft mill is just one of many examples of process modifications and in-plant changes
 that reduce or eliminate emissions.  Pollutant emissions  are  affected  not only by major
 process  changes of the type  just described,  but also  by relatively minor modifications
 within a  process  operation. This is  shown  in Table  7-1,  which defines the effects on
 emissions  of such process variables as fuel temperature and amount of  excess air.

 Raw Material Changes-A  good example of  a raw  material change that can affect many
 smaller industrial operations is the type and  quality of fossil fuel burned in the boiler. As
 conversions were  made  from  coal firing to  firing of oil  and gas, it was believed that
 emissions  would  continue to  decrease. In recent years,  however,   with  the  crisis in
 availability  and cost  of  fuels,  many  installations  are making fuel  substitutions in  the
 reverse  direction. Several  factors  are   involved. First is the conversion  of equipment
 required for an oil-burning installation to burn  coal.  Second, emission control modifica-
 tions usually  are  required to prevent  an increase in emissions  after  the substitution of
 coal for a cleaner fuel.
                                           7-2

-------
                                    TABLE 7-1
              EFFECTS ON EMISSIONS BY INCREASING VALUES OF
         SELECTED OPERATING VARIABLES (FUEL OIL COMBUSTION^
Operating variable
Percent load
Fuel temperature
Fuel pressure
Excess air
Percent C02 in stack
Dirt in firebox
Flue gas recirculation
Flame temperature
Stack temperature
Percent sulfur in oil
Percent ash in oil
Effect of increase on pollutants
NOX
I
D
D
I
D
I
D
I
—
—

S02
_
__
—
—
—
—
_
—
—
I
"
S03
I
I
I
I
D
D
—
I
I
I
D
Participates

D
D
D
I
I
I
D
D
I
I
       *I  - increase
        D  - decrease
        —  - no change

     7.1.2  Process and Control Equipment Malfunctions

Emissions  from  an  industrial process  may meet emission  standards  during  normal
operation but far exceed  the  standards  when a malfunction occurs. Malfunctions result
from either equipment breakdown or operator error (See Figure 7-1).

Not all  malfunctions substantially  increase  emissions.  For example, in a  combustion
process such as operation of an incinerator or a cement kiln, a failure or malfunction of the
refractory would not  cause excess emissions but a change in combustion air flow could in-
crease emissions. The factors of concern in regard to malfunctions are:

     1.   Frequency of occurence,

     2.   Duration,

     3.   Effect on emission rate, and

     4.   Means of minimizing excess emissions.

Various factors related  to each industry and  process  can affect emission  rates from
malfunctions. Typical malfunctions that can occur with an incinerator are listed in Table
7-2.
                                       7-3

-------
                 INDUSTRIAL
                  PROCESS
       MALFUNCTION
        NORMAL
       OPERATION
            1
EQUIPMENT
BREAKDOWN
OPERATOR
 ERROR

  PROCESS
 EQUIPMENT
                     i
 CONTROL
  DEVICE
     i
                                               EMISSIONS
                                                REMAIN
                                              UNCHANGED
                                                EXCESS
                          FIGURE 7-1
            TYPES OF VARIATION IN PROCESS OPERATION
                             74

-------
   CD

   W

   E-
   Cfi

   CTJ
   w
CO
   p
   fa

w
Means to mini mix
excess emissions


Effect on
emission rate

e
Duratio


<*-
O co
^C
e £
V U.
3 3
O- 0

CO
CO
CO
"c
3 u
s- be
I 1
4-
e
4-1
re
Unit repaired
shutdown.
C co
"re 3

— re
0 W
n gps
•3 g'l|
S- c w o
QflJ r* «
is .5 CU





*
re
&
O
re
re
Q


Immediately curtail
refuse charging
operations.
o
he
Requires bypassinj
emission controls.
-3
i« g
About one he
incinerator ca
brought off-li





4-1
«
3
cr
<§
«*-
c
HH


CO
be

3
53 co
'o |
Breakdown
cooling syst

a;
Usually results fron:
long-term negligenc
of maintenance.


Dependent upon
amount of air and
location.

l-gf
a. s a
Results from
maintenance i
will continue





1








Ui
Excessive ai
infiltration








corrected.
















c
o
Air flow redistribut


May be substantial


CO
re
t-
o
i— i





4J
to
cr
CO
<+•
HH






fc-
G.
i-i
•3
-d
So
3
s:


by dampers.
























o
5=
re
6JD
W
3
CO


re
o
3
CO
'C
re




u
re
CU

CO
u
.1
*43
"re
V
u
C/5







CO
Precipitator
o

re C
||
CL, co
£ 3


substantial.


o
4-1
-a ' j.

£ -fi
're b£
"5 Js
CC 5r
J c
= n
CO (J
^ 4-
S 'S
s- 3


S
"3
«
O
««^^

(§

4-
re
>-
re
Q.
u
JM



CO
3 _o
O i
+* 3 B
0 n _g
I c *o
3 . re cp .
£ •£ ° .h *
C '*— ^^ ^ 3
« * *3 co ®
S > w £. -c


c
•^ '3
"g £
O t.
a. o
co "S
'£ .& s
3 « .S
Ss-S 2
to
CO
1/1 rt
£ £
CO U

M ^ 4-
&JD n* *^
s .f S
O« T3 c
Q- i_ O
2 o -js
?• e w
C *" a;
V V «
00°-
;: »: wi
JH CO td
^
"re
Check bags periodic
=3
'S
Air contaminants


fi
o
j=
JD
(— H
(U
o
c
t-
t-
3
U
o
re








CO
h
're
re

tJ
C
re
cc
^a
re

-------
To correct a malfunction in the air pollution control system, the entire process is either
shut down or the control  device is bypassed.  When the malfunction is in the process
(depending upon its severity and its effect on air emissions), operation will continue until
the normal shutdown period or the process will be shut down for temporary or complete
repair. The process may also continue  to  operate, but it may be necessary to bypass the
control device. Certain types of malfunctions  cause  a temperature increase or excess
moisture that could adversely affect a baghouse  as well as the air emissions.

Malfunctions often occur during the initial  startup of a process.  During this time most
turnkey  plants and  control  equipment are under warranty; the equipment company/
contractor should  make the necessary  adjustments or  modifications  that will enable the
system to  meet the design capacity of the plant and the emission  control guarantees.
Generally,  the purchaser  withholds monies during  this initial startup  period  until the
process and/or control equipment are functioning satisfactorily and the guarantees are
fulfilled. With respect to  guarantees on air pollution  control equipment it  is important
that:

     1.   The air emission  test procedures specified in the  guarantee are acceptable  to all
          of the regulatory agencies involved; and

     2.   The emission limitations stipulated in the guarantee are  acceptable now and in
          the forseeable future, to all of the regulatory agencies involved.

     7.1.3  Startup/Shutdown and Upset Operating Conditions

Often a  malfunction results in the temporary shutdown of a process. The  length  of the
shutdown may have a marked effect on the emissions, as  in the shutdown  of a sulfuric
acid  plant. As listed in Table 7-3, the longer a sulfuric  acid plant is shut  down, the
greater will be the sulfur dioxide emissions during startup.
                                    TABLE 7-3
                     EFFECT OF SHUTDOWN DURATION ON
              EFFLUENT S02 CONCENTRATIONS DURING STARTUP
Shutdown duration,
hours
<1
1-2
2-6
6-10
10-15
15+
Peak S02 during startup,
ppm by volume
185
520
1,920
1,600
2,250
2,970
                                         7-6

-------
In  most  industrial  processes, the  shutdown poses  no  particular  problem  if normal
operating procedures are followed. Shutdowns  of most processes do not  cause excess
emissions. Upset  conditions are generally documented on forms such as that illustrated in
Figure 7-2.

A cold startup of an industrial process will generally result in  excess emissions  until the
process reaches  a stable condition for a given production  rate.  At startup of a power
plant,  the particulate emissions and opacity readings will be higher than normal and will
continue high until the operation is stabilized (see Figure  7-3).  The factors involved in
stability of operation include  operating temperature, feed  rates, air flow, and  chemical
reactions.  The  predominant  types  of  air  pollution  control equipment installed on
industrial processes  are:  (1) baghouse  filters and electrostatic  precipitators (ESP)  for
control of particulates, and (2) scrubbers for control of gaseous  pollutants.

Procedures for startup of a baghouse system depend upon the equipment  and the process.
An important basic  guideline for any process  in which hot moist gases are generated is to
preheat the baghouse.   This is done  to prevent condensation which results in mudded
bags. Mudded bags must either be  dry-cleaned or replaced. The other condensation hazard
is corrosion of the baghouse materials. After  the baghouse is preheated, the process  can
be put into full operation and  all functions of the baghouse can be operated. In processes
where  the  acid dewpoint is of concern, the baghouse should be bypassed during startup
until the acid dewpoint has been passed.

Startup of an ESP  is more complex, requiring a pre-startup inspection as well as specific
startup procedures.  Details  of the pre-startup inspection,  routine startup, and routine
shutdown are given in Appendix D.

7.2  Control Equipment Maintenance

Although installation of control  equipment can aid in  maintaining compliance with
emission regulations, continuing  compliance  will  not be  realized unless the control
systems are properly operated and maintained.  Industries in  the NSPS categories must
regularly submit  reports to  EPA  on emission  violations  and production  rates. These
reports will reflect satisfactory compliance efforts only  where the  industry conducts a
systematic operation and maintenance program, including  the following procedures:

     1.  Early detection of malfunctions,

     2.  Prediction and prevention of equipment failures,

     3.  Identification and correction of problems as they occur,

     4.   Prevention of damage to equipment, and

     5.   Reduction of emissions, with increase in product recovery.
                                         7-7

-------
               SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA APCD —METROPOLITAN ZONE

              ENFORCEMENT DIVISION - UPSET/BREAKDOWN REPORT
Report No.	Time Firm Reported to HQ	Date_
Company Name		 	
Address	                                          City
Sector                     ~    Phone No(s)
All of the following questions must be answered in order to evaluate this Upset/Breakdn.

 1.  Description:                  	
    Unanticipated Process Upset  /	/     Operational Change       /  _/
    Equipment Failure           /	/     Startup/Shutdown          /   /
    Utility System Failure        /  /     Scheduled Maintenance    /   /
    Accidental Fire              T'^ I     Variance No.	
    Other (describe)	 ^ _^_	_	
 2.  Equipment description                                                   ~	
 3.  Permit or Application No(s)	                                        ._	
 4.  Arrival time at plant	Person contacted                 Title            	
 5.  Type of contaminants emitted?	,	
 6.  Permit or A/C conditions violated"?Describe                                  	
 7.  Estimated volume and/or weight of contaminants emitted, if available^
 8.  Visible emissions: Opacity	Time	 Length of plume_
 9.  Odors.  Description	   	
10. Intensity                  Wind direction           Speed
11. Description of violations observed or suspected     	
12. Was a violation notice issued?      Notice number        Rule or Sec.
13. Did the excessive emission(s) result from operator error or improper operating or
    maintenance procedures?  Describe (why)	
14. Were all reasonable steps taken to correct the condition ieading to the excessive
    emissions and to minimize the emission itself?  Describe action taken	
15.  When was company first aware of UpsetTBreakdown                         ~
16.  Starting time of incident causing excessive emissions or odors
     Estimated total duration of incident	
17.  Estimated duration of emissions	
18.  Can equipment be shut down immediately without creating a hazard, or without
     causing a hardship to the firm or its employees ?  Yes  /   /   No T~'l
19.  Will equipment be shut down?      Yes /   /    No /   /
20.  Can it be operated at a reduced rate?
21.  What effect would shutdown or cutback have on total plant operation?
                                                                            40D504R
                                     FIGURE 7-2
                        UPSET/BREAKDOWN REPORT FORM
                                          7-8

-------
22.  Are operating records available?  Yes I  /   No 7  /  What do they indicate?	

23.  Describe measures which can or have been taken to reduce the frequency, duration,
    and intensity of these incidents and the time table for taking these measures	
24. Does company have a preventative maintenance program?
25. How is it being followed?	
26.  Were any samples taken?
27.  Describe:  Sample	                Source
28. Was equipment in operation?
29. Were complaints received?          Complaint numbers
30. Number of nuisance complaint forms received
31. Will company file for a variance ?	  WhenT"
32. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
    (Use I. R. for further additional information)

    Inspector's Signature	Departure Time

                             SUPERVISOR'S REVIEW
    Should reinspection be made?	By whom ?	When
    Are all breakdown criteria meT?Yes 7  T  No~7  7 Issue notice of viol?
    Supervisor's recommendations or summary                             ~~
Ex-parte variance filed	Variance requested from	      	
                                                          rule(s) or section(s)
What final action was taken?
Immediate Supv. Signature	 Date
Immediate Head Inspector's Signature'                            Date"
Plant Supv.  Signature	                             Date'
Head Inspector Signature	  Date"
Reviewed  by Asst. Chief                                         Date
                                 FIGURE 7-2 (Com.)
                       UPSET/BREAKDOWN REPORT FORM
                                        7-9

-------
            \
            \
              \
              \
                \
                 \
                    \
                      \
                        \
                                       o
                                       o
                                       CO
UJ

N
                                       O
                                       o


u
O
CO
3
0)
Z
'o
iforcement
c
LJJ
O
>*-
"5
3
r™
CD
^
^^
c
o
u
CD
Q.
in
C



£
co
CD
CO
^3
0}
LL
3
U-
'3!
ui
O
LL.
CO
E
co
•o
C
co
4->
CO
01
u
c
co
E
o
>*-
OJ
Q_


u
0>
en
C
o

tj
cu
•M
O
ol
~co
•M
C
01
£
c
o
'5
c
HI
co"
^

i/T
L
O
•4-"
co
09
C
u
CJ
CO
LJJ
CC
_
LJ_





LT)
r^
C3J
CD
3
.a
U-
ta
CM
O
O
LO
r^*

^^^^
o
CO

^£
a.
LU
ACHIEVE ON-LINE LOAD DEMAND
O
H
LJJ
P

D_
1-
CC
H
co
Q
UJ
CC
^
^1
a
LJJ
CC








RED STEAM GENERATORS
1 1
LL.
_J
LJJ
U_
•
— •*
CO
CO
o
LL
CC
O
LL














                                              a:
CO
         CO
          NOiivznmvisoisanoH
                            7-10

-------
Industrial managers should also be  aware of the benefits  of such  a program,  which may
include:

     1.    Reduction of operating costs through reduction of operator time, power, fuel,
          services, equipment replacement, and parts inventory,

     2.    Compliance with emission regulations/standards,

     3.    Extension of operating life of control equipment, and

     4.    Recovery of valuable products.

Preventive maintenance  is  more  efficient  and  more  economical  than repair  after
breakdown and also  keeps  production moving. Preventive maintenance includes  estab-
lishing priorities,  organizing the  maintenance system, scheduling, and checking control
costs. A systematic approach to operation and maintenance of typical control equipment
is shown  schematically  in Figure 7-4.  Some of the items that should be part  of a system
maintenance inspection  for air pollution control systems are listed  below:

     1.    Air infiltration
          a.   Process equipment,
          b.   Breaching and ducts,
          c.   Access doors and panels, and
          d.   Expansion joints.

     2.    Induced-draft fan
          a.   Vibration,
          b.   Bearing temperature,
          c.   Bearing lubrication,
          d.   Coupling lubrication,
          e.   V-Belt condition,
          f.   Motor bearing lubrication,
          g.   Foundation bolts, and
          h.   Variable speed drive.

     3.    Thermal insulation
          a.   Integrity, and
          b.   Cold spots.

     4.    Dampers
          a.   Function, and
          b.   Lubrication.
                                         7-11

-------
L— TROURI F — -
U_ -
°c
SELECTIOt
1— CORRECTIVE _J

' ROUTINE
INSPECTION


*
ELECTROSTATIC
0 SCRUBBER PRECIPITATOR
*- _.. „, _ . .
§ 1 1
I
OPERATION OR
MAINTENANCE
PROBLEM
1
4 4
IN-HOUSE OUTSIC
ASSESSMENT ASSISTA
1?? J
3° 1
s5j= l
E^
3S CONSULTANT
*
f - 1
1
CONTRA

g 4 1
0 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE
* CREW MAN U-

r~


L_


t
^
BAGHOUSE
_J

..
2
4 P
EQUIPMENT ^
MANUFACTURER Z
LIJ
*

CTOR 1

~~*
IN-HOUSE
riLITY CREWS
1
4 4
MECHANICAL UTILITY
4
•
                      FIGURE 7-4
SYSTEMATIC APPROACH TO TYPICAL AIR POLLUTION CONTROL
        EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
                          7-12

-------
     5.   Temperature elements
         a.   Thermocouples,
         b.   Pyrometers, and
         c.   Hot wires.

     6.   Pressure sensors
         a.   Taps and lines, and
         b.   Transmitters.

We have considered  some  of the ways  in  which process operation can affect pollutant
emissions.  Similarly,  the  maintenance of process equipment  strongly affects the process
effluent, since malfunction of this equipment can virtually negate the effectiveness of the
air  pollution  control system.  The  detailed  discussion  that  follows  concerns  the
maintenance  of  control  equipment  rather  than of  process equipment.  Further,  it  is
limited  to  the devices that are most efficient in control of fine particulates: the baghouse
filter, the  venturi scrubber, and the  electrostatic precipitator. These are the units most
often installed  in industrial  facilities for  the purpose  of  achieving and maintaining
compliance with current  and possible future regulations. Systems for control of gaseous
pollutants  include those based  on adsorption,  combustion, and oxidation techniques. An
afterburner which incinerates  solvent fumes  is shown in Figure  7-5. These  are  to  be
considered in industrial guides for control of process gases.

In describing the maintenance of these three major pollution  control systems, this section
first discusses briefly the  operation  of the system, then presents such factors as inspection
procedures,  trouble-shooting  and  corrective  measures,  spare parts requirements,  and
manpower requirements.  These are discussed in enough detail that managers of industrial
operations controlled by  these devices can visualize the extent of maintenance time/cost
required to keep them  operating efficiently.

     7.2.1.  The Baghouse

Basically, a baghouse is a large metal box divided into two chambers or plenums, one for
dirty air and one for clean air. Rows of cloth bags form a partition or interface between
the  plenums. A polluted  gas  stream is ducted  into the dirty  air plenum where it  is
distributed  evenly to  the  bags. The  gas  passes  through the bags, enters the  clean  air
plenum, and  is exhausted  into the atmosphere through  a stack. Almost  100 percent of
the  particulate  matter in  the process effluent can  be filtered  out by the bags  if the
system  is designed, operated, and maintained properly.

When a new  baghouse is  first started  up with factory-fresh bags, some stack emissions are
usually  visible.  This  is because the filtering  medium  (which  is the fabric of the bags)  is
porous  and allows a certain  amount  of  very fine particulate matter to pass through the
interstices  between the fibers. After a  short period of  operation, a dust cake builds  up on
the surface of the bags and becomes the actual filtering medium. The bags, in effect, act
primarily as a matrix to support the dust cake.
                                          7-13

-------
The  dust cake is desirable  only up to a point; when that point is reached, the bag must
be cleaned.  If it is not cleaned properly, the pressure drop through  the filter system will
continue to increase.  At high pressure drops, particles of dirt can be forced into the bag
fiber, causing the  bags to become blinded.  When this happens, air flow is restricted and
the bags may have to  be  replaced  or removed and  cleaned to restore proper operating
capacity. In addition to the  costs of  replacement  or  cleaning, a  high pressure drop
increases the cost  of moving air through the system. An installation of a typical baghouse
is shown in  Figure 7-6.

Routine  Inspection and Troubleshooting-The  key to baghouse maintenance is frequent
and  routine  inspection. It  is essential that a regular  program of routine  maintenance  be
established  and  followed.  Records should be kept  of all inspections and maintenance.
Inspection  intervals will depend  on  the type  of baghouse, the manufacturer's  recom-
mendation,  and  the process on which the unit is  installed. The important thing is to be
sure that the checks  are performed  regularly and  as  frequently as necessary, and that  no
components  are  neglected.

Table 7-4 lists the items requiring regular inspection and what to look for. When troubles
are  located  and  isolated  during  routine or  other inspection,  it  is  important that
corrections  are  made  as quickly as possible to avoid possible equipment downtime  or
excess emissions due  to bypassing the control system. When there is  a baghouse  failure,
the unit  is  usually shut down and/or bypassed and the malfunction is corrected.

Plant managers  should expect that considerable maintenance  time  will be  expended  on
troubleshooting  and  correction of baghouse malfunctions.  Maintenance  personnel must
learn to  recognize the symptoms that indicate potential problems, to determine the cause
of  the  difficulty, and  to  remedy  it, either by in-plant  action  or  by contact with  the
manufacturer or other  outside resource. High pressure drop across the system exemplifies
one symptom   for which  there  are many possible causes,  e.g.  difficulties with  the
bag-cleaning mechanism,  low  compressed-air pressure, weak  shaking action, loose  bag
tension,  or  excessive reentrainment  of  dust.  Many other factors  can  cause excessive
pressure  drop,  and several options are usually available for  corrective action appropriate
to   each cause.  Thus  the  ability  to  locate  and correct  malfunctioning  baghouse
components requires a thorough  understanding  of the system.  A detailed  tabulation of
troubleshooting and corrective measures is given in Appendix E.

The frequency  of failure  or breakdown of basic parts is presented in Table  7-5. which
includes requirements  for  frequency of inspection  and inspection  time as well  as  the
times required for repairs.

Spare  Parts-Every baghouse  maintenance  program  includes  an inventory of spare or
replacement parts.  Table  7-6  lists  the  typical  items  that should  be  stocked,  the
approximate quantities, and, if the  parts are not stocked,  the approximate delivery time
and cost.
                                         7-14

-------
                   FIGURE 7-5
   INCINERATOR USED TO CONTROL SOLVENT FUMES
                   FIGURE 7-6
BAGHOUSE INSTALLATION ON AN ASPHALT BATCH PLANT
                      7-15

-------
                                 TABLE 7-4
         CHECKLIST FOR ROUTINE INSPECTION OF BAG HOUSE*
        Component*
              Checklist
    Shaker mechanism (S)
    Bags
    Magnehelic gauge or
      manometer

    Dust removal system
    Baghouse structure
      (housing, hopper)

    Ductwork
    Solenoids, pulsing valves
       (RP)

    Compressed air system
       (RP, PP)

    Fans
     Damper valves (S, PP, RF)
     Doors
     Baffle plate
Proper operation without binding;
loose or worn bearings, mountings,
drive components; proper lubrication.

Worn, abraided, damaged bags; con-
densation on bags; improper bag
tension (S) (RF); loose, damaged,
or improper bag connections.

Steadiness of pressure drop
(should be read daily).

Worn bearings, loose mountings,
deformed parts, worn or loose drive
mechanism, proper lubrication.

Loose bolts, cracks in welds; cracked,
chipped, or worn paint; corrosion.

Corrosion, holes, external damage,
loose bolts, cracked welds, dust
buildup.

 Proper operation (audible
 compressed air blast).

 See above; proper lubrication of com-
 pressor; leaks in headers, piping.

 Proper mounting, proper lubrication
 of compressor; leaks in headers,
 piping-
 Proper operation  and synchronization;
 leaking cylinders, bad air connections,
 proper lubrication, damaged seals.

 Worn, loose, damaged, or missing
 seals; proper tight closing.

 Abrasion, excessive wear.
 *Refer to Appendix E for detailed troubleshooting procedures.
**RP _ reverse pulse; PP - plenum pulse; S - shaker; RF — reverse flow.
                                      7-16

-------
IO
  w
  CO
  P
  O
  X
  o
  <
  CQ




f.
*J
c


E

r"^



w 10 ;

E~ ""-S



- —
re
O-
w

o
.1


c
_o

"O o
«  c
C .2
cu •*-"
•T «*• O
•— *» X
i" i
C=H
«" 5
= 0

C
O
E
o
_re

o °
^- £
O =5
«-> CO
c;
.i CO
2_ is ..
? £j
- ^ re
CJ CM 'SI
O Cp D *M F^Q f^2
0 O O
0,0 o
1— 1 1— 1 -H *•
, 2
02  ^-i
"c "S "c "c
o o o o
S S. S S

"c c "c -^
C O O Tf-





— i C-i ^— ' S
s^j ^ ^ CU
•©- co
•& -&- i. (_
io: ; eg 2
^ in co -H o















= c
re re
£ E
c c
C3 73
ss





o
L.
 I
50 "H
e -C
£ .2F
3 ~
CO i)

11 1 1 1 § § ggg § g 1
EES££ fc ££„ £££££«
.5 .1 ."S .S .S J £ "= _S "= c "c "c c •-=
•s «s •= -s «§ * « « a! rerere3re«
SSSSS _3 SS-J SSSSEj|7
3)
o
be o
re <- 3

O i—
6-3 ^
" &. i_ co a
£" 3 C i! to co 3 • =
|j 1 | J S .5 S S" 1 g§ 1 J .1
-=^00'* o Soo -==-^00^-5
^* CN -~ ^ eg ^^ _ f r~ «4 ^\i f* ** f^-t -• •
-^ * ,' •*" •*- " ^ ""* f^ _-h4 -J— ^* C*N ^^ ^^ CM ^2
tMr-HQOX^H \O (TOr-li— 1 C-J-HCOCO-ig§
	 	 	 — 	 , O
r-
^
 O i_ > -JH
*« ° S S 0 T3 s-.
> ^ O o o > 2
t. u t- t. "O t, S
Q- Q-cuctfcij p , g o
t-c^cc x a. o. a, K e *. c c -a ^
J1J 1 £ S |.| | g-|g | | y|
O Oin *~ CCC J2 » X — in to M
r- 1 CO r-H CO T-H O CgeqiTJ f_(COr-HfO'-l^_g
C5 "3
JS -C J5 X »-, COLOCO ^-o
ccci-X js jsj-j= '£'c'ct-2t*H^3
11111 I III ills,!!-!
vO vo O —i S A SS S o \O O r-" S 0 a>
	 	 • — 	 	 .^ — o _=
"*£ £ >, » £££ 2 1^
S£SEs 2 2^« ss^cnS:--^
W ™":n
C u^^CQ « 5 «> wu^fe
SIHlIfirtliHlllit
§5^s r 15 111 s « g.-sj = i-2j,
K
-------
   td
   en
   P
   O
   as
   o
   <
   CQ
CQ
   O

   H
   en





co
"c

i
£
o
CJ
o
o
§*»
Ol
11*
*•" * flj
> "o S
T! c ^
o ^s
rO CB QJ1
-£ -c .*
2 -[• * ^^
Cu - <2
O .±2
O CD
.£* i;
CO "i
^ "S
X
,^pJ
C '3
"T* =-
CO -^
^
^-i bXJ
c3 c
.a -S ^2
p-i ctf -r;
H ffl CQ
4-*
-C
CO

•§ -a £ £
g TO CD CD
Cd a2 -^^ -^^
CU t. t- t-
^ »" 0- OH
g o o in
C/} i— i f-l CM
O
CO ^^ *^J* ^^
•41 M CS1 O





lO O O O
--i 
T3 M
02 D S l-
bc — *S CD
s: -S 2 -«
•rH rr, CB »- (—
C ^ •-. oj .=
CO Co 2 ^^ i— ™*
DO™ O >~i
P3 C/3 !> C/3 CJ

1 b
£ £ -|_ £
^ *- £ h
O CD CU CD
CU CM 0 ft-
o o o o
1— 1 i— 1 i-< i-H
o o o
i-H i-H i— 1 ^O O
CO CO CO ^ ^





00 S

Q co 4-1 CD i— 3
W CJ C JS >
^ o 5 a- t.
!_ t_ O O CL,
W *P 0C1 E— g
c5 co
                                            7-18

-------
 Perhaps  the  major maintenance item, and the most costly  because  of  the numbers
 involved, is the filter bag. Baghouses  are often classified according to collection of the
 particulate on the inside  of  the  bags. Table  7-7  lists the  cost of various materials for
 inside and outside type units on a per-square-foot basis.

      7.2.2 Venturi Scrubber

 The total  venturi scrubber system consists  of a fan,  the  venturi section,  the separator
 chamber, a mist eliminator, and  the  appropriate duct work. In discussing maintenance of
 the  venturi scrubber, various parts  of the system  must be considered  because  of the
 special corrosion and abrasion problems associated with  the wet system; these problems
 do  not occur with the baghouse or the  ESP,  which are essentially dry particulate handling
 systems.  A typical scrubber installation  is shown in Figure 7-7.

                                      TABLE 7-7
                           COST OF BASE REPLACEMENT
                                 IN FABRIC FILTERS

              (Information supplied by  R. P. Bundy,  Standard Havens, Inc.)


Type material


Acrylic
Cotton
Glass
Nomex
Polyester
Polypropylene
Teflon
Cost of material
(per square foot)

Inside bag
collector
$0.19
.19
.40
.80
.16
.31
2.89
Outside bag
collector
$0.38
N/A
.50
.88
.25
.30
5.70
            Note:  Cost differences are because of the type or weight of material.  Outside bags
                  are usually 14 oz. Feltco material and inside bags are 8-12 oz. woven material.

Maintenance-The major problems  with the  scrubber from a maintenance standpoint are
corrosion,  scaling, and plugging.  Corrosion  is best  prevented by  a proper  pressure/
temperature  balance  in  the  system;  when  problems  do  arise,  maintenance  entails
replacement  of parts and/or patching  of  the unit.  Scaling  results  from  an improper
chemical balance in the system and is corrected by chemical  or hand cleaning. Plugging
occurs as solids  build  up  at  transition points in the system. Table  7^8 indicates the
manpower requirements for maintenance that  involves scaling and plugging  for both the
wet approach and  liquid injection venturi scrubbers.
                                         7-19

-------
The  venturi  scrubber unit is  used for a  variety of applications. Table  7-9  lists  the
maintenance  requirements  for  two ranges  of pressures,  various lining materials, and gas
characteristics. This table should be useful in the selection  of scrubber liners for venturi
units in various applications.

                                     TABLE 7-8
                  MAINTENANCE FOR PLUGGING AND SCALING
                                VENTURISCRUBBER
                   (From interview with P. Wechselblatt  — Chemico)

Type of
venturi
scrubber
Wet
approach
Liquid
injection
Type of problem
Plugging
Mechanical
cleaners
1 Man/shift/
month
1 Man/shift/
month
Cylinder
cleaners
1 Man/shift/
month
1 Man/shift/
month
Scaling
Chemical
cleaning
3 Men/shift/
week
3 Men/shift/
week
Hand
cleaning
1 Man/shift/
week
1 Man/shift/
week
 Spare Parts-The minimum inventory of spare parts is one each for each venturi scrubber.
 The spare parts inventory for a venturi system is given in  Table 7-10.

 Manpower Requirements-This section has indicated the  maintenance items, maintenance
 times, and spare parts inventory for a venturi scrubber system. Table 7-11 completes this
 picture by presenting the types of  personnel generally required  to perform maintenance
 on various parts of the venturi scrubber system.

 A great variety  of wet scrubbers, ranging from low- to high-energy  systems, can remove
 various  size particles and  gases. Attention is directed to high-energy systems, which
 remove  very fine particulates  and  thus satisfy the more stringent  air pollution control
 codes.   The high-energy venturi  scrubber is one example.   Maintenance  procedures
 applicable to this type of system can be easily  adapted to other scrubber systems.

 When  gas  containing dust is swept through an area containing liquid  droplets,  dust
 particles will strike or impinge  upon  the  droplets:  if they adhere, the particles will be
 collected by the  droplets. The collecting liquid is called droplets  and the material in the
 gas stream that  is to be collected is called particles, whether it is  solid or liquid. In
 general, the collection  effect is most efficient  when the  size of  the  liquid droplet  is
 approximately 100 to 300 times the size  of the dust particle  (range from 100  to 1,000
 microns), allowing for large numbers of collisions.
                                          7-20

-------
CQ
   W
   E-S
   CQ

   CQ
                       0)

                    0, C
                    a, £
                    0) 
-------
CQ
ffl
PS
<
OH
w
PL,
CD






WJ
JH
CM
*o
a.




c
o
CD
•O ' ^"
•5 5 a.
CC O —
•<^
fl
O -M
CM =
03 '-j-i
i§!
PH ^ ^


S-
Q-.
s
N— H
_C
OS
"»
QJ CO
CD



X

X


X




X X
X X

X X


X
X X
!H
o
rt
C
•- o ^ 1
1 1 t -
•3 ™ — C ^
t_ CH S" C _CO
CO CD MM PH 25
                           7-22

-------
                                                              X
                                                                X
   CO
   co
   5^
   CO
    CQ
    CQ
    D
    OS
    u
    CO
 CD
-a
    ^   re

    w   3
    £>•   co
         X!
               O


              *s

               cu

              E-
                             ||


                             H  O
                                                                 X
                                      fli
                                     —
                                                              XXX
—
CQ
    3
    I— '
                                                        XX
                                                                 X
   <   S
   z   ^
   td   S
    fa
    O
                                             X    X
                                   =*.  c
                                    o  g
                                      C-fcJ
                                    _  »
                                       ^
                                                                 « S
                                                                 t«

                                             c/3
                                                    g-

                                                        fa
                                          7-23

-------
In a venturi scrubber,  the  gas velocity is increased in the venturi (or constricted section),
and  water may  be injected under pressure to provide intimate contact between the gas
stream and water particles.

The  wet-dry line area  must be periodically inspected to be sure that solids buildup is not
occurring. Spray nozzles and liquid inlets must be checked to see that they are open and
distributing  the  liquid properly.  The  inspector  should  especially  watch for corrosion
underneath scale buildup.

The  second  major problem  in  most high-energy scrubbers  is associated with abrasion.
High-velocity liquid containing  dust  strikes  the impingement  surfaces in  the venturi
scrubber, especially at the highest-velocity area, i.e.,  the venturi or throat of the unit.

Places susceptible to corrosion and abrasion must be inspected frequently. These include
throats,  orifices, elbows, and other high-wear areas.  Any  wearing of coatings  and metals
should be repaired as needed.

Failure of wet scrubbers rarely involves the scrubber  itself, since many scrubbers have few
moving  parts  or none. The other  system components  must be investigated,  i.e., the
connecting duct  work,  dampers, fans, centrifugal pumps, valves, and  piping. Each of these
components  provides the designer with unique problems and  must be monitored carefully
during inspection.

     7.2.3 The Electrostatic  Precipitator

An electrostatic  precipitator  (ESP) consists very  basically of a precipitator chamber  and
an  electrical  unit (see Figure  7-8). The precipitator  chamber includes discharge  and
collection electrodes,  an   electronic  cleaning system,  gas   distribution  devices,  and  a
precipitator shell and  hopper. The electrical unit is made  up  of a power  supply,  high
voltage transformers, rectifiers, and precipitator bus sections.

ESP  is  a physical process  by which a  particulate suspended in a gas stream is  charged
electrically and then, in the influence of an  electrical field, is  separated and  removed
from  the gas stream. The  system  that does this consists of a positively charged collecting
plate  in  close proximity   to  a  negatively charged  electrode.  A high-voltage charge is
imposed on the electrode,  which establishes an electrical  field between the electrode and
the grounded collection surface. The dust particles pass between the electrodes, where
they are negatively charged and diverted to the positively charged collection plate(s).

Periodically,  the  collected particles must be removed from the collecting surface. This is
done  by vibrating (usually  by rapping)  and/or water  washing the surface of the collection
plates  to dislodge the  dust. The dislodged dust drops into a dust removal system and is
collected for disposal.
                                          7-24

-------
                       FIGURE 7-7
  WET SCRUBBER INSTALLATION ON AN ASPHALT BATCH PLANT
                       FIGURE 7-8
ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR INSTALLATION ON POWER BOILER
                         7-25

-------
The advantages  and disadvantages of electrostatic  precipitators  are  summarized below:

Advantages

     1.    High collection  efficiency  is obtained on  particles  as small  as  0.01 micron;
          range of collection efficiency is 80 to 99.9 percent.

     2.    Operating costs are low.

     3.    Low pressure drops of 0.1 to 0.5 inch water are typical.

     4.    Gas flows as high as  4 million cfm can  be  handled effectively.

     5.    Gas pressure and vacuum operating conditions can be  used.

     6.    There is essentially no limit to usage  of solids, liquids, or  corrosive chemicals.

     7.    Particulate concentrations from 0.0001 to 100 grains/cubic feet can be handled.

     8.    Gas temperatures can range as high as 1,200°F.

     9-    The units  handle a wide  range of gas velocities.

    10.    Units  of the precipitator  can  be  removed  from  operation  for convenience in
          cleaning.

Disadvantages

     1.    Installed costs are high.

     2.    Space  requirements  are high for cold precipitators  and even greater for  hot
          precipitators.

     3.    Explosions can  occur when the  precipitator is collecting  combustible gases or
          p articulates.

     4.    Ozone (a  poisonous  gas) is  produced  by the  negatively charged discharge
          electrodes during ionization.

     5.    Operating procedures can  be complicated. Great precautions must be exercised
          to maintain safety and proper gas flow distribution, dust resistivity, particulate
          conductivity, and corona sparkover rate.

Discharge electrode failure is  the  primary  cause  of operational breakdown.  After this (in
order of highest rate of  mechanical failure) are rapper  malfunctions, insulator failures,
shorts caused by dust buildup, hopper plugging,  and transformer-rectifier failures. Most of
these problems  occur  when  proper  preventive measures  are  not  used.  For  example,

                                           7-26

-------
discharge  electrode failures can  be reduced  if the hoppers are properly  discharged and
cleaned to prevent grounding out and burning off of the discharge electrodes. Failure to
inspect rappers over extended rapping  cycles also causes discharge  electrode  breakage
through fatigue failure.

In addition to the electrical  and rapping  problems,  the remaining possible precipitator
problems  generally involve gas flow and mechanical systems. Uneven  gas  flow  can cause
erosion of the collection plates and thereby  reduce efficiency.  Uneven  gas flow also can
cause dust fallout and accumulation on turning vanes and on ductwork. This dust buildup
eventually plugs  the  distribution plates and results in further uneven gas flow and system
upset.

Rapping is a mechanical system for removing particles from the collection and  discharge
electrodes. Rapping is  effective  only if  sufficient force is  transmitted to the electrodes.
Variations in the design of the supporting structure and in the electrodes themselves can
result  in  inadequate  rapping.  In  many installations  that   handle  fly  ash,  rapping
accelerations of 60 g (60 times the gravitational force) are required.

Fly  ash buildup  on the collecting plates  should normally be about 1/8 to  1/4 inch. If the
buildup exceeds  this thickness, the intensity of the plate rappers  should  be increased. If
the  collecting  plates are clean, this may be an indication of  high gas velocity  or  low
operating voltage.

Collecting plates should be  checked for proper alignment and spacing.  Hangers  and
spacers at the  top and bottom should be adjusted so that they do not bind the plates or
prevent proper rapping. It is necessary to check for corrosion.

Hoppers should  be checked periodically to be sure they empty properly and to  inspect
for  corrosion, which is likely to  be most severe at  points where dust  builds up.  The
heating system and insulation on the hoppers are checked to prevent condensation.

Insulator  compartments and  housings must be checked frequently. Leakage of corrosive
gases from the precipitator into this area can cause dirt deposits that result in breakdown
of the electrical insulators.

The spark rate control is inspected to maintain the proper number of sparks per minute;
this control can be adjusted if necessary.

The current and voltage limit controls must  be checked and properly adjusted to prevent
damage to the electrical components in the system.

Any electrical surge,  overload, and automated systems must be checked.

Transformers are checked to maintain liquids at the proper  level.

Relays are disassembled and contacts cleaned once a year; the units are  then recalibrated.
                                         7-27

-------
Filter elements in the system must be removed and cleaned or replaced periodically.

Most  rectifiers use vacuum tube  or  solid-state  systems. Normal vacuum tube life ranges
from  12,000  to 20,000  hours, and servicing usually  involves replacement  of  defective
tubes. Solid-state rectifiers are usually trouble-free, requiring little maintenance other than
periodic check of transformer oil.

Precipitator wires, which  may  amount to 30,000 feet of wire per unit, frequently require
servicing even  under the best conditions of maintenance and operation.

Inspection should include a check for air leaks  and examination of the collecting plates
for evidence of back corona.  The precipitator should be maintained above the dew point
to prevent corrosion inside the precipitator.

Inspection and Maintenance—Following is a typical inspection and maintenance  schedule.
Figure 7-9 illustrates a systematic approach to an ESP maintenance program.

Annual Inspection

A.   Internal inspection

     1.    Observe dust deposits on collecting plates  and wires before cleaning (a 1/4-inch
          deposit is normal). If metal plates are clean, there is a possibility that a section
          is shorting out- If more than 1/4-inch of dust is on the plates, rappers are not
          cleaning.

     2.    Observe dust buildup and corona tufts on wires.

     3.    Check for interior corrosion, which could indicate an air  leak through housing
          or moisture carryover from the  air heater washer.

     4.    Check plate  alignment and  spacing.

     5.    Check  to see  that discharge  wire spacers  and hanger weights are  in  place.
          Measure to be sure the wires hang midway between plates.

     6.    Replace broken wires.

B.   Hopper inspection

     1.    Check for dust  buildup in  corners.

     2.    Check  high  tension  weights.  If one  has  dropped 3  inches, this indicates  a
          broken wire.

     3.    Check hopper valve for debris.
                                         7-28

-------
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED BY:

COMPANY
STAFF
X
X
X
X
X
X
cc
MANUFACTURE


X
X
X


CONSULTANT


X
X


        ESP MAINTENANCE CYCLE
          ACTIVITY
                                  COMMENTS
           ROUTINE
           CHECK
          • EXTERNAL SYSTEM
         '• DAILY
          SHUTDOWN
          PERIOD
        • REQUIRED FOR SAFE
          INTERNAL INSPECTION
         INTERNAL
         INSPECTION
  i
ORDER
PARTS
  I
  I
USE OF
STANDBY
PARTS
--•SELECT PARTS/
     EQUIPMENT
          CONDUCT
          REPAIRS
          START UP
        FIGURE 7-9
ESP MAINTENANCE CYCLE
           7-29

-------
C.   Penthouse inspection




     1.    Check for corrosion due to condensation and/or leakage of gas into housing





     2.    Excessive dust in penthouse indicates air sealing pressure too low.





     3.    Clean all high-tension insulators.





     4.    Check that all electrical connections are secure.





D.   Transformer-rectifier inspection





     1.    Check liquid level.





     2.    Clean lines, insulators, bushings, and terminals.





     3.    Check surge arresters; spark gap should be 1/32 inch.





E.   Control cabinet inspection  t





     1.    Clean and dress  relay contacts.





F.   Check and calibrate all instruments and controls




Quarterly Inspection





A.   Rappers




     1.    Clean, replace, and lubricate distributor switch contacts.





     2.    Check rapper  assembly for free movement.





B.   Vibrators





     1.   Check contacts  on load cams.




     2.   Check vibrators  to see that they  operate at proper intervals.





 Shift Inspection




A.   Record electrical reading for each control unit  and check for abnormal readings.





B.   Check rapper controls.





C.   Check vibrator controls.
                                           7-30

-------
Shutdown  Procedures  and  Maintenance  of ESP  Internals—These steps  are  necessary
primarily for safety and efficiency. An  external inspection of a precipitator is performed
daily. Details of troubleshooting procedures, with probable causes and remedies, are given
in Appendix D.

The  internal maintenance inspection of an  ESP and  the  maintenance time requirements
for servicing depend on the interval required before maintenance personnel can enter the
unit after  it is shut down. Typical shutdown times are listed in Table  7-12. Because  of
the variety of  ESP applications, maintenance problems  also vary with  each  installation.
Table 7-13 indicates some typical  industrial maintenance operations.  The frequency  of
parts failure in  an  ESP is very  low; repair  times are  minimal  after  diagnosis and
shutdown.

An  example  of  a typical troubleshooting chart  for  an  electrostatic  precipitator  is
presented in Appendix F.

A further  note regarding precipitator maintenance concerns opacity monitors. In addition
to the  obvious use of opacity  monitors to maintain compliance, industrial users find a
correlation  between  optical density and the concentration  of particulates leaving the
stack. The  Pennsylvania  Power  and Light Company has correlated their emissions with
optical  density, as illustrated  in Figure 7-10. They  have also  found that the following
variables which affect precipitator performance can be evaluated by  opacity  monitoring:

     1.   Fuel resistivity  and ash content,

     2.   Boiler load,

     3.   Boiler outlet gas temperature,

     4.   Boiler excess  air level,

     5.   Precipitator operating voltage,

     6.   Precipitator rapping intensity and programming, and

     7.   Precipitator internal conditions.

Many  of  these  variables  affect  not  only  emissions   but  also maintenance  of the
precipitators.
                                          7-31

-------
   Cd

   3



   w
(M
   D-


   z
   I—I



   en












o
**-
.§
+J
-"
S
o
^D
"5
Cfi




















•3 o
C "«3
fc« O ca
CD iy (-
C en -^
.S




O-
O
"£j
o
'•ff
w
o
OH
a:
_c
O
w
C
i
"c
'3
£





CO
ea
-s
CO
2
f\i
i-H


Cfi
L-
X
CO



cC
X
•^

CD
S3
V
S
I'M
c c
S3 .2
1 I E
^7* ^
a "

c
.2
"rt
.—
"5-
OH


~*t< ..nr1
^^1 ^^H
(M C^ ^ ^ (M Cvl



*
X


X





X X





X





X



^-t -H -H •— H j— 1 i-H


x-^. 0
tf ^
y co CJ
A J j ULrt M^ l_
° -5 o o w ^£
•tt u o O O y :£
-22 -^ -O iO O ••— c
e c . co co t? c
o o o o -a -
3 i_ S o m -w 5-
< H £ ^ U cu
                                                                   Q.

                                                                   3
                                                                   o
                                                                  -o
                                                                   a

                                                                  JS
                                     7-32

-------
                                 *
                                03
                                  ~
                                  C  sj

                                  ° S
                                  '
                    Q-
                    1)
                                 t-  be
                                 C  C
                                 o--=
                                CO
    CO
    03
anical
                               §-
             Q "?


             ee O


             co 4)
(TO
    <
             be o?

            •£•£
                                M O

                                 O 1>
                                 3 w
                                 co C
                                 Q- C

                                d °
,°

 o

3
                                S £
                                •J-H  B
                                                                   -o
                                                                    OJ
                                                2
                                                4)
                                                C/l
                                                                   Ul
                                                -c

                                                -^

                                                o

                                                                    -a
                                                                    43
                             o


                            CO
                                                                              CO
                                                                              *o
                                                                              C/)
 o


CO
                                                           to
T!

^4

 O
*-*
CO
                                                                                                   •s
                                                                                                    C
                                                (/)
                                                S
                                                -^
                                                o

                                                2
                                                CO
                                          I   «=   3
                                           i.   'J   J3
                                           «   y   *i
                                           «   i   -r
                                           >^   =    *
                                          IN   g    g


                                               •i!    °-
                                          _co   g    W

                                          '5   «   _>i

                                           ^   «   -3
                                           f   ™™    :r
                                                          O  =
                                                          u
                                              PS
                                                                                                    o
                                                                                                   O-,
                                                                                                   SO
                                            7-33

-------
O
0.9

0.8
0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1
                    •ALLOWABLE EMISSION PATE
                                       O.
                                        G
        O
                 0.05       0.10       0.15       0.20
                                     GRAINS/CU FT
                                                     0.25
0.30
0.35
                                   FIGURE 7-10
       TEST DATA RELATING OPTICAL DENSITY TO OUTLET GRAIN LOADING
                     (Example for kraft pulp mill recovery furnace)
                                BIBLIOGRAPHY


Atmospheric  Emissions  from  Fuel  Oil  Combustion,  Environmental  Health  Series,
U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, November 1962.

Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors (2nd edition), U.S. Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, EPA AP-42, April 1973.

Environmental Quality -  1976  (The Seventh Annual Report of the Council on Environmen-
tal Quality), Environmental Quality-1976, September 1976.

Handbook for the Operation and Maintenance of Air Pollution Control Equipment, edited
by  Frank  L. Cross Jr., P.E., and Howard  E. Hesketh, Ph.D., P.E., Technomic Publishing
Co., Inc., Westport, Conn., 1975.

Inspection  Manual for Enforcement  of New Source Performance Standards-Municipal
Incinerators, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Stationary Source Enforcement Series,
EPS 340/1-75-003, February 1975.

Sal/uric Acid Plant Emissions During Start-up. Shutdown,  and Malfunction, U.S. Environ-
mental Protection Agency, EPA-600/2-76-010, January 1976.
                                       7-34

-------
             APPENDIX A

 SAMPLE SAROAD AND NEDS FORMS

      ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
         National Aerornetric Data Bank
       Research Triangle Park, N. C. 27711

       SAROAD Site Identification Form
Form Com
pIptAri Ry flatP |>Jpw


TO BE COMPLETED BY THE REPORTING AGENCY
(A)

1 14-361

State Project
City Name (23 characters)
l37'5" County Name (15 characters)
City Population {right justified)


5Z 5J 54 55 56 57 5B 59
Longitude Latitude
Deg. Mtn. Sec. Deq. Mm. Sec.
0 0
GO 61
ITM Zone

60 61
n

» N |
62 63 64 6S 66 67 63 69 'P 71 n 73 >* I-j 1%
Easting Coord., meters Northing Coord., meters
-
6? 63 64 6$ 68 67 68 69 10 It 11 ?3 '* 75 16

Supporting Agency (61 characters}
Supporting Agency, continued

n
Il4-79i

Optional: Comments that will help identify
the sampling site (132 characters)

n)
1 4-79





=1
1 14-38)
Abbreviated Site Address (25 characters)
DO NOT WRITE HERE
State Area Site
A

' * 3 * S 6 789 m
Agency Project


II II 13
Time
Region Zone Action


77 78 79 BO
State Area Site
B|

1 2 34 £,6 7 B9 >0
Agency Project SMSA Actio


It 1- 13 M !5 16 17 BO
State Area Site
C

I ?3456 780 1O
Agency Project Action


11 I? t3 SO
State Area Site
D
Agency Project

II 12 13

Action
D
80
State Area Site
E

1 2 3 .4 S 6 ; 8 9 10
gency Project Action


                                I!     f 13
                (over)
              FIGURE A-1
SAROAD SITE IDENTIFICATION FORM
                 A-1

-------
                            SAROAD Site Identification Form (continued)
TO BE COMPLETED BY THE REPORTING AGENCY
                                                                              DO NOT WRITE HERE
(F).
Check the ONE
major category that
best  describes the
location of the
sampling site.
1.CH CENTER CITY
2.    SUBURBAN
3,1	I RURAL
4Q REMOTE
Specify
units	
Address, continued

  Next, check the subcategory
  that best describes the domi-
  nating influence on the sampler
  within approximately a 1-mile
  radius of the sampling site.
      1. Industrial
      2. Residential
      3. Commercial
      4. Mobile
      1. Industrial
      2. Residential
      3. Commercial
      4. Mobile
       1. Near urban
       2. Agricultural
       3. Commercial
       4. Industrial
       5. None of the above
               Elevation of sampler above ground
Specify
units _
                                                             State
                                                                          Area
                                                                   Site
   ,14-5*1     Sampling Site Address (41 characters)
                                                             Agency
                                                        Project
Station Type
                                                                           County Code
                                                                          57  SS   59   6°
                                                                         AQCR Number
                                                                              AQCR Population
                                                               6*  6i   68  B7  SB  69
                                                                      Elevation/Gr
                                                            Elevation/MSt
                                       T.   76   77  78
                                                                                 Time
                                                                                 Zone   Action
           Elevation of sampler above mean sea level

Circle pertinent time zone:    EASTERN    CENTRAL

MOUNTAIN   PACIFIC    YUKON    ALASKA   BERING

HAWAII
                                      FIGURE A-1  (Cont.)
                         SAROAD SITE IDENTIFICATION FORM
                                               A-2

-------



n in
<6
s«
°S a







IU
£fi
0,2



i!
23







Q>-
s =

£<<«
£*3
"CS

h-S
z













••*
-£~

2
LL «
a «


c •**

f — —
« -
o
UOIIJV


NMO




2


X




















£
-D
<

E
Z
f

a
Jl












.038 a
"-7^
SN

u











S
15
C

e
s
lu*

•-1
K
3
3
10
a
«•
3
3
a
**
—

s
*/»
X
3!
A
tf*
in
"



»
*
•
^
-
-
»
—
ii

"

Si
«

w
1*1

«

S IS
5 *

AjtpuODJI

C >
5 1°
u £



>
EC
a.
Ajtpuo^s
>
E £

S
n
^
5=
a
s
3
f
y
»n
3
4
^
w
3
S
S
R
a
s
5
3
2
S
a
s
•e
s
*
i^
5
3
S
7
S
£
S
S
S
S
S
n
s
s;
a
s
*A
f3
S
^J
f^*
K
r
•5













&






































































S
U0113V




„:
x1
Z 03
,y* OM
JS'o^
fS«os
« »,.d



a
u






z




«
S
£ 9
H

o
S


o





:
u




« < ^IM/Q
ZS*,D/,H

2 ,Sz
E „
>- ^<
< i >
I sz
z 	
* S"-
P. on a












a
t
p?
C
s
f»
*N
K
S
3
3
3
S
»«
t*
3
•C
(SI
S
3

^M« °

itlj (tiuoa



o






(J

:
?
o

o
3 o"

J
<
1
J





E
3
CL

pio»a












8
S

S
e
X
!•!
K
c
S
3
3
•f
it
S
3
3
3
W
3
S
R
S
a
s
s
s
IN|
rf*
a
<«
3
S
*
W^
5
5
*•*<
?
S
K
a
s
s
w^
*-»
3;
?!
»
S
o
a
s
trt
'
R
*w
l1^
R
TJ
S












L






































































' ^
u
UOI13V




•pl(UO
*3I»10S








-
|











•J*


i2

MW "1


'"HI'S


c
;
»Q


£

• i
3 5tf
= is 1
< 13 i
"• o

-

u =


^"
pio»a












S
|
S
S
s
c;
K
a
s
s
s
s
J
M>
3
3
s
3
s
s
s
R
3?
S
3
Z
5
=;
S
s
y
s
—
s
;
-
S;
^
5
S
S
^
S
s
s
s
ft
=;
a
~ -
S
~
-
s
K
s
a
•^ -
=












a «






































































«






































































10






































































V






































































T3
UOI13V














































"
Z
s
o
u

-

=
H

*r
p-o»»a

-f-










B
e
H
S
l/«
-
C
r*
H
S
2
a
V
a
w*
3
u
s
u
s
s
R
K
3
S
s
a
K
K
S
^
S
s
s
-
;
3
a;
^
s
««
s
^
a
R
a
*-i
R
<--•
a
en
cfl
S
K
*
K
R
;3
°
«o
S
^
«










P*
CL






































































1^.
O.






































































f^
a.






































































PH
CL






































































                                                  
-------





3) ™"


n


£
V)







S •-
o ^ ^*


11*
d i f
3-
.* .-
. i
•jr ' N

**r~h


r» >fc
~in=a








g
e
3

e
O
S

















w- ra
1 Z
t ?




1
^n

=1 1
51 1

;l i
^1 1



>
i
L





.C








•g
5

5
E
Q.











(A
in


«




R 8 - -h

s ^s
st =
*
a ^ -
- f =
fN Of
?
S ~
a 2 "=
s f s
™ OB
2 S
s s
* *
^s
s L
j
S ee 3
_ •? ~
O K a
•— A
J »
rv *
f S T
s
s
« s i
S :
"> 5
-o ..,.,. 	 „ 	 . _ ,. , 	
"o "
"3 «« 3
£ S S



s T;
s
3
en 5
-D „
K 5
1
3
CN 3
s « I
s
s
8^ — S
£ I*

i 2
S =
>• s
a •




















































                                                     cc

                                                     O
                                                     u_
                                                  CO  <

                                                  <  Q

                                                  LU  >~.
                                                  CC  d
                                                  -  O
                                                  u.  x


                                                      Q


                                                      O
                                                      en
A-4

-------
                              APPENDIX B
           SAMPLING AND FACILITY OPERATION CHECKLISTS


               TEST PROGRAM MEETING REPRESENTATIVES
Plant Name.
Plant Address.
Source to be Tested.
Plant Representative.

Plant Manager	
Test Team Company Name.

Team Representative	

Responsible Person	
Members of
Test Team  _
Agency(s)
Agency Representative.

Responsible Person	
Agency
Observers,
                   Date.
                   .Phone.

                   .Phone,
                   .Phone.

                   .Phone.
 Title
                   . Phone.

                   .Phone-
 Affiliation
. and Tasks .
                               FIGURE B-1
          TEST PROGRAM MEETING REPRESENTATIVES FORM
                     (Note: This figure is also shown as Figure 5-1.)
                                   B-1

-------
        TEST PROGRAM MEETING PARTICIPANTS

Name                                    Affiliation
                     FIGURE B-2
      TEST PROGRAM MEETING PARTICIPANTS FORM
                         B-2

-------



o
o
I_J
o
Q
O
K
w
2*
o
HH
h>H
CO
w
t"1
Q
^
CO
H

td
Ji-
s
5
cv
Dd
H
2^
^
/jj
S
s§
o
o
PL,

CO
W
^~" oi
"£
i






































Q;
o





































<•"•
O
^
!-
%
."S
re
S
O
15
£
o
S

„
1
re
S

D5



•^
O
•w
S



_!_.
C
?
"o













































































































































CO
2
111
LLJ
CC
^^
D >-
O C3
LU o
CC _l
1- O
2 Q
co < 0
rn — 1 ^~
^^ ^- ^^
LU LU
— ^ ^!
g CC C3
¥. o -z.
"• g H
Q_ LU
i J—
CO Q
LU =
|— ^

CC
O
Li-
CC
LL









B-3

-------
            TEST PROGRAM AGREEMENT ON FACILITY OPERATION
Process
   1) Method of process weight or rate determination
   2)  Process parameters to be monitored and  recorded, and their acceptable limits to
       document process operation
   3)  Raw material feed and/or fuel acceptable analyzed values
   4)  Normal operating cycle or procedures
   5)  Portions of the  operating cycle or procedure that will be represented by each run
Control Equipment

   6)  Control equipment and effluent parameters to be monitored and recorded, and their
       acceptable limits to document control equipment operations
    7)  Normal operating cycle (cleaning, dust removal, etc.)
    8) Normal maintenance schedule
    9) Manner in which the control equipment will be operated during test
                                   FIGUREB-4
                   FORM FOR TEST PROGRAM AGREEMENT ON
                              FACILITY OPERATION
                          (Note: This figure is also shown as Figure 5-3.)
                                        B-4

-------
   TEST PROGRAM AGREEMENT ON CONTINUING COMPLIANCE CONDITIONS
Process
   1)  Process parameters that must be recorded and submitted to agency or kept on file
       for later inspection
   2)  Percentage by which each process parameter can exceed the tested rate and on what
       time-weighted average
   3)  Future operating procedures
Control Equipment

   4)  Control equipment parameters that must be recorded and submitted to the agency
       or kept on file for later inspections
   5)  Normal operating procedures




   6)  Normal maintenance schedule




   7)  Frequency of scheduled inspections by agency



                             #
Reviewed and approved by:



Agency	 Facility	Tester.
                                  FIGURE B-5
                  FORM FOR TEST PROGRAM AGREEMENT ON
                    CONTINUING COMPLIANCE CONDITIONS
                                      B-5

-------
                    FIELD OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
GENERAL/ADMINISTRATIVE
Plant name.
Plant address.
Source to be tested

Plant contact	
Observers
Reviewed test program?.
                   Date.
                   .Phone
.Affiliation.
.Comments.
Reviewed test program meeting notes?.
                .Comments.
Reviewed correspondence?.
.Comments
Test team company name.

Supervisor's name	

Other members	
                    Phone.
.Address.

 Title	
                                FIGURE B-6
                      FIELD OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
                                    B-6

-------

GENERAL/SAMPLING SITE


Stack/duct cross section dimensions	Equivalent diameter,

Material of construction	Corroded?	Leaks?_
Internal appearance - Corroded?	Caked participate?	Thickness.

Insulation?	Thickness	Lining?	Thickness	
                                              o

Nipple?	I. D	Length	Flush with inside wall?	

Straight run before ports	Diameters	

Straight run after ports	Diameters	

Photos taken?	  Of what  	
Drawing of sampling location:
Minimum information on drawing: stack/duct dimensions, location and description of
major disturbances and all minor disturbances (dampers, transmissometers, etc.), and cross
sectional view showing dimensions and port locations.
                                FIGURE B-6 (Cont.)
                        FIELD OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
                                       B-7

-------
GENERAL/SAMPLING SYSTEM
Sampling method (e.g., EPA 5).
Sampling train schematic drawing:
Modifications to standard method
Pump type:  Fibervane with in-line oiler   X   Carbon vane   X   Diaphragm	X.

Probe liner material	Heated?	Entire length?.
Type "S"pitot tube:.
.Other
Pitot tube connected to:  Inclined manometer	

     Range	Approx. scale length
                     .Or magnehelic gauge

                     	Divisions	
 Orifice meter connected to: Inclined manometer	Or magnehelic gauge

     Range	Approx. scale length	 Divisions	

 Meter box brand	X	Sample box brand	X	
 Recent calibration of orifice meter-dry gas meter?	

     Nozzles	Thermometers or thermocouples?
                          Pitot tubes?.
                          Magnehelic gauges?.
Number of sampling points/traverse from Fed. Reg.	

Length of sampling time/point desired.	Time to be used
                        Number to be used.
 X— Not required by regulations
                             FIGURE B-6 (Cont.)
                     FIELD OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
                                     B-8

-------
TRAIN ASSEMBLY/FINAL PREPARATIONS                  Run #

(Use one  sheet per run if necessary)
Filter holder clean before test?	Filter holder assembled	
Correctly?	Filter media type	Filter clearly identified?.
Filter intact?	Probe liner clean before test?	
Nozzle clean?	Nozzle undamaged?	
Impingers clean before test?	Impingers charged correctly?.
Ball joints or screw joints?	Grease used?_	
Kind of grease	Pitot tube tip undamaged?	
Pitot lines checked for leaks?	Plugging?,
Meter box leveled?	Pitot manometer zeroed?.
Orifice manometer zeroed?	Probe markings correct?.
Probe hot along entire length?	Filter compartment hot?
Temperature information available?	Impingers iced down?.
Thermometer reading properly?	Barometric pressure measured? _
If not, what is source of data	AH@ from most recent calibration	
AH@ from check against dry gas meter.	.	
Nomograph check:
       If AH@ - 1.80, Tm - 100°F, % H20 - 10%, Ps/Pm - 1.00, C =  X    (0.95)
       If C = 0.95, Ts - 200°F, DN = 0.375, Ap reference       X    (0.118)
       Align Ap = 1.0 with AH-10;@ Ap =  0.01, AH        X   (0.1)
For nomograph set-up:
       Estimated meter temperature   X  °F.  Estimated value of Ps/Pm    X	
       Estimated moisture content   X   %. How estimated?      X	
       C factor   X   Estimated stack temperature   X    F.
       Desired nozzle diameter    X
Stack thermometer checked against ambient temperature?	
Leak test performed before start of sampling?	Rate	CFM @	in.

                                FIGURE B-6 (Com.)
                         FIELD OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
                                        B-9

-------
SAMPLING (Use one sheet for each run if necessary)                Run #.

Probe-sample box movement technique:

  Is nozzle sealed when probe is in stack with pump turned off?	

  Is care taken to avoid scraping nipple or stack wall?.	
  Is an effective seal made around probe at port opening? _

  Is probe seal made without disturbing flow inside stack?.

  Is probe moved to each point at the proper time?	
  Is probe marking system adequate to properly locate each point?	_

  Are nozzle and pitot tube kept parallel to stack wall at each point?—.	_

  If probe is disconnected from filter holder with probe in the stack on a negative pressure
       source, how is particulate matter in the probe prevented from being sucked back into
       the stack?
   If filters are changed during a run, was any particulate lost?	_	

 Meterbox operation:
   Is data recorded in a permanent manner?	Are data sheets complete?
   Average time to reach isokinetic rate at each point	-

   Is nomograph setting changed when stack temperature changes significantly?,

   Are velocity pressures (Ap) read and recorded accurately? .	
 Is leak test performed at completion of run?	cfm @ 	 in. Hg.

 General comment on sampling techniques _	..	
 If Orsat analysis is done, was it:  From stack	From integrated bag

 Was bag system leak tested?	Was Orsat leak tested?	
   Check against air?	
 If data sheets cannot be copied, record: aproximate stack temperature .

   Nozzle dia..	in.       Volume metercd	ACF

   First 8 Ap readings	
                                 FIGURE B-6 (Cont.)
                         FIELD OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
                                       B-10

-------
SAMPLE RECOVERY
General environment-clean up area,
Wash bottle Hpan?           Brushes clean?	Brushes rusty?.
 Jars Clean?	Acetone grade	Residue on evap. spec	%

Filter handled OK?	Probe handled OK?	Impingers handled OK?	

After cleanup:  Filter holder clean?,	Probe liner clean?	

  Nozzle clean?	Impingers clean?__	Blanks taken?

Description of collected particulate	.	__,	
Silica gel all pink?     Run 1 _ Run 2 _ Run 3 ,

Jars adequately lahplpH?                  Jars sealed tightly? _ _
Liquid level marked on jars?                   Jars locked up?

General comments on entire sampling project:
Observer's name	Title,
Affiliation	. Signature.
                                FIGURE B-6 (Com.)
                        FIELD OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
                                       B-ll

-------
                             SAMPLE CHAIN OF CUSTODY
Plant	
Date Sampled	Test number.
                                      Run number.
                                   Sample Recovery
       Container Code                                    Description
Person engaged in sample recovery
       Signature	
       Title	
       Location at which recovery was done.
       Date and time of recovery.
Sample(s) recipient, upon recovery if not recovery person
       Signature	—
       Tide	.	
       Date and time of receipt
       Sample storage
Laboratory person receiving sample
       Signature	
       Title	
       Date and time of receipt
       Sample storage	
                                      Analysis
                                                   Date and time    Signature of
Container code          Method of analysis             of analysis         analyst
                                  FIGURE B-7
                      SAMPLE CHAIN OF CUSTODY FORM
                                      B-12

-------
                SAMPLE TRANSPORT PARTICIPATE CHECKLIST
Samples are to be the direct responsibility of a senior member of the source test team until
the responsibility is transferred to the laboratory supervisor.

All liquid samples must be air-tight, the liquid level marked and stored upright properly to
prevent spillage or breakage.

All solid samples are sealed and stored to prevent the loss of samples or contamination from
the ambient sources.

All sample containers properly marked on outside to avoid rough handling during transport
of the sample to the laboratory.

All sample containers locked to insure the sample integrity during transport.

The sample log (chain of custody) is initiated during sample recovery to insure quality assur-
ance from the moment of collection.
                                FIGURE B-8
            SAMPLE TRANSPORT PARTICULATE CHECKLIST
                                   B-13

-------
                     ANALYTICAL PARTICULATE CHECKLIST

Analytical balance should be calibrated with Class S weights at the time of use.

Desiccator contains anhydrous calcium sulfate.

Filter and any loose particles from the sample container desiccated from 24 to 96 hours to
a "constant weight" means a difference of no more than 0.5 mg or \% of total weight less
tare weight, whichever is greater, between consecutive weighings, with no less than 6 hours
of desiccation time between weighings and no more than 2 minutes exposed to the labora-
tory atmosphere (must be less than 50% relative humidity) during weighing.

Record level of liquid in containers on analytical data sheet to determine if leakage occurred
during transport.

Blank filters  desiccated  to a constant weight.  Blank weight should not vary from original
weight by more than ±1.0 mg.

Liquid in sample  containers remeasured by the analyst either volumetrically to ± 1 ml or
gravimetrically to ±0.5 g.

Acetone rinse samples evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure in a tared
250 ml beaker. Prevent dust or objects from entering the beaker by  placing a watch  glass
over the beaker during evaporation.

The dried sample was  desiccated to a constant weight and reported to the  nearest 0.1 mg.

The acetone blank was analyzed simultaneously with the acetone rinse using the same pro-
cedures.

Silica gel was weighed  to the nearest 0.5g using a balance in the field or laboratory.

Sample beakers covered with parafilm and stored along with used filters until report is ac-
cepted by control agency or until such time as specified by the agency.

Was analysis observed or checklist given to test team leader?
                                FIGURE B-9
                ANALYTICAL PARTICULATE CHECKLIST
                                    B-14

-------
    O
    CL,
    CO
    &5
    a
CQ
    O
    O

    H-J












































^^
py .
CO

Process:




co
•a
re

4)
J3
.5P

'S
£
43
£



e

•»*
^5

o
43
43
+•*
CD

C
.2
"cL
£
o
43
be
re
<3
re
O
+^
13
4)
J-l
re
P-
£
o
43
CO
4-t
•F"
.§
i— H
43
3
£
o
5







co
4)
tj
£
re


"O
43
"O
o
o
o
43
bo
re
43

re
S-. >-,
3 i— i
o £3
•^ o

CO _C










43
•4-1
re
f-,
13
43
•*-!
C
_o
•43
1
o
a.
£
re
4)
to
43
re
IH
4)
43
JS
O
o
1— 1
r— \





C
o
•4=
o
•d
o
t-«
c-
£
re
•M
CO

'"O
43
""S
O
fp
CD
re
t-i
43
>
re
•" !>
3 —
^ ^"
— 1^* -*

co j:














re
+j
to
4-*
J?
be
43
£
S
b
re
•M
*o
o
(— t
1— 1








CD
re
4^
re
re
be
43

""C
4>
T!
O
43
!_
43
be
re
CD

— *
•% LN ^^

-C /-^
•— i o

t-i ^3
•j5 o
TO (H
rf) ^*
43 C
W S3

CD S
13 co
4) 43
co ffi
43 [_,
"^ 41
4) ?*
&c «
S ^
> ^
re ^— i
4) 0
j ^ St^
^ w^
o "S
•4-> O
j™ j2
43 re
+j .
i s
FW
Jj
43 JSP
bC.C
X «
o 53
£ ^ i
• ^ O
43 -C 43
o ^ "re
v^ 3 =
g*3 o
C3







-
..
'I
•r-H ^Tl
« S
co re
43 —
O 43
« 3
W fe
CD

43
•«
"o
o
CD

re

^i
2
4j
§




-|- •
C

c
o
O
j=
re
43
be
re
§
re
43
•M
4)
O
42
£
"c
O
CJ

-C
t5\
**-
o
4)
(§
43
<-.
O
.S
<









"S
43

U
co

BS

re
C
re
Is
*« fli

C 43
S ^
rw
^ §

'""



















;
43
JS
•M
*o
_co
"co
>-.
i












-a
-M
4)
>_•
43
43
«
re

S*-*
2
4-3
0





t.
^3

3
tc
43
be
2
4)
S

4)
+J
Si"
O
^2
re
S
§
JH
a
3
CO
CN|
O
*+-
O
43
CO
4)
S-H
43
.S
^








^
CD
C
o
CO

re
£3
rt
"i
re
13
4)
'S ni

K 43
S ^
-rt
« S


















1
•M
CO
43
*•»

r*
*O
co
•FH
1C
k,
-al
fi
re
+j
fi
4J
•M
fi
0












43 ,
*^ c5
(Vl ^

^ T3
0 S3

§Di3
re 4)
re *^ "^

>^ g 43

^3 _-.
0 £ N

t3 —



t-
£

i
&
re
43
>,

43
-fi
-M

_O
"4)
-Q
+^
fi
ll
Is
_
So ^
S"o
o-l
*s ^
°T3
CD fi
43 +-
ft fl
O 4>
43 +J
T3 C
•^ °














































f/^
iging load conditionf
b.
o
be
E3
"C
3
^
^
JM
&•
H->
O
o
Q
























l_>
CD

T3 J
e5 *^
43 O
41 ^
3 M
^ C
>'-i
wj S
'•S «u
TO _ ^
V *J2
"S ^>
-M 13
>, 4>
^3
tj.S
43 13
!S "^
^3 4J
fi §
g v
o *c
4) "^
-C w
CO ^
re _g
4) 4-*
cfi CO
+ri •!— 1
.S3 "S
+-> CD
C *-
w fi
C Q
S u
< CO


                                                                                            II
                                                                                            S   o-

                                                                                            <§  <
                                                                                            w   -O
                                               B-15

-------












Is
<;
—
ffJ
W
£
O
PH
< <.
es i















c.
n













i~.


>


%
c
3
er
OJ
f •*
^M
£
3

'x
S

c*^
u
V
er
u
^
1
0 g £ S
b- o o
+j .,_,
C/3 3 =J
^ tf <; <
•s td
0 E-
u &J
^ S
'r <
TABLE B
OPERATING PAR

t£
i_j









4->



a.
O
'•S
^
c


























>-.
S
o
cr
CD
Maximum f
s — •
o
o
^
C "S
O *-M
•M 4)
•tS »
S ^
^ ^^
4)
Mn
«. Intermittent 	
Tnt,
3 — •
c
eS
P3 1 S
£ I C
q s o
1— J 4) O3
taJ -^ 3



O3
U
>H



ifi
3
O
3
"+j
^^ cd ^ c
—f* e si cc o «
^ S o u 3 CJ
,° OH >- £
£ ° i •*
CJO







	 Intermittent _




0.
1-
C
^


o
aj 3
-g £
? .. >,
•2 ^ c
3 2 SP
fc-i OJ
O OH « E-
•+-1 O F£ X
« C L_l O
IS OJ "~ "fl
'a-^Q . w
1 ^ '5 l°*o
^T "-1 3 c-
•s ^ S fc S
•« =S « JB S
|| | § |l|
J£ ^ a- 3 M «:
^~ *^^ ^ .«• ' i £H ^-
« c rg £ o o -d
•5 .2 o & -^ -s o
c ;S OT £ M S OT
-i-H T3 2 ^J ^^ '-^
^H l>^ " ^*
Sg « «^r£ JJ^
-i— i t*,t\ 2, tJD O ci ^^ *^ ^
CB "t^ 3 ^* """CJ fc- A A &C
*^ S ^ * ^" fl^i O O rrf
T3 o ^ """O . • r^ i s c ^
!|§ 1 ^1^° oog
*^ ^ >r F^ *^ - 1— i o c c en
r— ^TO"^ 3^^ «*^*
— "is ^MJ..^^ oo_q
2s i S s •= -a '•§ '€ -g
^•§ JrSJ ^ -§-iffi
fi3 ^0^ u -g S£5
^3^ (M<4_^p-S'r! &- ^x
O^ S s ^I^S .££0
If 111 |1 Jsst
•^ ^c>00 .5^ C^^cts
•C ^ c S el O .y 3 1-7-1 !—• CD
i [Q : •" " CS y ."ti C"" . j. • in SH
QJ ""P 3 ^^ i £* i-C £ "^ ^^ 33^
o ogs^^"^ +jfi ^- .ST.ST S
I ^ 1 a,| | s i-f |-2.s|
5 S t_-> 300^" £w ^s-*-s-
*-C Or" OSS^ O "^E cc tc to ^
T- i^ -' 1 ^" ^ ^ CJJ W Cfi CC !/]
&C O .£ -kj "" *i G C ^3 "^ ' 4-> n— —5 -^H
s — « 1 c -a *u c u
fe ^ c o > c '3
a- ? .2 u
O 1- 4-»
•M .2"af "&.OOG !-£ "S-ooc
£ S'-C 13 > tis- oom^ 9, 4^ oooo
— • "S 5i ,.,, ^ &-S -* ^ PnC OLCCSI"^ "oOC Ulf^CO^
 c
 O
'4=
                               B-16

-------

"£
o
rH
pa
EH














H
r-3
H
O
o
CO
PS
PERATING PARAMETE
O
w
j
CQ
<
£
O
-3
^f











ity exceeds the allowable visible opacity for more
'G
blanked off whenever the
lH
O
CD
CJ
re
3-
4-*
CO
-J
£

b"b
re
43
C
s-
O
E-
I
&
en
CD
'C
re
rH
CO
- J
4- CD -T3
cn ^ C
re o o
be S o
S S wi
•M |
en g
W 0 °
CO w r-H
EC cn "75
4= £ £
_: ES «
£ 2 £
O S t,
|3|
*S o ^
0 > CD
^ ° «S
LO ""3 '-P
^ S §
O re *-
4-1 -T". CD
fc 8--*
P £ «
q— i CD 3
'He _Q ~
o £ £
-C « -^
S
re
3
CD
43
1
@D
re
CQ
co
re
O

CD
S-
O
C
re
en
S1
O
^~
T^i
CM
>^
fl
re
.S
cn
3
O
X
CM
re
•£

:=
S
re
43
O
CJ
re
3
-o
fi
re
S
O
•^
CO
4->
1
.2
'cn
cn
"3
C
CD
CD
3
'cQ
'S
CD
4=
en
CD

1

r" >
C
o
be
is more restrictive. The a
i~
CD
>
CD
4=
CJ
45
S
q-T
O
-o
CD
C
re
3
o
re
re
43
CD
4=
4-
"3
in
rH




TS
CD
1
CJ
CM
O
CD
43
O
--H
i-
CJ
'S
43
CD
q-.


intenance
cc!
t3
CD
11 schedul
re
o
4^

O
• r- 1
i-H
OH
cn
re
O
CO

rH

CO
3
O
4=
CM
C
re
• S
co
t.
O
43
CM
C
CD
O
£
S-i
O
q-H
-d
CJ
-O
CD
CD
CD
X
CD
_co
4-1
1
X
4-1
OH
O
3
|co
CD
3
re
Q
"re
CJ
43

S-i
CD
CD
C
O
e^
C^

^


e"
o
CD
l-H
re
o
CD
cn
3
O
•a
re
43
CD
4^
be
'co
co
re
43
fi
O
CO
fl
3n
,
-M
45
'o
«
'^ CO
CD C
4= 0
4^ •_«
S g
OH
co
co" i— i
CD
1
^ 
-------










^_i
O
i— i
t^
Q.
E-
c/i
td
f-H
C
h*M
05
w <
CC r^
H Pi
NG PARAME
FOR A POWE
NH ' '
E-1
P.
O
>-
r-
1— H

r^
r_j
^ft
^*-i
J-




C/i
^w>
00
o
o
£


















































i-
J;
1_
5
s_
"3
'c
-^
bE
CO
^









"3
"•C
^i ^
eo be __
*^
CO
o
a 1 =3 ^
« * 1
-0 -o BU
C V
i S
£ i:
o





1!
$
*^ .^






•B
n
Q
C *i 'a =! ^
111*1
3 ^ ® 2
Ct— t CO Sfl N
° "a, «
ills
•2 | Sfa ^
B C _U *•
•S :S g -1
« o i .i
C CO fa &
1 "M"6 VI'1- * '"'
Boiler operation -
bC
g
-3
O
c
I-
"re
>
^
+j
C


•w
C}
t-
.c
«-l
CO
bC
C

&




tn
•—i
'S



_O
CO
•>->
o4
CJ

^-






Parameter

























;- ua
1 1
B f
£ « |
£ 1



1
1











"a ™ IT ,-
w ^ ^ t-
Q. eO ^
£ « M ^
c/3 S fa w





















c
o










•C
u
_w
"3
o
*o
•3
>-i
c
1—1











Aiitfimatin


o
O
^






^0
u

3
b.
^ ~
S
<
"s
E
0
a
"<
£






































o
c

3
>-v 5^
^ O
o fa
3
 C
5 -
£ 1
i- C
U i— i
•w
C
r—(



>•








F^














FIGURES
OPERATING
PERIOD FO
1 	
^ w
t LLJ
O en
< z
1 1 —
X
^
Q

en
3
o
3
S 'c
0 0
= a i °
^ c "I "S
S -51
eo .J- -g C
S ^ 43 bC t.
L § I i -S
^ -g "i s o ;
a o 3 X 3 S
Q **• ja s O
• — P ra -S +•"
j ej C ~^ O -^
3 3 U E* ° £3
B-18

-------
 Fuel (SIP)
   Fuel type
     Coal _
     Oil   _
     Gas  _
     Other.
Percentage
Coal (classified by ASTMD 388-66)
     Bituminous          subbituminous
Coal feed measurement and location
     Automatic conveyor scale
     Batch weighing — dumping hoppers
     Other (describe) _ _
anthracite
lignite
     Location of scale „ _
     None
Liquid fossil fuel
     Crude          residual          distillate
Liquid fuel feed measurement and location
     Volumetric flow meter, make. __     model
     Other (describe) _ . _
     Location of meter _
     None
Gaseous fossil fuel
     Natural gas           propane           butane
Gaseous fuel feed measurement and location
     Volumetric flow  meter, make_ _  model _
     Other (describe) _
           other
                              FIGURE B-10 (Cont.)
                     FACILITY OPERATING PARAMETERS
                DURING TEST PERIOD FOR A  POWER  PLANT
                                     B-19

-------
    Location of meter
    None
Other fuel (describe)	
    Other fuel feed measured by
FUEL ANALYSIS

PROXIMATE ANALYSIS - As-fired solid and liquid fuels
Component



Moisture

Ash

Volatile Matter

Fixed Carbon

Sulfur

Heat value, BTU/lb
             % by weight
Typical
Acceptable Range
or ultimate analysis - which includes the proximate analysis plus the following

     Nitrogen       	.	

     Oxygen	,	.	

     Hydrogen	

     Carbon        .	—	
                              FIGURE B-10 (Cont.)
                     FACILITY OPERATING PARAMETERS
                 DURING TEST PERIOD FOR A POWER PLANT
                                     B-20

-------

































"e
o
5
.&•
c^
W
"o
fc-
*4— '
fi
O
u
feD
c
•3
t-H
O
w
OJ
=>-
o
're
t-
•*-*
c
h— 1
t-H
a;
•*-»
re
bC
t-
0)

fe


^J
*s


cc
1
3
-i-»
OH
O
^-K-



tH
OJ
•fJ
OJ
s
re
t-
re
OH


























































































>~i
§
CJ
3
cr
I-H
'I
"En
a



52




o
bj




•M
s
1
-M








3 ^
o 3
"e !-
C U
*r-l
C
.2 — .
^
C
m
1 ° =
*-i r^ •>"
0 £ re
O D C
! -s 1
w E
J2 .--^r* ^
fa t=H Z
                                                    CC
                                                    LLJ
                                                    H
                                                    LJJ
                                                        I-
CC
LLJ
                                                QQ  I-  Q
                                                UJ  <  O
                                                5=  S  E
                                                -J  Q_  LU
                                                CD      Q-
                                                        w
                                                    Li  LLJ
                                                    o  o
                                                    5  ?
                                                        tr
                                                        D
                                                        Q
                      ei    co
                       c     c
                       3     3
                      c£    o^
B-21

-------












£_
en
?" - •
^t £T>5-

I ¥l
D •*- *S
Q -»
< C Q-
H .2 °
CD O -2
CD 0 ,Q
W b€ O
O c -a
Q *|S
fyJ 3 ~
^ ]S I
•M "l~1
£ w
O o
>~. co
l-s
•M C
^ r
C -M
's S
"o ^
^^ Cfl
« -M
•£ 03

T*4 ^^
O ^
O Js
tf s
o
o
1-1
C
IS
bb
V
"c
1— 1






tH
OJ
-a











+•>
5



t-
o
-M
u
£
M
Ui
W
D-,






























nj en to ce
^ QJ O 4J
tl t— t« 03 ^v ^x 333 ^s
•* JS -C *C C C C
M a 5 £ "S '§ "S


~
o
CD £ "«
Sgj >
tJD b« G
4J C r- fi
bC "H ^ *S « S
r" T^ ^ W J_j
- —• ^ T^ «T O -_ 1i_
Fn ^^ ^ ? '""' ?™ r^ f^*
o « "^ be « "0^^?=
tfcDT-
C f-*
— E
1 .b |
S w v
1 1 ¥
rO •*-* L^
HJ M
a> 3 X
— e rt
3 0 J^
FT ^ Ql fr |
B-22

-------
                      FUEL INPUT DATA DURING TEST

Automatic weighing or metering

                                   Counter (totalizer) Reading

                                   Time         Coal        Oil         Gas

End test                            	       	     	   	

Begin test                                _       ^_^__     	.   _

Difference                          .  .   —       —          	.   —

Units fed during test                 	       ^__     _^_   _

Counter conversion factor                  .._
Fuel per counter unit                 	tons   	gal.  	ft.3

Fuel fed during test                         tons         gal  ___^_. ft.3

Fuel sampled during test

Number of samples                  	.       -^^^     —^__

Total quantity of sample              	       	     	

Date of last calibration of
automatic metering device                   .       	     -
 Manual weighing or other procedure.   Use this space for monitoring procedure and
 calculations	
                                   FIGURE B-12
                    FORM FOR FUEL INPUT DATA DURING TEST
                                      B-23

-------

-------
                              APPENDIX C
DATA SHEETS (ELECTROSTATIC PR ECI PIT AT OR, PARTICULATE SCRUBBER,
            FABRIC FILTER, AND CENTRIFUGAL COLLECTOR)
             ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR DATA SHEET -PARAMETERS
                OF DESIGN AND OPERATION AFFECTING PERFORMANCE
   Facilitv.
   Monitor Name.
       .Boiler No-
        Test No. _
   Design Efficiency
        Test Date.
Recording Interval3
Sampling Time
(minutes)
0





















Clock Time
(24 hr. clock)



















Representative
design
Operating Voltage (kV)
Field Number
I





















2





















3





















4





















Operating Current (mA)
Field Number
1





















2





















3





















4





















Spark-
Rate
(Sparks/
minute)





















   Rapper timing/sequence:
   Hopper ash removal sequence:
   "Recording intervals — 15-30 minutes.
Representative,
                                During Test:
Representative.
                                During Test:
                               FIGURE C-1
              DATA SHEET-ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
                                  C-1

-------
            PARTICULATE SCRUBBER DATA SHEET - PARAMETERS
            OF DESIGN AND OPERATION AFFECTING PERFORMANCE
Monitor Namp
HpsioTi EffiriRnr.v
Tpst
Tpst
Recording Interval3
Sampling Time
(minutes)
0


















Clock Time
(24 hr. clock)



















Static Pressure
(in. H20)b
Inlet


















Outlet


















Representative
Design
Pressure Drop
Across Scrubber
(in. H2O)




















Water
Flow
Rate
(gPm)




















a Recording intervals — 15-30 minutes.
 If direct reading of pressure drop is not available.
                             FIGURE C-2
                 DATA SHEET-PARTICULATE SCRUBBER
                                 C-2

-------
                 FABRIC FILTER DATA SHEET - PARAMETERS
            OF DESIGN AND OPERATION AFFECTING PERFORMANCE
Facility
Monitor Name.
 Boiler No.,
 Test No. _
Design Efficiency.
.Test Date,
Recording Interval3
Sampling Time
(minutes)




















Clock Time
(24 hr. clock)



















Representative
Design
Pressure Drop
Across
Baghouse
(in. H20)





















Design/lN
Temperature range of filter fabric
Pressure Drop
Across
Compartment
(in. H20)
1





















ormal
Fan damper position
Fan current (amps)
Cleaning cycle
Total no. of bags in operation
2





















3





















4





















5





















During Test (flue gas temp.)



b
                                                yes
                                                yes.
         , number
         , number.
Are any bags blanked off?b               no	
Are any bags leaking?1*                   no

Recording intervals - 10 minutes. If a compartment is isolated sequentially for cleaning
 throughout the test timing mechanisms, data readings should be synchronized with cleaning
 cycle.

 This information is generally not available. It can be obtained during boiler shut-down prior
 to or after testing; however,  for many constant demand-type boilers, this is not possible.

                                 FIGURE C-3
                       DATASHEET- FABRIC FILTER
                                    C-3

-------
          CENTRIFUGAL COLLECTOR DATA SHEET - PARAMETERS
          OF DESIGN AND OPERATION AFFECTING PERFORMANCE
Facility.
Monitor Name.
Boiler No-
Test No. _
Design Efficiency.
                                           Test Date.
.
Pressure drop across
collector, in. H2O
Fan motor amperes
•~
Design


^ 	 	 	
During test
Beginning


Mid-Point


End


Is the collector sectionalized with dampers for control of Ap

       No	 Yes	
 If yes, how were dampers positioned during test?
 Hopper ash removal sequence:

   Representative.	.
   During test
                                 FIGURE C-4
                   DATA SHEET - CENTRIFUGAL COLLECTOR
                                     C-4

-------
                                    APPENDIX D
                 PROCEDURES FOR STARTUP AND SHUTDOWN OF
                         ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATORS
General
     1.   Visually inspect the mechanical dust collector units, induced draft fans, and dust
         handling equipment before the system is operated.

     2.   Close and secure all access hatches prior to operation.

     3.   Determine  that all system internal areas are completely free of tools, scrap, and
         foreign material before the fan(s) is started.

     4.   Verify that primary power is available to thermostatically controlled heaters if
         provided.  Circuit  breakers for this equipment may have  to be energized several
         hours prior to system operation.

     5.   Check all interlocks and voltage control modules.

     6.   Check main off/test selector switch and place in off position.

     7.   Check grounding connections.

Rapper System

     1.   Ground the power unit in the control cubicle.

     2.   Check distributor switch  rapper connections.

     3.   Check ground return leads for proper  connections  to sectionalized  control
         adjustments.

     4.   Check for proper mechanical adjustment.

     5.   Adjust each manual sectional  control for proper rapping intensity.

     6.   Check spark rate feed circuit and signals for proper connections.

Rectifiers and Transformers

     1.   Check all connections, switches, and insulators.

     2.   Check oil (liquid) levels.
                                         D-l

-------
     3.   See that high-tension duct vent ports are installed and free.

     4.   Be sure grounds are completed on transformer-rectifiers, bus duct, and conduits.

Routine Start-Up

If hot gases are to be passed through the precipitator, the system should be warmed up to
operating temperature before gas flows are started.

     1.   All inspection ports should be closed and dampers adjusted for proper air flow.

     2.   In wet precipitators, the liquid supply should be turned on and adjusted.

     3.   High-voltage current should be energized.

     4.   Start collector and discharge electrode rappers if provided on the system.

     5.   Turn on product discharge system.

     6.   Bring fan to full rpm with exit damper closed.

     7.   Adjust damper for desired gas flow.

     8.   Record system pressure drop and fan pressure drop.

If the system is not equipped with external heating facilities, reverse the procedures so that
the  inlet gases enter before the precipitator is energized.  When the  precipitator reaches
operating temperature, turn  on the high-voltage power.

Most wet scrubbers operate in a similar manner, such that their prestart-up and start-up
procedures are similar. These procedures are as follows:

Prestart-Up Checkout

After installation of equipment is  complete, it is advisable to provide about  a 2-week
shakedown  period in order  to be assured that the system is ready for routine start-up. Some
of the items always checked are the following:

      1.  Bump pumps and  fans to check rotation.

      2.  Disconnect pump suction piping where possible  and flush system'with external
          sources of water.
                                          D-2

-------
      3.  Install temporary strainers in pump suctions and commence liquid recycle. These
         strainers may be mesh cones installed directly in the lines.

      4.  With recycle flow on, set valves to determine operating positions for desired flow
         rates. Noting valve position at this time is useful in determining pump wear during
         operation.

      5.  The fan is dynamically balanced  by  the  fan vendor and checked for vibration.
         Two or three mils is usually an acceptable vibration amplitude.

      6.  Check and record all system pressure drops under these "clean conditions."

      7.  Check instrumentation for liquid in impulse lines, level recorder, and other places.

      8.  Check and follow all lubrication instructions.

      9.  Shut down fan, drain system, inspect internals,  and remove temporary strainers.

     10.  Review operating instructions with all appropriate plant personnel.

Routine Start-Up

     1.   Allow vessels  to  fill with liquid through  normal level  controls  if practical.
         Frequently, large volume basins such as thickeners must be  filled from external
         sources.

     2.   Start control liquid to all pump glands and fan sprays.

     3.   Start recycle pumps with liquid bleed closed.

     4.   Check system  isolation  dampers and  place scrubber in series  with primary
         operation.

     5.   Start fan and  check vibration. If fan has an inlet control damper, it should be
         normally closed until fan reaches speed, usually between one and two minutes.

     6.   Check most important operating variables, i.e., gas saturation, liquid flows, liquid
         levels, fan pressure drop, duct pressure drops, and scrubber pressure drop.

     7.   Slowly  open bleed to  pond,  thickener  or other drain system  so that slurry
         concentration  is  allowed to build up  slowly.  Check final  concentration  as a
         cross-check on bleed rate calculation.
                                         D-3

-------
Routine Shutdown

     1.   Shut down fan and fan spray water and isolate scrubbing system from operation.

     2.   Allow liquid system to operate for as long as practical. This will cool the scrubber
         and will reduce scrubbing liquid slurry concentrations.

     3.   Shut off makeup water to system allowing system to bleed normally.
                                         D-4

-------
                                 APPENDIX E
      PROCEDURES FOR TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTION OF
                        BAGHOUSE MALFUNCTIONS
(RP—reverse pulse; PR—plenum pulse; S—shaker; RF—reverse flow)

SYMPTOM                      CAUSE                      REMEDY
High baghouse
  pressure drop
Baghouse undersized
                         Bag cleaning mechanism
                           not adjusted properly
                         Compressed air pressure
                           loo low (RP, PP)
                         Repressuring pressure
                           too low (RF)
                         Shaking not strong enough
                           (S)

                         Isolation damper valves
                           not closing (S, RF, PP)
                         Bag tension too loose
                           (S)

                         Pulsing valves failed (RP)
                         Cleaning timer failure
Consult manufacturers.
Install double bags.
Add more compartments or
  modules.

Increase cleaning frequency.
Clean for longer duration.
Clean more vigorously.

Increase pressure.
Decrease duration and/or
  frequency.
Check dryer  and clean if
  necessary.
Check for obstruction in piping.

Speed up repressuring fan.
Check for leaks.
Check damper valve seals.

Increase shaker speed.
                           Check linkage.
                           Check seals.
                           Check air supply on pneumatic
                             operators.

                           Tighten bags.
                           Check diaphragm.
                           Check pilot valves.

                           Check to see if tinier is indexing
                             to all contacts.
                           Check output on all terminals.
                                      E-l

-------
SYMPTOM
        CAUSE
         REMEDY
                         Not capable of removing
                            dust from bags
                            Condensation on bags (see
                              below).
                            Send sample of dust to manu-
                              facturer.
                            Send bag to lab for analysis for
                              binding.
                            Dry clean or replace bags.
                            Reduce air flow.
Low fan motor
  amperage/low
  air volume
                         Excessive re-entrainment
                            of dust
                         Incorrect pressure reading
High baghouse

Fan and motor sheaves
  reverse
Continuously empty hopper.
Clean rows of bags randomly,
  instead of sequentially
  (PP, RP).

Clean out pressure taps.
Check hoses for leaks.
Check for proper fluid in
  manometer.
Check diaphragm in gage.

See above.

Check drawings and reverse
  sheaves.
                         Ducts plugged with dust
                            Clean out ducts and check duct
                              velocities.
                         Fan damper closed
                         System static pressure
                            too high
                         Fan not operating per
                            design

                         Belts slipping
                            Open damper and lock in
                              position.

                            Measure static on both sides of
                              fan and review with design.
                            Duct velocity too high.
                            Duct design not proper.

                            Check fan inlet configuration
                              and be  sure flow is even.

                            Check tension and adjust.
                                        E-2

-------
SYMPTOM

Dust escaping at
  source
Dirty discharge
   at stack
       CAUSE

Low air volume

Ducts leaking


Improper duct balancing


Improper hood design
Bags leaking
                          Bag clamps not sealing
                          Failure of seals in joints
                             at clean/dirty air
                             connection

                          Insufficient filter cake
                          Bags too porous
          REMEDY

See above.

Patch leaks so air does not bypass
  source.

Adjust blast gates in branch
  ducts.

Close open areas around dust
  source.
Check for cross drafts that over-
  come suction.
Check for dust being thrown
  away from hood by belt, etc.

Replace bags.
Tie off bags and replace at later
  date.
Isolate leaking compartment if
  allowable without upsetting
  system.

Check and tighten clamps.
Smooth out cloth under clamp
   and re-clamp.

Caulk or weld seams.
                             Allow more dust to build up on
                               bags by cleaning less fre-
                               quently.
                             Use a precoating of dust on bags
                               (S, RF).

                             Send bags in for permeability
                               test and review with manu-
                               facturer.
                                          E-3

-------
SYMPTOM
       CAUSE
          REMEDY
Excessive fan
  wear
Excessive fan
  vibration
High compressed
  air consumption
Fan handling too much
  dust

Improper fan
Fan speed too high

Buildup of dust on blades
                         Wrong fan wheel for
                            application

                         Sheaves not balanced
Bearings worn

Cleaning cycle too
  frequent

Pulse too long
                         Pressure too high
                         Damper valves not sealing
                            (PP)

                         Diaphragm valve failure
See above.
Check with fan manufacturer to
  see if fan is correct for
  application.

Check with manufacturer.

Clean off and check to see if fan
  is handling too much dust
  (see above).
Do not allow any water in fan
  (check cap, look for con-
  densation, etc.).

Check with manufacturer.
Have sheaves dynamically
  balanced.

Replace bearings.

Reduce cleaning cycle if possible.
Reduce duration (after initial
  shock, all other compressed
  air is wasted).

Reduce supply pressure if
  possible.

Check linkage.
Check seals.

Check diaphragms and springs.
Check pilot valve.
                                         E-4

-------
SYMPTOM
       CAUSE
          REMEDY
Reduced compressed
  air pressure (RP, PP)
Compressed air
  consumption too high

Restrictions in piping

Dryer plugged
See above.
                                                      Check piping.

                                                      Replace dessicant or bypass dryer
                                                        if allowed.
Premature bag
   failure —
   decomposition
Moisture in
   baghouse
Supply line too small

Compressor worn

Bag material improper
   for chemical composi-
   tion of gas or dust
Operating below acid
   dew point

Insufficient preheating
Consult design.

Replace rings.

Analyze gas and dust and check
   with manufacturer.
Treat with neutralizer before
   baghouse.

Increase gas temperature.
Bypass at start-up.

Run system with hot air only
   before starting process gas
   flow.
                          System not purged after
                             shut-down
                             Keep fan running for 5-10
                               minutes after process is
                               shut down.
                          Wall temperature below
                             dew point
                          Cold spots through
                             insulation

                          Compressed air
                             introducing water
                             (RP, PP)
                             Raise gas temperature.
                             Insulate unit.
                             Lower dew point by keeping
                               moisture out of system.

                             Eliminate direct metal line
                               through insulation.

                             Check automatic drains.
                             Install aftercooier.
                             Install dryer.
                                         E-5

-------
SYMPTOM
       CAUSE
          REMEDY
High screw
  conveyor wear
High air lock wear
Material bridging
  in hopper
Frequent screw
  convey or/air lock
  failure
                         Repressuring air causing
                            condensation (RF, PP)
Screw conveyor under-
  sized

Conveyor speed too high

Air lock undersized


Thermal expansion



Speed too high

Moisture in baghouse

Dust being stored in
  hopper
Preheat repressuring air.
Use process gas as source of
  repressuring air.

Measure hourly collection of dust
  and consult manufacturer.

Reduce speed.

Measure hourly collection of dust
  and consult manufacturer.

Consult manufacturer to see if
  design allows for thermal
  expansion.

Reduce speed.

See above.

Remove dust continuously.
                         Hopper slope insufficient     Rework or replace hoppers.
Conveyor opening too
  small

Equipment undersized

Screw conveyor
  misaligned

Overloading components
                                                    Use a wide flared trough.
                                                                        o
Consult manufacturer.
Align conveyor.
                                                    Check sizing to see that each
                                                       component is capable of
                                                       handling a 100% delivery
                                                       from screw conveyor.
                                        E-6

-------
SYMPTOM

High pneumatic
  conveyor wear
Pneumatic con-
  veyor pipes
  plugging
       CAUSE

Pneumatic blower too
  fast

Piping undersized
Elbow radius too short

Overloading pneumatic
  conveyor
          REMEDY

Reduce blower speed.


Review design and reduce speed
  of blower or increase pipe
  size.

Replace with long radius elbows.

Review design.
                                       E-7

-------

-------
                                                                                          o
                                                                                         -a
         ca
                  c
                  o
                  a,
                  E
"O  J5

 O  =XC

-n .=
 CD  Ui

 O '£




-C -C
                                O
                                       a,

                                      c£
                                                    .
                                                   a.
                                                   w
                                                   v
                                                                     o
                                                                     cu
                                        « -c
                                       cd u
                                                -a
                                                c
                                                               "TO  u

                                                                s *S
                     "a.    g
                     CD     -=
                     Cti     CJ
tf
O
    0,
O
fe
X
APPENDI






O
z:
i— i
LESHOOT
CQ
P
O
tf
H

i — 4
*<
PS
O
H
RECIPITA1
P-
u
i— i
EH
<
H
CO
O
w
c«
BABLE CAU
O
OS
O-

Condition
T^
W
ns
_O
k.
CD
>



      tf
—.     U
 o     tn
-H^     f I  I
 C     O
 O     «,,
                        3  ^j
                       » —^ - «M
                       T3  C
                        to  .~
Ove
                                      OS






IS
CD
a.
a,
•c
•M
u.
Q
_*
CO

^-*
o
D
=4-
4)
T3
u.
U
-^1
to
u
Ul
.Q
*-
o
O
•M
a)
££
^
o
CD
X-
Ui
O
O
•S
•»->

'3
o
Ui
'o
-a
to
o

"S
0)
O
£
"C
a.
_c

C
o
-43
^
c
o
w
4J
W
_Ui
'S

•M
t.
O
X
C/3
^
L.
O
CO
s-

.—
iC
'•3
o
OJ
1«
Ui
O
Ui
CD
S
fc.
o
^M
CO
C
to
H
                                                                                    O
                                                                                   ig
                                                                                   BcJ
                                                                                          Is
                                                                           EC  C-l

                                                                           •3  £
                                                                           fl. «


                                                                           c^-5
                                                                           " J-l  -^T


                                                                           O
                                                                           2;
O
   CJ
EH
               tc S
                  o>  w
o
i-
S
O
H
eu
S
>H
OD
i-
CO
J
Ui
Q-
O
2.
3
o
>.
CO
.£
t-
a.
o
Z
o
+j
eO
•M
a.
'3
Ui
a,
o
Z


c
o
cO
=4-c
c

1>
1

'So
Ul
C
C
c
h.
CO
5
            wj^  :;?  ^-
            «   y  o
            jj   I—
            is   !-  i.
            O   3  O
            >   tj  *-*
                  CD  JIH
            S->  >^ -3  =•=
            U,   Ur  -B   O
            «   CO  B-  _

            £   S  '3   §

            'C  'C  u  tf"
            a,  a. a. ^

            O   O  O   CD

            Z  Z  2  >
                                                  'Sb
                                           i-S  «
                                          -III
                                                        .•S  3
                                                         s  e
                                                         3  fe

                                                        ~  o

                                                        i!  C
                                                         C  O
   S
o  c
o  ^
rimar
Q.
O
Z
cu
Ul
Ui
3
U
Ui
O
+j
CO
+-t
|3-
'3

-e
P*3


4)
g

•M
O
a
Ui
Ui
«
•^
                                              F-l

-------
       a.


       to
e

r

ui
                 IS  S- 5  -«
                 S  5, s  +-  «8  S
                 °*  "^' *J  00  I-  B

                 =*"§:§"i  |i
                 :s  2  |  s  8- c
                 '  -|  a. -8 -e JS
                     I ^  - i  e
                    'O  43  £ fe Gfl
                       _c
                                           «-s   §
                                            to  -S  _
                                           ""  «-   2
                                               X   fi
                                               Q-  v
                                               e  «
                                               =   £
ch
                 ,=
                 u
                                     •O  "O
                                     C   C
                                     3   3
                                     O   0
&co
£
ci

Che
              C


       £  '£ -^
       S   *  °
 —  —  O      i_
O O  ta     03
                                                                bD


                                                               "o
 O  OD

 to  O
 b£ £

-S  c
 S  o
 9J  «
 co ^


"«  S
 W —
J5
                                                                       b£

                                                                   •H  —

                                                                   =   g

                                                                   --^ Tl
                                                                   Qj   pri
                                                                   1^1   *-
                                                                   S  B

                                                                   £ *S
                                                                   2  SD JS
                                                                   £  c  o
                                                                   •3 *43 ±3
                    S  « .ts
                       &2  ?3
                    c  -=  S
                    S  u -
                    H
                                                                                 a.
                                                                                 rt
                                                                                 O
                                                                                       -s -a
                                  O  SB

                                 =3  «^
                                                                                 OJ  «
                                                                                .S  J
                                                                                        C
                                                                                        ¥
                                                                                        i
                                                                                       Q
                                                                                        "O    —•
                                                                                         cs    CL


                                                                                        P?    PS
                                                                                                rt
                                                                                                U
                                                                                                a.
en
O
td
—
CO
<
CQ
O
       ea
       -C
       a-
 bC

.S

-a
 cc

PS

en
                       •a
                        c
                        o
                 _  o
                 -S -S
                        o

                       en
                            CL
                                                         4-  B
                                                         co  aD
                                                                   «*-
                                                                   o
                    £  ^
                    »   £
                    =  -t*
                    ^  S
                    «   ®
                                                                                        a.
                                                                                -a
                                                                                 c
                                                                                 o
                                                                                    o

                                                                                    bfi
                                                                                         o

                                                                                         O
                                                                                         cO
                                                                                         a-
                                                                                         en
O
E-«
a,
S
>-
en
           C  bC

           C  S
           o 'g>

           £ J
           o  ^
 rn  5S  «
 S JS  a.
 «
 £
 «
en
                 ™  2
                 S  o
                 2  c
                 £  °
                                                                «  O
                                                         a, "  «

                                                         M
                                                         ,2 -o

                                                                                _c

                                                                                3*
                                                                                 S  "S  £
                                                                                               cO
                                                                                               a.
                                                                                 a.
                                                                                en
                                                                CO
                                                  F-2

-------
^
Q
W
S
a
PS
                  to
                  o
                  OS

                 "cL
                  to

                 as
                         bO
                         c
                          to

                         (35
                                  to
                                  o
                                  OS

                                 "a.
                                  to
                                          13
                          O
                          to
                         JS
Replace spa
-













S
to
PS

4-
re
bfi
.S
'•C
e3
s-
to
o.
o
co
-i— i
4->
'S
3
C+-I
needed i
to
S3
O
e

to
bp
4-
"o
U(
o

4^
re
tw
OS
P ,
ximum s
rt
S














ustment
15*
re

to
4->
"S
ss
S3
to
(H
t-
l>
tM
re
to
t-
O
&
"o
CO
to
PS











£
3
;t maxim
PS
co
• i— i

                                                                                             3
                                                                                             to
                                                                                            _*-.

                                                                                            'to

                                                                                            13
co
CQ

pa
o
                 ,	i      o
 £2      *j^

 o      ^
 O      !4-i

 SD      c


I       I
                                            3
                                            to
                                           •i—i
                                            w

                                           13
                                                    «+-
                                                    o
                                                            o-
                                                            rt
                                                            to

                                                            6C
                           co       ^3      ^3       ..-"      -«2
                                  fa
                                           &H
                «
                C-
                co
                fi  "S
                o   £
                be S

               .£   to
               S   ^



                If
                O
                                                                                                       (8

                                                                                                      fa
                                                                                                               C
                                                                                                               bD
                                                             bD
                                                             C
O


OH
         X  -^
          be  ?
         t3
          re
          to
          os
          fi-
                               re
                               to

                               cd
                          to  ii-
                           to
                                                     r  to
                                   nj  4.1

                                   DH -2
                                                             re
                                                             Q-
                                            bC
                                                         £  '43
                                                         re   re
                                                        	   to

4-1
C
to
3
to
O
to
C
O
cu
f
to
o
X
"e
to
£
co
3
-o*
CQ
1

to
"o
o
^^
•o
c
o
fi*
to
1-
co
to
O





co
"c
to
£
4-
.§.
                                                            F-3

-------
 w
           re   CD

           bo "re
           OH  CO

           O   E-

           co   O
•3   3
 oi   e
 "H
*->
"c
3
J£
-t3
CD
^

                                                       o
                                                       c
                                             £   3   OH
                                             r-1  . —.  CC
                                             §  -6*  £

                                             §-"   s
                                             CD  4-   X

                                             S   £^
CO
+- *
£"*"

_o
- ^
curren
E-.
re
]§-
'3
CD
P-i
C

-------